HomeMy WebLinkAboutB12-0035 PROJECT MANUAL_corrections required L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH TownofVail,Colorado P ROJECT M ANUAL -V OLUME I ConstructionDocuments February 22, 2012 MELICK ASSOCIATES, INC. Architecture - Int eriors - Planning 355TellerStreet,Suite370 ,Lakewood,Colorado80226 P RO S PEC P ROJECT M ANUALS P S P M R O P E C R O J E C T A N U A L S 934 Tenderfoot Drive Larkspur, Colorado 80118
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado T ABLEOF C ONTENTS -V OLUME I Project Directory SupplementaryConditionsoftheContract DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary 01210 Allowances 01230 Alternates 01250 Contract Modification Procedures 01270 Unit Prices 01290 Payment Procedures 01310 Project Management and Coordination 01320 Construction Progress Documentation 01322 Photographic Documentation 01330 SubmittalProcedures 01400 QualityRequirements 01420 References 01500 TemporaryFacilitiesandControls 01524 ConstructionWasteManagement 01600 Product Requirements 01700 Execution Requirements 01731 CuttingandPatching 01732 SelectiveDemolition 01770 Closeout Procedures 01781 Project RecordDocuments 01782 Operation andMaintenance Data DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION 02768 DecorativeCement Concrete Pavement DIVISION 3–CONCRETE 03300 Cast-In-PlaceConcrete DIVISION 4– MASONRY 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 04860 StoneMasonry DIVISION 5– METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05310 Steel Deck 05400 Cold-FormedMetal Framing 05500 Metal Fabrications 05511 Metal Stairs 05521 PipeandTubeRailings 05530 Gratings 05721 OrnamentalRailings DIVISION 6- WOODANDPLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06108 Exterior Rough Carpentry 06130 Heavy Timber Construction 06160 Sheathing 06201 Exterior Finish Carpentry TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 06202 Interior Finish Carpentry DIVISION 7-THERMAL AN D MOISTURE PROTECTION 07141 Cold Fluid-AppliedWaterproofing 07180 Concrete Traffic Coatings 07210 Building Insulation 07311 Asphalt Shingles 07531 Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM)Roofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07720 Snow Retention System 07841 Through-PenetrationFirestopSystems 07842 Fire-ResistiveJoint Systems 07920 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8- DOORSANDWINDOWS 08110 Steel DoorsandFrames 08212 StileandRailWoodDoors 08213 AluminumCladWood Doors 08305 AccessDoorsandFrames 08550 AluminumCladWoodWindows 08710 Door Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9-FINISHES 09220 Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) 09250 GypsumBoard 09265 GypsumBoard Shaft-Wall Assemblies 09653 ResilientWallB aseandAccessories 09680 Carpet 09900 Painting DIVISION 10 –SPECIALTIES 10200 Louvers and Vents 10520 FireProtectionSpecia lties (Extinguishers only) DIVISION 11 –EQUIPMENT DIVISION12 – FURNISHINGS DIVISION 13 –SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION 14 -CONVEYING SYSTEMS 00020 Request For Quotation 00100 Instructions To Providers 00310 Quotation Form 00800 Supplemental Conditions 01010 Summary Of Work 01040 Project Procedures 01300 Submittals 01600 Material And Handling 01700 Final Contract Compliance Review 01800 Maintenance 01900 Related Work 14210 Electric Traction El evator (Provide New) 14220 Electric Traction El evator (Modernization) TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-2
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-3 T ABLEOF C ONTENTS -V OLUME II Project Directory DIVISIONS 15/16 –FIRE PROTECTION 15300 Fire Protection Systems 16721 Addressable Fire Alarm Systems DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 220500 Common Work Results For Plumbing 220523 General Duty Valves For Plumbing Piping 220529 Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping 220533 Heat Tracing For Plumbing Piping 220700 Plumbing Insulation 221116 Domestic Water Piping 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 221316 Sanitary Waste & Vent Piping 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 221329 Sanitary Sewerage Pumps 221413 Facility Storm Drainage Piping 221423 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties DIVISION 23 -- HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230500 Common Work Results For HVAC 230523 General Duty Valves For HVAC Piping 230529 Hangers And Supports For HVAC Piping 230593 Testing, Adjusting, & Balancing For HVAC 230700 HVAC Insulation 230900 Instrumentation And Control For HVAC 230993 Sequence Of Operations For HVAC Controls 232113 Hydronic Piping 233113 Metal Ducts 233300 Duct Accessories 238239 Unit Heaters DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 260500 Basic Electrical Requirements 260526 Grounding 260529 Supporting Devices 260533 Raceways, Boxes, And Cabinets 260923 Lighting Control Devices 262416 Panelboards 262726 Wiring Devices 263500 Solar Photovoltaic Devices 265100 Interior Lighting 265600 Exterior Lighting 265800 Rim Roof Heating System END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PROJECTDIRECTORY 1 PROJECTDIRECTORY PROJECT LionSquareLodgeSouth 600W.LionsheadPlace Vail, Colorado OWNER Lion SquareLodge South 600W.LionsheadPlace Vail, CO 81657 (970) 477-4432 Fax (970) DEVELOPER VieleDevelopment,LLC 1000S. Frontage Road Vail, CO 81657 GENERAL CONTRACTOR VieleConstruction, LLC 1000S. Frontage Road Vail, CO 81657 ARCHITECT Melick Associates, Inc. 355 S.Teller Street, Suite 370 Lakewood,Colorado80226 (303) 534-1930Fax (303) 534-1931 CIVIL ENGINEER Peak LandConsulting North FrontageRoad Vail, Colorado 81657 (970) STRUCTURALENGINEER Monroe& Newell 1701 Wynkoop, Suite200 Denver, Colorado 80202 (303) 623-4927Fax (303) 623-6602 SOILS INVESTIGATION KoechleinConsulting Lakewood, CO MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL Architectur alEngineeringConsultants(AEC) ENGINEER P.O.Box8489 Avon, Colorado 81620 970-748-8520 FIREPROTECTIONENGINEER ShanerLifeSafety LANDSCAPEARCHITECTURE NeilsLunceford Silverthorne, Colorado
1 SUPPLEMENTA R Y CONDITIONS L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The SupplementaryConditionschangeand amendthe GeneralConditionsoftheContractforConstruction, AIADocumentA201,1987Edition,oftheAmericanInstituteofArchitects. Whereanypartofthe General Conditionsismodifiedby theseSupplementaryConditions or by Division1 requirements,the unaltered provisionsshallremainineffect. ARTICLE 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS Attheendofthisclauseaddthefollowingsentencesandsubclauses: 1.2.3.1 Addendaand Architect’sSupplemental Instructionstake precedenceoveroriginal construction documents. 1.2.3.2 Shouldthere beconflict withinSpecifications,onDrawings or betweentheSpecificationsand Drawings,Developer/Contractorshallnotify ArchitectbeforeproceedingandArchitectshalldecidewhich stipulation will provide best installationandhisdecision shall be final. 1.2.3.3 Indrawings,theprecedence shallbedrawingsoflargerscaleoverthoseofsmallerscale,figured dimensions overscaled dimensions, and notedmaterialsover graphicindications. ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACTOR Revise thefollowing Subparagraph(s)asindicated: 3.3.1 Thecontractorshallsupervis eanddirecttheWork,usingtheContractor’sbestskilland attention. The Contractor shallbe solelyresponsible for andhave controlover construction means, methods,techniques,sequencesandprocedures,for providingandmaintaini ngasafeplacetowork,for coordinatingall portionsofthe WorkundertheContract and(1)toreviewanyspecifiedconstructionor installationprocedure,includingthose recommended bythe manufacturers;(2)toadvise theArchitect(a)if thespecifiedproceduredeviatesfrom good constructi onpractice,(b)iffollowingthe procedure willaffect anywarranties,includingthe Contractor’s generalwarranty,or(c)ofanyobjectionstheContractor may havetotheprocedure; and (3) to propose anyalternativeprocedurewhichthe Contractorwill warrant. 3.4 Laborandmaterials: Addthefollowing Subparagraph 3.4.3 to 3.4 3.4.3 AftertheContracthasbeenexecuted,theOwnerandtheArchitectwillconsideraformal requestforsubstitutionofproductsinplaceofthose specifiedwithfulldisclos urebytheContractorof functional,material,cost, andother differencesbetween the products. Paragraph 3.18 ReviseSubparagraph 3.18.1 to read: 3.18.3 The obligations oftheContractor underthis paragraph3.18shall notextendtotheliability ofthe Architect,theArchitect’sconsultants,andagentsandemployeesofanyofthem arisingoutof(1)The preparationorapproval ofmaps,drawings,opinions,reports,surveys,change orders,designsor specifications,or(2)Thegivingof orfailuretogive directionsorinstructionsby theArchitect,the Architect’sconsultants,andagentsandemployeesofany ofthem providedsuchgivingorfailuretogiveis the primary causeof the injury or damage, and is required under the terms of this Agreement.
2 SUPPLEMENTA R Y CONDITIONS L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ARTICLE 4 – ADMINISTRATION Paragraph 4.1 ReviseSubparagraph 4.1.2to read: 4.1.2 Duties,responsibilitiesandlimitationsofauthorityoftheArchitectassetforthinthe Contract Documentsshall not bemodifiedorextendedwithout writtenconsentofthe Owner,Contractor andArchitect. Consentshallnot beunreasonablywithheld. IntheeventtheArchitectisnotcontractually obligatedtoprovidesomeorallservicesduringtheconstructionphase,andunlessotherwiseprovidedfor intheContract Documents,theOwnershall berespon sible,and hold theArchitect harmless,forthose construction relatedservices stipulatedthroughout thisdocument or asmay otherwise be required. Paragraph 4.2 ReviseSubparagraph 4.2.2to read: 4.2.2 TheArchitectwillvisitthesiteatintervalsappropriatetothestageofconstructionto become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the completed Work as permanent improvementsandto determineingeneralifthe Workisbeingperformedinamannerindicatingthat the Work, whencompleted,will beinaccordance withtheContractDocuments. However,theArchitect will notberequiredtomakeexhaustiveorcontinuouson-siteinspectionstocheckqualityorquantityofthe Work. Onthe basis ofon-siteobservationsasanArchitect,the Architect will keepthe Ownerinformed of the progressof theWorkfor the existing building. ReviseSubparagraph 4.2.8to read: 4.2.8 TheArchitectmayprepareASI’sandmayauthorizeminorchangesintheWorkas providedin Paragraph 7.4. ARTICLE5– SUBCONTRACTORS 5.3.1 Addthe following Clause: 5.3.2 Beforedoinganywork,eachsubcontractorshallverifymeasurementsatthejob-site pertainingto hisworkandshall beresponsibleforcorrectnessofsame. Any variationsinactual and drawn dimensionsshall be submittedto Architect for consider ation beforeproceeding with work. ARTICLE7– CHANGESIN THEWORK The Ownerand GeneralContractorshallagreeto proceduresforchanges,and the Ownermaymakesuch changeswithoutinvalidatingtheContract. ReasonablechargesforContractor’soverheadandprofitand subcontractormarkupshallbeagreedtobytheOwnerandGeneral Contractorpriortoexecutionofa Change Order. ARTICLE 11–INSURANCE ANDBONDS 11.1.1 Inthe2 nd lineafterthewords“inacompanyorcompanies”DELETEthewords“lawfully authorizedtodobusinessinthejurisdiction inwhic htheProjectislocated”andi nthatplaceINSERTthe words“licensedtodo businessintheState of Colorado , withtheOwner, Architectand hisConsultantsas namedinsureds;” ReviseSubparagraph11.1.2toread:
3 SUPPLEMENTA R Y CONDITIONS L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 11.1.2 TheinsurancerequiredbySubparagraph11.1.1ofAIAA201shallbewrittenfornotlessthan limits ofliability stipulated by the Owner or requir ed by law, whichever coverage isgreater. ARTICLE 12– UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OFWORK 12.2.2 ADD: “GeneralContractor shall, in case of work performedby his subcontractors andwhere guaranteesarerequired,securewarrantiesfrom subcontractorsand deliversametoOwneruponcompletion ofwork. Shouldanydefectsdevelopinaforesaidworkwithinspecifiedperiodsduetofaultsinmaterials orworkmanship,contractor(s)shallmakerepairsand donecessary worktocorr ect defective workin accordancewiththeContractDocuments . Repairsandcorrectivework,includingcostsofmakinggood otherworkdamaged byorotherwiseaffected bymakingofrepairs orcorrectivework,shall be accomplished withoutcosttoOwnerand at entirecostandexpens e ofcontractor(s) withinmutuallyagreed upontimeframeandafterwrittennoticefrom Owner. Nothing hereinintendstoimplythatguarantyshall applytoworkwhichhasbeenabus edorneglectedby Owner of successor(s) in interest. END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SUMMA R Y 01100 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Project consists of sel ective demolition, addition and renovation to the existing hotel condominium units at Lion Square Lodge South, in Vail, Colorado. Full description of project scope below. B. Owner and Location: Lion Squa re Lodge South HOA, 660 West Lionshead Place, Vail, Colorado 81657. C. General Contractor: Hyder Construction, 543 Santa Fe Drive Denver, CO 80204. (303) 825-1313 D. Architect: Melick Associates, Inc., 355 Teller Street, Suite 370, Lakewood, Colorado. E. Geotechnical Report: See report included in Lion Square Lodge East Manual. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work contemplated by this description consists of the construction of additions to the east and west sides of the existing building for living and bedroom expansions. The scope of work is intended to be a core and shell package and not include the interiors of the existing units. B. The construction type is Type V-A at the existing building and the anticipated construction type of the building is III-B. C. The occupancy type is R-2. D. The structural frame is wood with open web steel joists at the existing building. E. The major systems in the building include architectur al, structural, plumbing, fire protection, mechanical and electrical systems. F. The scope of the project is further defined by the following expansions and amenities to be provided: 1. Bedroom additions 2. Living / Dining room additions 3. New elevators and egress stairs 4. Existing unit fireplace replacements 5. Deck additions including adjacent living room and loft expansions 6. Replace north and south decks/balconies 7. Remove existing parapet roof waterproofing and install new roofing membrane on entire parapet roof. 8. Developer responsible for unforeseen conditions 9. Developer to protect existing units and use during construction 10. Remove, store and reinstall all Owner furnishings 11. One hour rated egress stair enclosures 12. New two hour rated exterior walls consisting of 6” metal studs @ 16” o.c with 2 layers 5/8” type ‘x’ gypsum board each side
SUMMA R Y 01100 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 13. Add one hour rated shaft wall assembly to existing exterior walls to remain and add new exterior finishes per architectural drawings 14. Provide fire proofing between units as required by state and local codes 15. Construction type 3B for occupancy and height building code requirements 16. Construction conforming to applicable building codes 17. Sprinkler and fire alarm design by Shaner Life Safety G. Scope of work not included: 1. Existing unit interior design remodel H. Summary of Code Restrictions: All codes and regulatio ns in effect at the site as of March 1, 2007 shall apply. I. Summary of fees: 1. The Developer will pay for all permits and utility construction fees, including development fees. 2. If required, the Developer will pay for utility service company capital cost development fees and/or plant investment fees and relocation of public utilities. 3. The Developer is to provide Builder’s Risk Insurance coverage including deductibles. J. Summary of items not covered by the Project Manual: The following list covers items of work not provided for under the specification manual. This is not a complete list and is intended only to indicate some of the major items that will not be included. These costs should be covered by the Developer under a separate budget for soft or indirect costs for the project. 1. Architect fees 2. Special consulting fees 3. Land survey 4. Utility development fees - tap fees 5. Testing and inspections 6. Builders Risk Insurance 7. Dewatering 8. Soils report 9. Telephone 10. Payment and performance bond (available if requested) 11. Models or renderings 1.3 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single prime GMP contract between Developer and General Contractor. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction to be AIA Document A201 except as amended or supplemented by the Supplementary Conditions. These General and Supplementary Conditions shall apply to all work of the Project and all sections of these specifications. 1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
SUMMA R Y 01100 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1.5 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative's written permission. 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are or ganized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use cer tain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requ ires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is us ed within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
SUMMA R Y 01100 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONTRACTOR A. General Contractor to perform the following with regards to the project execution and in coordination with the installation requirements in the Ar chitect’s Drawings and this Project Manual. 1. GC to field verify bond of stucco to gypsum board sheathing and notify Architect of broken bond between these materials. 2. GC to provide mockup of all exte rior colors and finishes for revi ew and approval by Architect and Town of Vail Design Review Board. 3. GC to notify the Architect immediately once co nflicts with the contract documents and/or unforeseen issues are discovered during the course of construction for the purpose of resolving design issues with the Architect. 4. GC to assist in resolving any conflicts, coordi nation issues and unforeseen issues in a timely fashion during construction. 5. GC to cooperate with the Architect who is to document and interpret the design. 6. GC to cooperate with the Owner who is to interp ret the functional and operational requirements. 7. GC to communicate with the design team consultants through the Architect. 8. GC to work with the design team during the pre-construction process to resolve issues with means and methods of construction, sequencing, as well as cost and schedule impacts. 9. GC to perform the following construction project management tasks from preconstruction services through the duration of the project: a. GC to plan the subcontractor activities ahead of schedule so that there is time to resolve issues and properly sequence trades prio r to the trades working in the field. b. GC to provide a regularly updated project schedule. c. GC to track updated construction costs of the project. d. GC to issue and track PCOs and COs. e. GC to submit shop drawings as required by th e contract documents to the Architect in a timely fashion so that there is adequate tim e to do a thorough review and re-submittal(s) as necessary for proper corrections and coordination prior to construction of that activity. f. GC to identify conflicts and needs for clarification with the Architect through the RFI process and plan ahead in such a way that it does not cause a delay to the project. g. GC to follow the RFI process for questi ons and clarifications to the drawings. h. GC to follow the ASI process for supplemental instructions provided by the Architect, with GC providing timely input regarding cost, constructability, and schedule impact. i. GC to issue weekly meeting minutes during co nstruction that reflect and track all issues to be resolved, action items, and the responsible party(s). END OF SECTION 01100
ALLOWANCES 01210 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and pro cedural requirements governing the following: 1. Unit-cost allowances. 2. Testing and inspecting allowances. B. See Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" fo r procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. 1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Cont ract, advise Architect of th e date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quan tities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.5 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and material s ordered by Owner under allowance and shall include taxes, fr eight, and delivery to Project site. B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.
ALLOWANCES 01210 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1.6 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs. C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.7 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES A. Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of Contractor engaging testing agencies, actual tests and inspections, and reporting results. B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs for retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for incidental labor to assist the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum. C. Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.8 UNUSED MATERIALS A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowa nce to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not economically practical to return th e material for credit. If direct ed by Architect, deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is Contractor's responsibility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
ALLOWANCES 01210 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Unit-Cost Allowances as detailed by Allowance number below: 1. Unit-Cost Allowance #1: a. 45.00 per square yard for new floor finish in stalled in each residential unit. Allowance is for the complete installed system. 6. Unit-Cost Allowance #6: a. Add one (1) Layer of 5/8"gypsum wallboard to existing ceiling of each unit. Include necessary abatement and/or resilient channel installation. 7. Unit-Cost Allowance #7: a. Add Mechanical room housekeeping pad(s). END OF SECTION 01210
ALTERNATES 01230 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No othe r adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscella neous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installati on whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately followi ng award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, reject ed, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other wo rk of the Contract. D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate #1: Acoustical Partition Upgrades 1. Base: Wall types as scheduled with no acoustical modifications. 2. Alternate: Addition of various acoustical elements per Drawings A0 .3 as selected by unit owners.
ALTERNATES 01230 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Alternate #2: Unit Pavers 1. Base: Colored concrete with medium broom finish, as specified in Section 02768 Decorative Cement Concrete Pavement 2. Alternate: Unit Pavers removed, cleaned and reinstalled in exterior areas as indicated on Civil Drawings and specified in Section 02780. C. Alternate #3: Exterior Wood Siding 1. Base: Cedar per Section 06201. 2. Alternate: Douglas Fir per Section 06201. D. Alternate #4: Asphalt Shingles (Section 07311) 1. Base: CertainTeed Corporation; Independence. 2. Alternate: Owens Corning Co.; Oakridge Pro with 30-year warranty. E. Alternate #5: Interior Wood Soffits 1. Base: Wood soffits per Drawings and section 06201. 2. Alternate: High density polyurethane architectural custom soffits by Spectis Moulders, as detailed in Section 10520. END OF SECTION 01230
CONT R ACT MODIFICATION P R OCEDURES 01250 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections: Division 1 Section "Product Re quirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for info rmation only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request afte r receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Constructi on Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unfo reseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
CONT R ACT MODIFICATION P R OCEDURES 01250 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or sy stem for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests or forms provided by Owner. 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an item ized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250
UNIT PRICES 01270 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices related to future unit build-out not under the scope of this contract. B. See Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Co ntract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measuremen t and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES A. Install the following drywall: 1. New 8’ high drywall partition including wood studs at 16” on center including finish, texture and 2 coats latex paint. a. $ per lf. 2. Upgrade skip trowel finish to heavy mission style texture. a. $ per sf.
UNIT PRICES 01270 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Install the following fireplace finishes: 1. Stone surround for fireplace (18”w x 5’-0” on both sides and over t op of fireplace to underside of mantel): Robinson Brick, thin stone veneer, Oldmill to mantel height of five feet, per each fireplace; Robinson Brick, thin stone veneer, Kiamichi to mantel height of five feet. a. $ per each fireplace. 2. Fireplace mantel, 8” x 8” x 8’-0” long, stained oak or alder. a. $ per each. 3. Fireplace replacement including flue per specifications. a. $ per each. C. Install the following carpet options with pad: 1. Shaw/Queen, natural Boucle, Rattan (007700), Jute (00701). a. $ per sy. 2. Beaulieu, Ultimate Twist, Beach Pebbles. a. $ per sy. 3. Carpet Pad: Mohawk, 1/2" thick, 8 lb., Rebond. a. $ per sy. D. Install new porcelain tile at entry per the following options: 1. Tivoli Beige, Glazed Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12.25”, #122 Linen grout, set on 45 degree angle for traditional, set square for contemporary. a. $ per sf 2. Tivoli Noce, Glazed Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12 .25”, Mosaic Touchstone Walnut, (4) 2”x2” tiles, #380 Haystack grout, set on 45 degrees for traditional, set square for contemporary. a. $ per sf 3. Fusion Amber Red Glazed, Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12.25”, Perla Queen Red Matte 6” x 6”, #105 Earth grout, set on 45 degree angle for traditional, set square for contemporary. a. $ per sf 4. Fusion Sandalwood, Glazed Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12.25”, Mosaic Fusion Sandalwood, 2” x 2” on mesh, #135 Mushroom grout, set on 45 degrees for traditional, set square for contemporary. a. $ per sf E. Install the following cabinets and wood trim: 1. Contemporary Cabinets – Select Poplar or similar species, wood finish option 1 AFV (medium honey brown), wood finish option 2 Chateau (medium/dark brown), flat panel with flat stiles with rails and eased cut edges, wire pull, brushed nickel. a. $ per lf 2. Traditional Cabinets – Knotty Cherry, square raised panel, wood finish option 1 medium cherry, wood finish option 2 dark cherry, hammered knob, finish option 1 oil rubbed bronze, finish option 2 brushed nickel. a. $ per lf
UNIT PRICES 01270 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3. Contemporary Interior Wood Trim – Select Poplar or similar species, flat with square edges, wood finish option 1 AFV (medium honey brown), wood finish option 2 Chateau (medium/dark brown). a. Base ½” x 6” - $_ per lf b. Case 5/8” x 3” - $ per lf c. Door Header 1” x 4” (header to extend beyond case by ½”) – d. $ per lf 4. Traditional Interior Wood Trim – Knotty Cherry, base style 623, case style 346, wood finish option 1 medium cherry, wood finish option 2 dark cherry. a. Base ½” x 6 - $ per lf b. Case 5/8” x 3” - $ per lf c. Door Header 1” x 4” (header to extend beyond case by ½”) – d. $ per lf 5. Contemporary Interior Doors – Select Poplar or similar series, 2 panel 2/stile and rail construction, square eased edges, interior flat panel, wood finish option 1 AFV (medium honey brown), wood finish option 2 Chateau (medium/dark brown). a. $ per each 6. Traditional Interior Doors – Knotty Cherry, 2 pane l w/ stile and rail construction, traditional raised panel square, wood finish option 1 medium cherry, wood finish option 2 dark cherry. a. $ per each 7. Contemporary Interior Door Lever Handles – Schlage, Avanti, 613 finish a. Privacy $ per each F. Install the following kitchen appliances: 1. Install new range, Whirlpool, GY396LXPB, Slide In, 30 11/16”w x 27”d x 35 5/8” h, black or stainless. a. $ per each 2. Install new microwave, Whirlpool, MH2175XS, 29 7/8”w x 15 7/16”d x 17 ¼”h, black or stainless. a. $ per each 3. Install new dishwasher, Whirlpool, DU1100XTP, 24 1/2”d x 23 7/8”w x 34 1/2”h, black or stainless. a. $ per each G. Install kitchen slab granite per the following options: 1. New Venetian Gold, 3cm thick, eased edge top and bottom, with full height or 6” granite backsplash, upgrade option of ogee edge. a. $ per sf
UNIT PRICES 01270 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Sucuri, 3cm thick, eased edge top and bottom, with full height or 6” granite backsplash, upgrade option of ogee edge. a. $ per sf 3. Copper Brown, 3cm thick, eased edge top and bottom, with full height or 6” granite backsplash, upgrade option of ogee edge. a. $ per sf 4. Golden Fantasy, 3cm thick, eased edge top and bottom, with full height or 6” granite backsplash, upgrade option of ogee edge. a. $_ per sf H. Install bathroom granite vanity counter tops with matching 4” high granite backsplash with eased top and bottom edge: 1. New Venetian Gold, 3cm thick. a. $ per sf 2. Sucuri, 3cm thick. a. $ per sf 3. Copper Brown, 3cm thick a. $ per sf 4. Golden Fantasy, 3cm thick. a. $ per sf I. Install bath floors, tub/shower walls per the following options: 1. Tivoli Beige, Glazed Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12 .25”, Mosaic Touchstone Gold, (4) 2” x 2” tiles, #122 Linen grout, set on 45 degrees for traditional on floors, set square for contemporary on floors, set square on wall, tile baseboard. a. $ per sf 2. Tivoli Noce, Glazed Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12.2 5”, Mosaic Touchstone Walnut, (4) 2” x 2” tiles, #380 Haystack grout, set on 45 degrees for traditional on floors, set square for contemporary on floors, set square on wall, tile baseboard. a. $ per sf 3. Fusion Amber Red Glazed, Glazed Porcelain Tile , 12.25” x 12.25”, Perla Queen Red Matte, 6” x 6” tiles, #105 Earth grout, set on 45 degrees for traditional on floors, set square for contemporary on floors, set square on wall, tile baseboard. a. $ per sf 4. Fusion Sandalwood, Glazed Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12.25”, Mosaic Fusion Sandalwood, 2” x 2” on mesh, #135 Mushroom grout, set on 45 degrees for traditional on floors, set square for contemporary on floors, set square on wall, tile baseboard. a. $ per sf
UNIT PRICES 01270 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado J. Install shower/tub tile wall accent 1. Shabui Mosaic white/autumn, 6” x 12” tiles on mesh backing, #122 Linen grout, install on mesh backing at eye level. a. $ per lf 2. Tumbled Natural Stone, Sand/Walnut, 4” x 12” listelle mosaic on mesh backing, #122 Linen grout, install on mesh backing at eye level. a. $ per lf 3. Botanical Foliage, 2 rows at eye level for a total of 4” height, 4” x 12”, #380 Haystack grout, install on mesh backing at eye level. a. $ per lf 4. Tumbled Natural Stone, Antalya Dark/Sienna Gold/Mediterranean Ivory, 4” x 12” on mesh backing, #380 Haystack grout, install one row of listelle at eye level. a. $ per lf 5. Sandgate Traditional Liner, metallic/Mosaic Perla Red Queen, 1” x 2”, 1” x 12 ½” x 12”, #105 Earth grout, install on mesh backing at eye level Sandgate Traditional Liner on top and bottom of 2 rows Mosaic Perla Red Queen (1” x 2”). a. $ per lf 6. Mosaic Fusion Red Amber/Floral, 2” x 2” metal inset, 2” x 2” on diagonal to 4.5” height, #105 Earth grout, 4.5” row of mosaic on diagonal with 2” x 2” metal inset randomly every 5”. a. $ per lf 7. Tumbled Chevron Deco, 5” x 12” tiles on mesh backing, #135 Mushroom grout, install on mesh backing at eye level. a. $ per lf. 8. Dorset Fiddlehead Metal, 3” x 12”, #135 Mushroom grout, install on mesh backing at eye level. a. $ per lf. K. Install shower floor per the following options: 1. Mosaic Touchstone Gold, 2” x 2” on mesh, #122 Linen grout, set square. a. $ per sf. 2. Mosaic Touchstone Walnut, 2” x 2” on mesh, #122 Linen grout, set square. a. $ per sf. 3. Mosaic Fusion Red Amber, 2” x 2” on mesh, #122 Linen grout, set square. a. $ per sf. 4. Mosaic Fusion Sandalwood, 2” x 2” on mesh, #122 Linen grout, set square. a. $ per sf. L. Install undermount kitchen sink and faucet: 1. Sink - Kohler, Undertones – 2 basins, 16 gauge stainless steel. a. $ per each.
UNIT PRICES 01270 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Faucet – Kohler, Forte Single Control Pullout, K-10433. a. $ per each M. Install the following bathroom fixtures: 1. Lavatory – Kohler, Caxton (undermount in slab granite installations), K-2209, vitreous china, white, interior size 15” x 12”. a. $ per each. 2. Bathtub – Kohler, Villager, K-715, K-716, cast iron, white. a. $ per each. 3. Comfort Height Toilet – Kohler, Cimmarron Comfort height, Round, K-3497, toilet seat cachet K- 4689 plastic, material vitreous china, white. a. $ per each. 4. Toilet for use with Banjo Top – Kohler, Rialto , K-3386, toilet seat french curve white K-4663 plastic, vitreous china, white. a. $ per each. N. Install the following bathroom accessories: 1. Robe Hook, Kohler, Forte, K-11275, option 1 brushed nickel, option 2 polished chrome. a. $ per each. 2. Towel Bar, Kohler, Forte, K-11270 or K-11271, option 1 brushed nickel, option 2 polished chrome. a. $ per each. 3. Amenity Glass Shelf, Kohler, Forte, K-11283, option 1 brushed nickel, option 2 polished chrome. a. $ per each. 4. Toilet Tissue Holder, Franklin Brass, Recessed Tissue Holder, option 1 stainless steel – Century Collection #5567SF, option 2 polished chrome – Futura Collection #D2497PC. a. $ per each. 5. Mirror, beveled glued on mirror. a. $ per sf. O. Install the following electrical: 1. One duplex outlet including wiring and connection to adjacent outlet. a. $ per each. 2. Replace existing electrical panel with new unit at maximum capacity of existing primary wiring and meter size. a. $ per each. 3. One recessed ceiling can including connectio n to existing adjacent ceiling power source. a. $ per each.
UNIT PRICES 01270 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 4. Move existing chandelier in dining room up to 4 feet from existing location and cover existing box. a. $ per each. 5. Duplex outlets in above wall, each, at six foot on center. a. $ per lf. 6. Telephone/cable/data port including wiring from closest existing source. a. $ per each. 7. Frame box and provide power and cable access for 60” or less plasma or LCD TV over new fireplace and to side of fireplace on backside of ea st stair wall, per over fireplace and to side of fireplace. a. $ per each. 8. Hardware for new unit interiors: Schlage F-series, Avanti lever, 613 finish. a. $ per each. END OF SECTION 01270
PAYMENT PROCEDU R ES 01290 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and proced ural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Cost-loaded CPM Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the Schedule of Values. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least on e line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets.
PAYMENT PROCEDU R ES 01290 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Proj ect Record Documents, and demonstration and training in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in- place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and Owner’s Representa tive and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
PAYMENT PROCEDU R ES 01290 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets or forms provided by the Owner’s Representative as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on fo rm. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Va lues and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: Refer to Exhibit of Agreement between Owner and Contractor. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative ac tions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insura nce and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Pa rtial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not lim ited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
PAYMENT PROCEDU R ES 01290 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting fo r final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. Evidence that claims have been settled. 7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 8. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290
P R OJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly insta llation of each part of the Work. Coordinate constr uction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordina te installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
P R OJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Dr awings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm). 3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect, through will return one copy. a. Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. 4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owne r and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.
P R OJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner, and Architect, but no la ter than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another conv enient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference sh all be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of Record Documents. l. Use of the premises and existing building. m. Work restrictions. n. Owner's occupancy requirements. o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Construction waste management and recycling. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. u. Security. v. Progress cleaning. w. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences : Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manu facturers and fabricators i nvolved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases.
P R OJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant c onference discussions, agreements, a nd disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the confer ence cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impedi ments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at w eekly or regular intervals as indicated in Agreement. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current pr ogress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represen ted at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that curr ent and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication.
P R OJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current pr ogress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represen ted at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determin e whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently w ith report of each meeting. c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, in cluding the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours.
P R OJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actio ns resulting from each meeting. 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeti ng, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shal l state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affe cted materials, assemblies, and attachments. C. Hard-Copy RFIs: CSI Form 13.2A or approved Contractor standard Form. 1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated fo rm with substantially the same content as indicated above. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals.
P R OJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a ch ange to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. F. On receipt of Architect's acti on, update the RFI log and immediatel y distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction log. 5. Material location reports. 6. Field condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Va lues for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships . Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time belongs to Owner.
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that br eaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. H. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. I. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. J. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships. K. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. B. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies. 1. Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities. D. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two opaque copies, large enough to show entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using so ftware indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. F. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three copies of each of the following computer- generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remainin g duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings fr om commencement of the Work or the Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment. G. Daily Construction Log: Submit upon request. H. Material Location Reports: Submit upon request. I. Field Condition Reports: Submit upon request or at time of discovery of differing conditions. J. Special Reports: Submit upon request at time of unusual event. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including work stages, area separations, and interim milestones.. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 10. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the ne twork with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery wh en establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subc ontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with prel iminary bar-chart schedule or network diagram. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work or the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a se parate numbered activity fo r each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordina te submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 3. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than seven days for startup and testing. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work rest rictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how th e sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Deliv ery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 4. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Deliv ery dates indicated stipul ate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 6. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 7. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a majo r area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. c. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion. 8. Other Constraints: <Insert additional constraints not indicated elsewhere.> E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. 2. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Costs shall not be assigned to submittal activities unless specified otherwise but may, with Architect's approval, be assigned to fabrication and delivery activities. Co sts shall be under required principal subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. 3. Each activity cost shall reflect an accur ate value subject to approval by Architect. 4. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contr act modification and concurre nt with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to dem onstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. H. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for comm encement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed or Notice of Award. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed or the Notice of Award. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 2.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Su bmit diagram within 14 days of date established for commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed or the Notice of Award. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed or the Notice of Award. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Pr epare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skelet on network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and commissioning. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the criti cal path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permi ssible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diag ram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values). F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 -8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. G. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulativ e value lists, sorted by finish dates. 1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early fi nish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late fi nish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with pa yment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 2.6 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Logs: Prepare a daily construction logs recording the following information concerning events at Project site, but not limited to: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate cont ractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directiv es received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List sha ll be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 -9 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule conc urrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved sche dule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requiremen ts for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital media as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Construction Photographs: 1. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files as a Project Record Document on CD-ROM. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in uncompressed TIFF format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 4.0 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1024 by 768 pixels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of imag es on CD-ROM in the fiel d office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify im ages same as for those submitted to Architect. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of excavation, commencement of demolition or starting construction, take digital photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points.
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take digital photographs weekly , with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cu toff date associated with each A pplication for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. END OF SECTION 01322
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, pur chasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Ar chitect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 10 working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is re quired. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 working days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 20 working days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 10 working days for
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that pr epared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. l. Remarks. m. Signature of transmitter. 2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked approved from Architect's action stamp. J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and othe rs as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating approval from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each subm ittal to show which products and options ar e applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. l. Testing by recognized testing agency. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 5. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific informati on, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm). 3. Number of Copies: Submit three opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a compar ison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 4. Samples for Selection: Submit manufacturer's colo r charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristic s are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and fini shed in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or ot her characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in indi vidual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Owner's action. G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements sp ecified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identif ying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish produ cts or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specifica tion Section(s) covered by subcontract.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Subm ittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications : Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Proced ure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Pr epare written statements on manufact urer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of materi al for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written ev idence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. M. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports writte n by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports wr itten by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primer s and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. P. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qu alified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic in structions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." R. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic informat ion, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. S. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for insta lling or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. T. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information docu menting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factor y-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 -8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and,if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. U. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific perfor mance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S / ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect w ill stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to i ndicate action taken, as follows:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 -9 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. “No Exception Taken”: When the Architect marks this action, the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 2. “Make Corrections Noted”: When the Architect marks this action, the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corre ctions on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 3. “Rejected”: When the Architect marks this action, do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit with out delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. 4. “Revise and Resubmit”: When the Architect ma rks a submittal "Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal accord ing to the notations; re submit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 5. “Submit Specific Item”: For unspecified submittals the Architect will return submittals to the sender and request specific submittals as specified or mark this action with one of the two actions above. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be cons idered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330
QUALITY REQUI R EMENTS 01400 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedur al requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requir ements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide qua lity-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, a nd procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, proc edures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not incl ude contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical a ssemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the st andard by which the Work will be judged. D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections th at are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.
QUALITY REQUI R EMENTS 01400 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are pe rformed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance w ith industry standards. G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individual s of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirem ents specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropri ate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Arch itect for a decision before proceeding. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualificati ons in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
QUALITY REQUI R EMENTS 01400 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. C. Reports: Prepare and su bmit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owne r's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdic tional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar doc uments, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Artic le establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indi cated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of su ccessful in-service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of su ccessful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service pe rformance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professi onal engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated fo r this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work.
QUALITY REQUI R EMENTS 01400 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicat ed, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited accordin g to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifica tions: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. e. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.
QUALITY REQUI R EMENTS 01400 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addr esses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contr actor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Divi sion 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and st ate in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase th e Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
QUALITY REQUI R EMENTS 01400 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado F. Associated Services: Cooperate w ith agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary serv ices as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessa ry to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedu le of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work or the Notice to Proceed. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Arch itect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdictio n as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
QUALITY REQUI R EMENTS 01400 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modi fications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility , regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 01400
REFE R ENCES 01420 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to co nvey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permi tted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphi c representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including un loading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, co mplete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced . Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in e ffect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
REFE R ENCES 01420 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov (800) 872-2253 (202) 272-0080 CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office www.gpoaccess.gov/c fr/index.html (888) 293-6498 (202) 512-1530 CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement Available from Army Corps of Engineers Waterways Experiment Stati on www.wes.army.mil (601) 634-2355 DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil (215) 697-6257 DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil (215) 697-6257 Available from General Services Administration www.fss.gsa.gov (202) 501-1021 Available from National Institute of Building Sciences www.nibs.org (202) 289-7800 FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. www.icc-es.org (800) 423-6587 (562) 699-0543 MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil (215) 697-6257 NES (Formerly: National Evaluation Service) (See ICC-ES)
REFE R ENCES 01420 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available fro m Access Boa r d (202) 272-0080 www.access-b oard.gov 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) www.aluminum.org (202) 862-5100 AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers www.aaadm.com (216) 241-7333 AABC Associated Air Balance Council www.aabchq.com (202) 737-0202 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association www.aamanet.org (847) 303-5664 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials www.transportation.org (202) 624-5800 AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) www.aatcc.org (919) 549-8141 ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association www.abma-dc.org (202) 367-1155 ACI ACI International (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org (248) 848-3700 ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association www.concrete-pipe.org (972) 506-7216 AEIC Association of Edison Illumina ting Companies, Inc. (The) www.aeic.org (205) 257-2530 AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association www.afandpa.org (800) 878-8878 (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association www.aga.org (202) 824-7000
REFE R ENCES 01420 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) www.agc.org (703) 548-3118 AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers www.aham.org (202) 872-5955 AI Asphalt Institute www.asphaltinstitute.org (859) 288-4960 AIA American Institute of Architects (The) www.aia.org (800) 242-3837 (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction www.aisc.org (800) 644-2400 (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute www.steel.org (202) 452-7100 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction www.aitc-glulam.org (303) 792-9559 ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America www.alca.org (800) 395-2522 (703) 736-9666 ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated www.alsc.org (301) 972-1700 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. www.amca.org (847) 394-0150 ANSI American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org (202) 293-8020 AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts www.aosaseed.com (505) 522-1437 APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association www.apawood.org (253) 565-6600 APA Architectural Precast Association www.archprecast.org (239) 454-6989 API American Petroleum Institute www.api.org (202) 682-8000 ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute www.ari.org (703) 524-8800 ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association www.asphaltroofing.org (202) 207-0917 ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers www.asce.org (800) 548-2723 (703) 295-6300
REFE R ENCES 01420 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (800) 527-4723 (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) www.asme.org (800) 843-2763 (212) 591-7722 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering www.asse-plumbing.org (440) 835-3040 ASTM ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org (610) 832-9585 AWCI AWCI International (Association of the Wall and Ceil ing Industries International) www.awci.org (703) 534-8300 AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) AWI Architectural Wood work Institute www.awinet.org (800) 449-8811 (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association www.awpa.com (334) 874-9800 AWS American Welding Society www.aws.org (800) 443-9353 (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association www.awwa.org (800) 926-7337 (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association www.buildershardware.com (212) 297-2122 BIA Brick Industry Association (The) www.bia.org (703) 620-0010 BICSI BICSI www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BIFMA BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association In ternational) www.bifma.com (616) 285-3963 BISSC Baking Industry Sanita tion Standard s Committee www.bissc.org (773) 761-4100 Cast Stone Institute www.caststone.org (770) 972-3011 CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312
REFE R ENCES 01420 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado CDA www.carpetcushion.org Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association www.canelect.ca/connectio ns_online/home.htm (613) 230-9263 CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com (216) 241-7333 CGA Compressed Gas Association www.cganet.com (703) 788-2700 CGSB Canadian General Standards Board w3.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb (800) 665-2472 (819) 956-0425 CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association www.cellulose.org (888) 881-2462 (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association www.cisca.org (630) 584-1919 CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute www.cispi.org (423) 892-0137 CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute www.chainlinkinfo.org (301) 596-2583 CPA Composite Panel Association www.pbmdf.com (301) 670-0604 CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association www.cppa-info.org (800) 510-2772 (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) www.carpet-rug.com (800) 882-8846 (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute www.crsi.org (847) 517-1200 CSA CSA International (Formerly: IAS - Internat ional Approval Services) www.csa-international.org (800) 463-6727 (416) 747-4000 CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) www.csinet.org (800) 689-2900 (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau www.cedarbureau.org (604) 820-7700 CTI Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org (281) 583-4087 DHI Door and Hardware Ins titute (703) 222-2010
REFE R ENCES 01420 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Cont ract Documents Committee (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FCI Fluid Controls Ins titute (216) 241-7333 www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org FIBA Federation Interna tionale de Basketball Amateur 41 22 545 00 00 (The International Basketball Federation) www.fiba.com FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35 (The International Volleyball Federation) www.fivb.ch FM Factory Mutual System (Now FMG) FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FM - F actory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air C onditioning Contractors Association, Inc. www.floridaroof.com (407) 671-3772 FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 52 951 5146905 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GRI (Now GSI) GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org
REFE R ENCES 01420 -8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado GSI Geosynthetic Institute www.geosynthetic-institute.org (610) 522-8440 HI Hydraulic Institute www.pumps.org (888) 786-7744 (973) 267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute www.gamanet.org (908) 464-8200 HMMA Hollow Metal Manufact urers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association www.hpva.org (703) 435-2900 HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. www.hpwhite.com (410) 838-6550 IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International) IBF International Badminton Federation www.intbadfed.org 441-24 223-4904 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineer s Association, Inc. www.icea.net (770) 830-0369 ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. www.icri.org (847) 827-0830 IEC International Electrotechnical Commission www.iec.ch 41 22 919 02 11 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) www.ieee.org (212) 419-7900 IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America www.iesna.org (212) 248-5000 IGCC Insulating Glass Ce rtification Council www.igcc.org (315) 646-2234 IGMA Insulating Glass Manuf acturers Alliance (The) www.igmaonline.org (613) 233-1510 ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. www.iliai.com (812) 275-4426 ISO International Organization for Standardization www.iso.ch 41 22 749 01 11 ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek www.intertek.com (800) 345-3851 (607) 753-6711
REFE R ENCES 01420 -9 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ITU International Telecommunication Union www.itu.int/home 41 22 730 51 11 KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufa cturers Association www.kcma.org (703) 264-1690 LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute www.lightning.org (800) 488-6864 (847) 577-7200 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association www.mbma.com (216) 241-7333 MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association www.maplefloor.org (847) 480-9138 MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association www.metalframingmfg.org (312) 644-6610 MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America www.mhia.org (800) 345-1815 (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America www.marble-institute.com (440) 250-9222 MPI Master Painters Institute www.paintinfo.com (888) 674-8937 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com (703) 281-6613 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org (312) 332-0405 NACE NACE International (National Association of Corro sion Engineers International) www.nace.org (281) 228-6200 NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association www.nadca.com (202) 737-2926 NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193, www.aahperd.org/nagws/ NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) www.naima.org (703) 684-0084 NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 ext. 453
REFE R ENCES 01420 -10 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado NCAA www.nbgqa.com National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association www.ncma.org (703) 713-1900 NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute www.ncpi.org (262) 248-9094 NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association www.ncta.com (202) 775-3550 NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau www.nebb.org (301) 977-3698 NECA National Electrical Contractors Association www.necanet.org (301) 657-3110 NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association www.nelma.org (207) 829-6901 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association www.nema.org (703) 841-3200 NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations www.nfhs.org (317) 972-6900 NFPA NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) www.nfpa.org (800) 344-3555 (617) 770-3000 NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council www.nfrc.org (301) 589-1776 NGA National Glass Association www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association www.natlhardwood.org (800) 933-0318 (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority www.nlga.org (604) 524-2393 NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association www.nofma.org (901) 526-5016 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association www.nrca.net (800) 323-9545 (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association www.nrmca.org (888) 846-7622 (301) 587-1400
REFE R ENCES 01420 -11 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado NSF NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) www.nsf.org (800) 673-6275 (734) 769-8010 NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association www.nssga.org (800) 342-1415 (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. www.ntma.com (800) 323-9736 (540) 751-0930 NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now TRI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. www.opl.com (800) 966-5253 (210) 635-8100 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute www.pci.org (312) 786-0300 PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America www.pdca.com (800) 332-7322 (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute www.pdionline.org (800) 589-8956 (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu (217) 333-3929 PTI Post-Tensioning Institute www.post-tensioning.org (602) 870-7540 RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org (800) 644-2400 (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute www.rfci.com (301) 340-8580 RIS Redwood Inspection Service www.calredwood.org (888) 225-7339 (415) 382-0662 RTI (Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile R oofing Manufacturers Association) (Now TRI) SAE SAE International www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SDI Steel Deck Institute www.sdi.org (847) 462-1930 SDI Steel Door Institute www.steeldoor.org (440) 899-0010
REFE R ENCES 01420 -12 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association www.sefalabs.com (516) 294-5424 SEI Structural Engineering Institute www.seinstitute.com (800) 548-2723 (703) 295-6195 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council www.sgcc.org (315) 646-2234 SIA Security Industry Association www.siaonline.org (703) 683-2075 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute www.steeljoist.org (843) 626-1995 SMA Screen Manufacturers Association www.smacentral.org (561) 533-0991 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association www.smacna.org (703) 803-2980 SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers www.smpte.org (914) 761-1100 SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org (800) 523-6154 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) www.spib.org (850) 434-2611 SPI/SPFD Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. (The) Spray Polyurethane Foam Division (Now SPFA) SPRI SPRI (Single Ply Roofing Institute) www.spri.org (781) 647-7026 SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America www.ssina.com (800) 982-0355 (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings www.sspc.org (877) 281-7772 (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute www.steeltank.com (847) 438-8265 SWI Steel Window Institute www.steelwindows.com (216) 241-7333
REFE R ENCES 01420 -13 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute www.swrionline.org (816) 472-7974 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. www.tileusa.com (864) 646-8453 TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org (703) 907-7700 TMS The Masonry Society www.masonrysociety.org (303) 939-9700 TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. www.tpinst.org (608) 833-5900 TPI Turfgrass Producers International www.turfgrasssod.org (800) 405-8873 (847) 705-9898 TRI Tile Roofing Institute (Formerly: RTI - Roof Tile Institute) www.tileroofing.org (312) 670-4177 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. www.ul.com (800) 285-4476 (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association www.uni-bell.org (972) 243-3902 USAV USA Volleyball www.usavolleyball.org (888) 786-5539 (719) 228-6800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council www.usgbc.org (202) 828-7422 USITT United States Institute fo r Theatre Technology, Inc. www.usitt.org (800) 938-7488 (315) 463-6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association www.wastec.org (800) 424-2869 (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau www.wclib.org (800) 283-1486 (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association) www.windowcoverings.org (800) 506-4636 (212) 661-4261 WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) www.wdma.com (800) 223-2301 (847) 299-5200
REFE R ENCES 01420 -14 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org WIC Woodwork Institute of California (Now WI) WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofi ng Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 548-0112 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC) CABO Council of American Building Officials (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials www.iapmo.org (909) 472-4100 ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) ICC International Code Council (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. www.icc-es.org (800) 423-6587 (562) 699-0543 NES National Evaluation Service (See ICC-ES) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up- to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil
REFE R ENCES 01420 -15 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission www.cpsc.gov (800) 638-2772 (301) 504-6816 DOC Department of Commerce www.commerce.gov (202) 482-2000 DOD Department of Defense www.dodssp.daps.mil (215) 697-6257 DOE Department of Energy www.eren.doe.gov (202) 586-9220 EPA Environmental Protection Agency www.epa.gov (202) 272-0167 FAA Federal Aviation Administration www.faa.gov (202) 366-4000 FCC Federal Communications Commission www.fcc.gov (888) 225-5322 FDA Food and Drug Administration www.fda.gov (888) 463-6332 GSA General Services Administration www.gsa.gov (800) 488-3111 (202) 501-1888 HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development www.hud.gov (202) 708-1112 LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory www.lbl.gov (510) 486-4000 NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov (301) 975-6478 OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov (800) 321-6742 (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science http://phs.os.dhhs.gov (202) 690-7694 RUS Rural Utilities Service (See USDA) (202) 720-9540 SD State Department www.state.gov (202) 647-4000 TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934
REFE R ENCES 01420 -16 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture www.usda.gov (202) 720-2791 USPS Postal Service www.usps.com (202) 268-2000 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420
TEMPO R ARY FACILITIES AND CONT R OLS 01500 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insula ted and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agen cies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power servi ce use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. E. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing wate r system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. F. Electric Power Service: Elect ric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Pr ovide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hooku ps, staging areas, and parkin g areas for construction personnel.
TEMPO R ARY FACILITIES AND CONT R OLS 01500 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities ha ving jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain requir ed certifications and permits. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and pr otection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assi gned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pavement: Comply with Division 2 pavement Sections. B. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) thick, galvanized steel, chain- link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails. C. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts. D. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry." E. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M. F. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. G. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of constr uction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnis h and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents incl uding file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.
TEMPO R ARY FACILITIES AND CONT R OLS 01500 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles , with not less than 1 receptacle on each wall.Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- (1.2-m-) square tack board. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to main tain a uniform indoor te mperature of 68 to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg C). 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self- contained, liquid-propan e-gas or fuel-oil heaters with indi vidual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return ai r grille in system and remove at end of construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project ad equately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for us e when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existi ng users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connec tions for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporar y utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.
TEMPO R ARY FACILITIES AND CONT R OLS 01500 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heati ng and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide te mporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail, in common-use facilities. 1. Provide DSL in primary field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following:
TEMPO R ARY FACILITIES AND CONT R OLS 01500 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under cond itions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits as approved. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as re quired to minimize accumulations. F. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seek ing entrance to Project. Un authorized signs are not permitted. 1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities nece ssary for hoisting mate rials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. I. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are availa ble, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. J. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, oper ate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
TEMPO R ARY FACILITIES AND CONT R OLS 01500 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties an d walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. C. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities ha ving jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owne r with one set of keys. G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantia l temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. I. Covered Walkway: Erect structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals along adjacent public street(s). Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing. 2. Provide wood-plank overhead decking, protec tive plywood enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage. 3. Extend back wall beyond the structure to complete enclosure fence. 4. Paint and maintain in a manner approved by Owner and Architect. J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other c onstruction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and perman ent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures.
TEMPO R ARY FACILITIES AND CONT R OLS 01500 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and contro llable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department an d establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of te mporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, hea ting, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Operate Project-identification-sign lig hting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight. D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporar y facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape developmen t, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administra tive and procedural requirements dis posing of nonhazardous construction waste. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptabl e to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit 3 copies of plan within 7 days of date established for commencement of the Work, the Notice to Pro ceed or the Notice of Award. B. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageabl e waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. C. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptan ce of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. D. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: I ndicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include mani fests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. E. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Includ e manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste Management Coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Owner. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation, termination, and removal requirements. B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. Coordinator shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project. C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work oc curring at Project site. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on ad jacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01524
P R ODUCT REQUI R EMENTS 01600 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "Basis-of-Desi gn," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other ch aracteristics for purposes of evaluatin g comparable products of other named manufacturers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, sh owing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each pr oduct under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title.
P R ODUCT REQUI R EMENTS 01600 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period. 4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in wr iting to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of eac h request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided at end of Section. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specifi c features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testi ng agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Cons truction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer 's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is approp riate for applications indicated.
P R ODUCT REQUI R EMENTS 01600 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect w ill request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation met hod to be replaced. Include Specifi cation Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect w ill request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable produc t request. Arch itect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional informati on or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Di vision 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible w ith products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that w ill prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
P R ODUCT REQUI R EMENTS 01600 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written wa rranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufactur er's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim , finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless cust om products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
P R ODUCT REQUI R EMENTS 01600 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference st andard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. Where products are specified by name and acco mpanied by the term “Basis-of-Design” or "or equal" or "or approved equal" or “or approved similar” or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a si ngle product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specificat ions include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Pr oducts" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifi cations require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified cate gory matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the ph rase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications in clude the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
P R ODUCT REQUI R EMENTS 01600 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitu tion if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed, or the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additiona l responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require exte nsive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely af fect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. General installation of products. 3. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviatio ns from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts i ssued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before begi nning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and el ectrical systems and other cons truction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Cond itions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditio ns, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in fo r mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfact ory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates accept ance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles , lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Wo rk are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construc tion by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify sp ace requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a reque st for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improv ements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, includin g those required for mechan ical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of su rveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and ta pes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet (2.4 m) in spaces without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furn ish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3.5 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Proj ect site for Owner's construction forces. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction sc hedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsa nitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed co nstruction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operabi lity without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operati ons to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper opera tion. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are expose d to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and re place operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. The requirements of this section are to govern the removal and reinstallation of any and all finish materials within the course and scope of work as outlined in the Drawings and Section 01100 Summary of Work. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated construction. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to rest ore surfaces to original cond itions after installation of other Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe an ticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical System s: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity or lo ad-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following: 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. 9. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following: 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch constructio n exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce th e building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-p lace materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surf aces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional pe rformance of in-place materials.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to pr ovide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently pa tch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping , grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the expo sed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diam ond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after constructio n operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform co lor and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over en tire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coat s until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceili ngs as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and pa tching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 01731
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management" for disposal of demolished materials. C. See Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. B. Predemolition Photographs or Videotapes: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins. C. Landfill Records: Indicate recei pt and acceptance of hazardous wast es by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1. Comply with submittal requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management."
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. E. Predemolition Conference: C onduct conference at Project site. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy por tions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Do not disturb hazardous mate rials or items suspected of c ontaining hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewh ere in the Contract Documents. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and corre late with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structur al elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplan ned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings preconstruction photographs preconstruction videotapes and templates. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disc onnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems servin g areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/syste ms that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Comply with requirements for access and protec tion specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cl eared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame- cutting operations. 4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." B. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management."
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition exis ting before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 01732
CLOSEOUT P R OCEDURES 01770 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 5. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 6. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific cl oseout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Proce dures: Before requesting inspection for de termining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corr ected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unr estricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, a nd similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
CLOSEOUT P R OCEDURES 01770 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written requ est for inspection for Substantial Co mpletion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulf illed requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identifie d by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting fina l inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been complete d or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written reques t for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed w ith inspection or notify Cont ractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected befo re certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, startin g with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by ma jor element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.
CLOSEOUT P R OCEDURES 01770 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1.5 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1 1-inch (215 -by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cl eaning agents that are potentially h azardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspectio n for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbis h, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted no r paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
CLOSEOUT P R OCEDURES 01770 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machin ery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to pr ovide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-su rfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limi ted access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, re moving debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar la bels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator eq uipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean perm anent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflec tors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770
P R OJECT RECO R D DOCUMENTS 01781 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific re quirements for Pr oject Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Proj ect's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. 1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black -line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prin ts to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
P R OJECT RECO R D DOCUMENTS 01781 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado c. Record data as soon as possible after ob taining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variab le and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross- reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pe ncil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date eac h Record Drawing; include th e designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize Reco rd Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Record Transparencies: not required. In lieu of transparencies, provide two copies of full PDF scans of record prints on CD to Architect. 3. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CAD file. 4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the act ual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, ad denda, and contract modifications.
P R OJECT RECO R D DOCUMENTS 01781 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Give particular attention to information on c oncealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on c oncealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifi cations, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterior ation and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781
OPE R ATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Emergency manuals. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes, systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each ma nual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether genera l scope and content of manual are acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
OPE R ATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requi res more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents fo r all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-in ch (215-by-280-mm) pape r; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to a ccommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and re lated components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
OPE R ATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a sepa rate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsyste m, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warn ings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for elect ric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.3 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
OPE R ATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and nu mber of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for elect ric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section fo r each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufactur er's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cl eaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.
OPE R ATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warrantie s and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and re quired notifications for warranty claims. 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source informa tion, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to ma tch manual's table of contents. Fo r each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each com ponent part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, an d replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include serv ice and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Info rmation: Include lists of replacem ent and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.
OPE R ATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a comp lete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service represen tative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references fr om the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prep ared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." F. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 01782
DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 02768 - DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes colored cement concrete pave ment at locations indicated on Drawings and below: 1. Areas indicated on Drawings and in Color Schedule below. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design mixtures. C. Material certificates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Producer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. C. Mockups: Cast mockups of full-size sections (minimum 48”x48”) of decorative cement concrete pavement to demonstrate typical pattern, texture, surface finish, color, joints, and standard of workmanship. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Proj ect site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed pl ywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, st raight, and smooth exposed surfaces. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinfor cement: ASTM A 185, fabr icated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed.
DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars; assembled with clips. D. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinfo rcement, and dowels in place. Manu facture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. White Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 3. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixt ure: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E. F. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in decorative cement concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long. 2.4 COLOR MATERIALS A. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 2.5 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, specifically manufactured for colored concrete.
DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. For integrally colored concrete, curing compound shall be pigmented type approved by coloring admixture manufacturer. 2. For concrete indicated to be sealed, curing compound shall be compatible with sealer. C. Clear Acrylic Sealer: Manufacturer's standard waterborne, membrane-forming, medium-gloss, acrylic copolymer emulsion solution, specifically manufactured for colored concrete, containing not less than 15 percent solids by volume, nonyellowing, and UV resistant. D. Slip-Resistant Additive: Manufacturer's standard fi nely graded aggregate or polymer additive, designed to be added to clear acrylic sealer, to result in a slip-resistant surface. 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to AC I 301, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): per Structural Engineer and Town of Vail, Colorado requirements. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: per Structural Engineer and Town of Vail, Colorado requirements. 3. Slump Limit: per Structural Engineer and Town of Vail, Colorado requirements. B. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's pres cribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content per Structural Engineer and Town of Vail, Colorado requirements.. C. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures accor ding to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m) E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment or colored water-reducing admixture to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Proof-roll prepared subb ase surface with heavy pneumatic-tired eq uipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. B. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. C. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 3.2 JOINTS A. Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct tr ansverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. B. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Rep eat tooling of edges afte r applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operat ion between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrator s to move concrete into place. D. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, E. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. F. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing opera tions or spreading surface treatments. 3.4 INTEGRALLY COLORED CONCRETE FINISH A. Integrally Colored Concrete Finish: After final floating, apply a hand-trowel finish followed by a broom finish to concrete. 1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture. 2. Other Locations: Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float- finished concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768-5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3. Sidewalks/Walkways: Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float -finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm) deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. 3.5 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply ev aporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer 's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing Compound: Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas that have been subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 1. Cure integrally colored concrete with a curing compound. 2. Cure concrete finished with pigmented mineral dry-shake hardener with a curing compound. 3.6 SEALER A. Clear Acrylic Sealer: Apply uniformly in tw o coats in continuous operations according to manufacturer's written instructions. Allow first coat to dry before applying second coat, at 90-degrees to the direction of the first coat using same application methods and rates. 1. Begin sealing dry surface no sooner th an 28 days after concrete placement. 2. Mix slip-resistant additive thoroughly in sealer before application according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stir sealer occasionally during application to maintain even distribution of additive. 3.7 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and ACI 330.1. 3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace decorative cement concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or does not comply with requirements in this Section in comple te sections from joint to joint, unless otherwise approved by Architect. 3.9 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Bridge outside north egress stair: colored concrete with heavy broom finish, color buff. END OF SECTION 02768
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, includi ng formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and walks. 3. Division 2 Section “Decorative Concrete Pavement” for colored concrete. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with, fly ash at high sulfates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include a lternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be with held for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certifi cates for welding procedures and personnel. E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testin g agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers ce rtifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Form materials and form-release agents. 3. Steel reinforcement an d reinforcement accessories. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing materials. 6. Floor and slab treatments. 7. Bonding agents. 8. Adhesives.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 9. Vapor retarders. 10. Epoxy joint filler. 11. Joint-filler strips. 12. Repair materials. G. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independen t testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source , and each admixture from the same manufacturer. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code-- Reinforcing Steel." F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle steel rein forcement to prevent bending and damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows:
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado a. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), unless otherwise indicated.. D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated fo rm-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not im pair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements; provide the following: a. US SPEC Ezkote, or US SPEC Slickote, or US SPEC Safekote; US MIX Products Co. 303- 778-7227 (Or Approved Similar) E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabr icated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Cl ass 2 stainless-steel bar supports. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows: 1. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M. C. Lightweight Aggregate: per ASTM C330, ¾” nominal maximum aggregate size. D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Ad mixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 2.6 FILL MATERIALS A. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve; meeting deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates. B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: Class A. ASTM C 1315, Type 1,
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. C. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and gr ade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. D. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face op ening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modi fied, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6 mm). 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi (39 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado C. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixes as indicated on structural drawings. D. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements. E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 15 percent. F. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: as indicated G. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufactur er's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as indicated. H. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floor slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. I. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. J. Admixtures: Use admixtures accordin g to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 2. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixes where indicated. 2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.12 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and ma intain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and struct ures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm). D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secu re units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and insp ection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitte d to forms and securely br aced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concre te. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embe dded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, slabs, and other stru ctural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field- or laboratory- cured test specimens according to ACI 301. 3. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptabl e for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patc hed forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm). B. Granular Fill: Cover vapor retarder with granular fill, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm). 1. Place and compact a 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick layer of fine-graded granular material over granular fill. 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Shop- or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS D1.4 , where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into c oncrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one and one hole mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcemen t. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate joints for grade beams in the middle third of spans. 4. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Lo cate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 5. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations wher e fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weaken ed-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints fo r a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint seal ants, specified in Divi sion 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as pr acticable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete du ring delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Architect. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of su ch thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. Do not drop concrete in forms from a height exceeding 60 inches. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vi brating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visi ble effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 in ches (150 mm) into prece ding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcemen t in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straighted ge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess mo isture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other ma terials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specifi ed and approved in mix designs. G. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete accordin g to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrad e just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. For concrete surfaces below ground. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: For concrete surfaces above ground. As-cast concrete texture imparted by form- facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetri cal manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) in height.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. 2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horiz ontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish w ith a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across ad jacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-drive n floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Typical for all interior slabs. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following: a. 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) Typical interior floors except gymnasium b. 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) in Gymnasium C. Medium to Fine Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber- bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. D. Trowel and fine broom finish: for locations where tile or carpet is to be installed (refer to Room Finish Schedule). 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concre te, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipm ent at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 1. Provide 6” thick housekeeping pads with welded wire mesh reinforcement at mechanical equipment. Coordinate sizes and locations with mechanical design. 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot- weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during cu ring period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods: D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately af ter finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concre te floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in contin uous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer 's written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; rem ove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller accordin g to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective ar eas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one- half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surf ace defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture a nd color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces th at affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determ ined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Te st unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each su rface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floo r coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level su rface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cu re in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces a nd apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu . yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each co mposite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. a. Cast and field cure one set of four standa rd cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days, one at 28 days, and one specimen will be retained in reserve for later testing if required.. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. C. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive- strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive streng th by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 03300
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Stone trim units. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Reinforcing steel. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Embedded flashing. 8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days. 1. Refer to Drawings for additional requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. B. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement. C. Samples for selection of the following: 1. Colored-masonry mortar samples showi ng the full range of colors available. 2. Weep holes/vents in color to match mortar color. D. Samples for verification of the following: 1. Full-size units for each different exposed ma sonry unit required showing the full range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction. E. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency, employed and paid by Contractor or manufacturer, indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following proposed masonry materials with requirements indicated: 1. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. 2. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. 3. Masonry units. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Testing: Employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following preconstruction testing to establish compliance of proposed materials and construction with specified requirements:
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Prism Test: For each type of wall construction indicated, test masonry prisms per ASTM E 447, Method B. 2. Test mortar properties per test methods of ASTM C 270. 3. Test grout compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Ob tain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend with in the ranges accepted for these ch aracteristics, from one source and by a single manufacturer for each different product required. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Mockup: Prior to installing unit masonry, construct sample wall panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as other qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mockups on site in the lo cations as directed by Architect. 2. Build mockup of typical wa ll area as shown on Drawings. 3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the da tes and times when mockups will be constructed. 4. Protect accepted mockups from the elem ents with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Acceptance of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Acceptance of mockups does not constitute approval of deviatio ns from the Contract Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at leas t 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at th e end of each day to prev ent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materi als or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Cold-Weather Construction: When the ambient temperature is within the limits indicated, use the following procedures: a. 40 to 32 deg F (4 to 0 deg C): Heat mixing water or sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). b. 32 to 25 deg F (0 to -4 deg C): Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. c. 25 to 20 deg F (-4 to -7 deg C): Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F (4 deg C) if grouting. Use heat on both sides of walls under construction. d. 20 deg F (-7 deg C) and Below: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F (4 deg C). Provide enclosures and use heat on both sides of walls under construction to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosures. 2. Cold-Weather Protection: When the mean daily temperature is within the limits indicated, provide the following protection: a. 40 to 25 deg F (4 to -4 deg C): Cover masonry with a weather-resistant membrane for 48 hours after construction. b. 25 to 20 deg F (-4 to -7 deg C): Cover masonry with insulating blankets or provide enclosure and heat for 48 hours after construction to prevent freezing. Install wind breaks when wind velocity exceeds 15 mi./h (25 km/h). c. 20 deg F (-7 deg C) and Below: Provide enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosure for 48 hours after construction. 3. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out, but not less than 7 days after completion of cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mo rtar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and above.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other def ects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to complian ce with requirements, manufact urers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Best Block/Keystone. b. Clalite, Inc. c. Robinson Block Co. 2.03 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of concrete masonry unit required. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units w ith minimum average net-area compressive strength indicated below: a. 1900 psi (13.1 MPa). 2. Weight Classification: Lightweight or Normal weight. 3. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. 4. Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions listed below (within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification) fo r the corresponding nominal sizes indicated on Drawings: a. 4 inch (100 mm) nominal: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) actual. b. 6 inch (150 mm) nominal: 5-5/8 inch (143 mm) actual. c. 8 inch (200 mm) nominal: 7-5/8 inch (194 mm) actual. d. 10 inch (250 mm) nominal: 9-5/8 inch (244 mm) actual. e. 12 inch (300 mm) nominal: 11-5/8 inch (295 mm) actual. f. 16 inch (400 mm) nominal: 15-5/8 inch (397 mm) actual. 5. Exposed Faces: none.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white ceme nt as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. 1. For pigmented mortars, use colored portland cement-lime mix of formulation required to produce color indicated, or if not indicated, as select ed from manufacturer's standard formulations. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portla nd cement by weight for mineral oxides nor 2 percent for carbon black. D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm), use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18 mm) sieve. E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. G. Water: Potable. 2.05 REINFORCING STEEL A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows: 1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615 (ASTM A 615M). B. Deformed Reinforcing Wire: ASTM A 496, with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 zinc coating. C. Welded-Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. 2.06 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon-steel wi re, coating class as follows: 2. ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1, for interior walls; and ASTM A 153, Class B-2, for exterior walls. B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirem ents indicated below: 1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm). 2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm).
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.07 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire: As follows: 1. Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating for wire ties and anchors in exterior walls. 2. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm). C. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class B-1, B-2, or B-3, as app licable to size and form indicated. 2.08 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STRUCTURAL FRAME A. General: Provide 2-piece assemblies as described be low, allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and frame parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it. 1. For anchorage to concrete, provide manufacturer's standard anchors with dovetail anchor section formed from sheet metal and triangular-shaped wire tie section sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face and as follows: a. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm). 2. For anchorage to steel framing, provide manufact urer's standard anchors with crimped 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) diameter wire anchor section for welding to steel and triangular-shaped wire tie section sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face and as follows: a. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm). 2.09 ADJUSTABLE MASONRY-VENEER ANCHORS A. General: Provide 2-piece assemblies allowing vertical or horizontal differentia l movement between wall and wall framing parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it, for attachment over sheathing to metal studs, and with the following structural performance characteristics: 1. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N) load in either tension or compression without deforming over, or developing play in excess of, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). B. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor section complying with the following requirements: 1. Wire Tie Shape: Triangular or rectangular. 2. Wire Tie Length: As required to extend 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into masonry wythe of veneer face. 3. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet-metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, 0.0747 inch (1.9 mm) thick by 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) wide by 3 inches (75 mm) high; fabricated into tee shape with 2 projecting tabs, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide by 1 inch (25 mm) long; with slotted holes for connection of vertical legs of triangular or rect angular wire tie specially formed to fit anchor section.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado C. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Propri etary fastener consisting of carbon-steel drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer; No. 10 (4.8-mm) diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange by not less than 3 exposed threads. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C. 2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Sheet-Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" and below: 1. Galvanized steel, 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick. 2. Fabricate through-wall metal flashi ng embedded in masonry as follows: a. With ribs formed in dovetail pattern at 3-inch (75-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide a 3-way integral mortar bond and weep-hole drainage. 3. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from sheet metal indicated above, formed to shape indicated. 4. Application: Use where flashing is fu lly or partly concealed in masonry wall. B. Rubberized Asphalt Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing product consisting of a pliable and highly adhesive rubberized asphalt compound, 26 mils (0.7 mm) thick, bonded completely and integrally to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film, 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, to produce an overall thickness of 30 mils (0.8 mm). 1. Primer: Flashing manufacturer's standard product or product recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to masonry and concrete. 2. Rubberized Asphalt Sheet Flashing: a. Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co. b. Polyguard 300; Polyguard Products, Inc. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from the following material: 1. Neoprene or urethane. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 1. Styrene-Butadiene Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Desi gnation M2AA-805. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Weep Holes: Provide the following:
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Rectangular Plastic Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches (9 by 38 by 89 mm). 2.12 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water. B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discolor ing or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a concentrated blend of surface-acting acids, chelating, and wetting agents. 2. For dark-colored masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of surface-acting acids and special inhibitors. 3. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. 2.13 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments , air-entraining agents, acceler ators, retarders, water- repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or ot her admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar indicated below: 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. 2. For masonry below grade, in contact with eart h, and where indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: M or S. 3. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: M or S. 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-beari ng partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: N. C. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. D. Self-Consolidating Grout for Unit Masonry 1. Proportioned in accordance with ASTM C476 Table 1 for coarse grout and conforming to requirements of ACI 301, ready mixed concrete. 2. Provide self-consolidating grout with slump flow of 22” minimum to 30” maximum. 3. Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi is required, using ASTM C1019 Standard Sampling Method of Sampling and Testing Grout.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-9 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 4. Extra Water: Grout shall be delivered to the jobsite within batch tolerances as prescribed according to ASTM C-94 Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete. Should additional water or admixture be required at the jobsite to achieve the required minimum slump flow, it shall be added only at the direction of an authorized ready-mixed concrete supplier representative and shall be noted as such on the delivery ticket. Slump flow shall be retested and documented after water or admixture is added PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for co mpliance with requirements fo r installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit ma sonry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of thickness indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the Specifications. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, wher e possible, cut edges concealed. E. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surf aces of columns, walls, and arrises, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet (10 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 m), nor 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) within width of a single unit.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-10 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position s hown in plan and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet (12 mm in 6 m), nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet (19 mm in 12 m) or more. D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) nor plus 1/2 inch (12 mm). E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary bed- joint thickness from bed-joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from head-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary head-joint thickness from adjacent head-joint thickness by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from collar- joint thickness indicated by more than minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) or plus 3/8 inch (10 mm). 3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of su rface bond patterns with unifo rm joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, moveme nt-type joints, returns, and offset s. Avoid the use of less-than- half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, w ith courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches (50 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2-unit length for one-half running bond or 1/3-unit length for on e-third running bond; do not tooth. Cl ean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build-in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between hollow metal fra mes and masonry solidly with mo rtar, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At exterior frames, insert extruded polystyrene board insulation around perimeter of frame in thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) to act as a thermal break between frame and masonry. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete mas onry units with gr out 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-11 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. 4. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 3/8-inch (10-mm) joints. B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls that are to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 1.2 CAVITY WALLS A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods: 1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than one metal tie for 4.5 sq. ft. (0.42 sq. m) of wall area spaced not to exceed 36 inches (914 mm) o.c. horizontally and 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and space not more than 36 inches (915 mm) apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically. 2. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers. B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other ma terials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity. C. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing." 3.06 HORIZONTAL-JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal-joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (2 03 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement in mortar joint 1 block course above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond opening. 4. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufactur er for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.07 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonr y abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following:
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-12 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 2. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally. 3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to metal studs with mas onry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten each anchor section through sheathi ng to metal studs with 2 metal fasteners of type indicated. 2. Fasten anchors through sheathing to metal studs with metal fasteners of type indicated. 3. Insert anchor section in metal st uds as sheathing is installed. Pr ovide one anchor at each stud in each horizontal joint be tween sheathing boards. 4. Embed tie section in masonry joints. Provi de not less than 2-inch (50-mm) air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 5. Locate anchor section relative to course where tie section is embedded to allow maximum vertical differential movement of tie up and down. 6. Space anchors as indicated, but no t more than 18 inches (458 mm) o.c. vertically and 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 an chor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals around perimeter not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm). 3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of block units on one side of control joint. Fill the resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces. 2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint. 4. Install temporary foam plastic filler in head joints and remove when unit masonry is complete. C. Build-in horizontal pressure-relieving joints where in dicated; construct joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width requ ired for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Locate horizontal pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer and attached to structure behind masonry veneer. 3.11 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for 24 inches (610 mm) for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-13 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcement bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by same method as CMU. 2. Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use sp ecially formed bond beam units with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporaril y support built-in-place lintels until cured. 3. Provide either of above at Contractor's option or provide pr ecast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements of Divi sion 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.12 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to the downward flow of wa ter in the wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and fr ee from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on slopin g bed of mortar and cover with mo rtar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar. C. Install flashing as follows: 1. At composite masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm), and through the inner wythe to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wy the is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2 inches (50 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through the veneer, up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm), and behind air-infiltration barrier/building paper. 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches (100 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form a pan. 4. Cut off flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Form weep holes with product specified in Part 2 of this Section. 2. Space weep hole s 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 3. In cavities, place pea gravel to a height equal to height of first course, but not less than 2 inches (50 mm), immediately above top of flashing em bedded in the wall, as masonry construction progresses, to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drainage. 4. Place cavity drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities. E. Install vents in vertical head joints at the top of each continuous cavity. Space vents and close off cavities vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. 1. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking. F. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and othe r related construction where shown to be built into masonry.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-14 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3.13 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support fo rms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Grouting 1. Do not place grout until entire heig ht of masonry to be grouted ha s attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 2. Provide cleanout holes at least 3 inches in least dimension for grout pours over 60 inches in height. 3. Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar. 4. At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 32 inches o.c. 5. Place self-consolidating grout within 1½ hours after mix water has been added unless prior arrangements and mix design adjustments have been made by the ready mix concrete supplier representative. 6. Do not mechanically vibr ate self-consolidating grout. 3.14 CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with clean er by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to appli cation of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Job-mixed detergent solution. 6. Proprietary acidic cleaner, applied in compliance with directions of acidic cleaner manufacturer. 7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04810
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –1 SECTION 04860 – STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior stone veneer. 1. Adhered to concrete backup. 2. Adhered to unit masonry backup. 3. Adhered to cold-formed metal framing and sheathing. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for concealed flashing, horizontal joint reinforcement and veneer anchors. 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for cavity-wall insulation. C. Products installed, but not furnished, in this Section include: 1. Steel lintels and shelf angles for stone masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For stone varieties proposed for use on Project, include data on physical properties specified. B. Stone Samples for Verification: For each color, grade, finish, and variety of stone required. C. Colored Mortar Samples for Verification: For each color required. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who employs experienced stone masons and stone fitters who are skilled in installing stone veneer assemblies similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose projects ha ve a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a single manufacturer with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar component from a single manu facturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for each type of stone veneer assembly in sizes approximately 48 inches
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –2 (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness, including face and backup. a. Include stone coping at top of mockup. b. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch (600-mm) length in corner of mockup approximately 16 inches (400 mm) down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch (300-mm) length of flashing left exposed to view (omit stone veneer above half of flashing). 2. Protect accepted mockups from th e elements with weather-resistant membrane. 3. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of stone; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to stone colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Contractor in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Contractor in writing. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Stone Veneer Assemblies: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone veneer assemblies when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining the face of stone masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry. C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Re move and replace stone masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STONE A. Match Architect’s samples for variety, color range, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects. B. Design selections: 1. Exterior Stone Veneer: Match Lion Square Lodge North Building. Cleft cut stone face out for North Stair East/West/North wall recesses. 2. Exterior Stone Caps: Dark Buff Sandstone. Provide stone caps at top of stone walls, stone piers, and window sills. 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. D. For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement formula tion as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. E. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows: 1. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 2. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone; of color necessary to produ ce required mortar color. F. Mortar Pigments: Natural or synthetic iron oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and with a record of satisfactory performance in stone masonry mortars. G. Latex Additive: acrylic-resin or styrene-butadien e-rubber water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Boiardi Products Corporation. b. Bonsal. c. Bostik Findley Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. DAP Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –4 h. MAPEI Corp. i. Summitville Tiles, Inc. j. TEC Specialty Construction Brands; H. B. Fuller Company. H. Water: Potable. 2.3 VENEER ANCHORS A. Materials: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 100 8/A 1008M, cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. B. Wire Veneer Anchors: Wire ties formed fr om W1.7 or 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel wire. C. Corrugated-Metal Veneer Anchors: Not less than 0.030-inch- (0.76-mm-) thick by 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) wide hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch (7.6 to 13 mm) and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch (1.5 to 2.5 mm). D. Adjustable, Screw-Attached Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor section that allow vertical adjustment but re sist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with re quirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company b. Heckmann Building Products Inc. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Wire-Bond. 2. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capa ble of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). 3. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm) long, with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch (16 mm) wide by 5 inches long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie. 4. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.097-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. 5. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.25-inch- (6.4-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel wire. E. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon-steel drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 (4.8-mm diameter) by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with re quirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company; Stainless Steel SX Fastener. b. ITW Buildex; Scots Long Life Teks.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –5 2.4 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene or PVC. B. Weep Holes: 1. Rectangular Plastic Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 inches (10 by 38 mm) by thickness of stone veneer assembly. 2. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, designed to fill head joint with outside face held back 1/8 inch (3 mm) from exterior face of stone veneer, in co lor selected from manufacturer's standard. 2.6 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry-measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry-measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water. B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer 's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by stone producer. 2.7 STONE FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate stone in sizes and shapes necessary to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings. B. Cut and select stone to produce pieces of thic kness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association or, if none, by stone source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs. 1. Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles. C. Thickness of Stone Veneer: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following: 1. Thickness: 3-1/2 and 1-1/2 inches as indicated on the Drawings plus or minus 1/2 inch. D. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. E. Shape stone for type of masonry (p attern) as indicated on the Drawings. F. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comp ly with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples and mockups. G. Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrica tion plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –6 2.8 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigm ents, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water- repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. B. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. Mortar for Setting Stone: Type S. C. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Metal Lath: 1 part Portland cement, 1/2 part lime, 5 parts loose damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of weather-resistant sheathing paper before beginning stone installation. B. Coat concrete and unit masonry backup with asphalt dampproofing. 3.2 SETTING OF STONE MASONRY, GENERAL A. Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set. 1. Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces. 2. Use hammer and chisel to split stone that is fabricated with split surfaces. B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical proper ties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use. C. Arrange stones in three-course, random-range ashlar pattern with random course heights, random lengths (interrupted coursed), and uniform joint widths. D. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended appearance. E. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor variations are required to maintain bond alignm ent if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) at narrowest points or more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) at widest points. F. Provide sealant joints of wi dths and at locations indicated. 1. Keep sealant joints free of mo rtar and other rigid materials. 2. Sealing joints is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Sheet metal flashing: Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. 1. At stud-framed walls, extend flashing through st one masonry, up the face of sheathing at least 12 inches (300 mm), and behind weather-resistant sheathing paper. 2. At concrete backing, extend flashing through stone masonry, turned up a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm), and insert in reglet. Reglet s are specified Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."]
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –7 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing full length of angles but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. 4. At sills, extend flashing not less than 4 inches (100 mm) at ends. 5. At ends of head and sill flashing turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams. 6. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn flashing down to form a drip. H. Flexible flashing: Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. 1. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flas hing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 2. Install metal flashing termination beneath fl exible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 3. Cut flexible flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. I. Place weep holes and vents in joints where mo isture may accumulate, including at base of cavity walls, above shelf angles, and at flashing. 1. Use round plastic tubing to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in stone sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER A. Install flashing over sheathing and behind weather-resistant sheathing paper by fastening through sheathing into framing. B. Install lath over weather-resistant sheathing paper by fastening through sheathing into framing to comply with ASTM C 1063. C. Coat backs of stone units and face of masonry backup with cement-paste bond coat, then butter both surfaces with setting mortar. Use sufficient se tting mortar so a slight excess will be forced out the edges of stone units as they are set. Tap un its into place, completely filling space between units and masonry backup. D. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm). Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –8 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before appl ying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20 Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution. 6. Clean stone masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Clean limestone masonry to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook." 3.5 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE A. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soil- contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade. 3.9 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Stone veneer: match stone at North building, dark buff sand stone cap, cleft cut stone face out for north stair east/west/north wall recesses. END OF SECTION 04860
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steel. B. Refer to Structural Drawings for additional structural provisions. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Quality Control" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck." 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to structural- steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and ot her metal items not defined as structural steel. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame , as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads. B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Structural steel designated as architecturally exposed structural steel in the Contract Documents. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For fabricator and professional engineer. E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers cer tifying that the following products comply with requirements: 1. Structural steel including ch emical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechan ical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Shop primers.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 4. Nonshrink grout. F. Source quality-control test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the State of Colorado where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for projects with structural steel framing that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. B. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1 or SSPC- QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators." C. Welding: Qualify pro cedures and personnel according to AWS D1 .1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practi ce for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 3. AISC's "Specification fo r Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members." 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected pl ace. Clean and relubricate bolts an d nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or repl ace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, Grade 50 (345). B. Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. C. Unheaded Anchor Rods: 60 KSI. 1. Configuration: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain. E. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel. F. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold-finished carbon steel. 2.3 PRIMER A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifica tions and standards: 1. Unprimed Non-Exposed Metal Surfaces : SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." 2. Primed Non-Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. Primed Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." B. Primers: 1. Primed Non-Exposed Metal Surfaces: Fabricat or's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.4 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicu lar to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as reco mmended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear conn ectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Do not paint surfaces to receive welded stud shear connectors. G. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-opening framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. H. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to st eel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other sp ecialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated otherwise on the Structural Drawings. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces. 2.6 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Ex tend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bo lted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifica tions and standards: 1. Unprimed Non-Exposed Metal Surfaces : SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." 2. Primed Non-Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommende d by SSPC to provide a dry film th ickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surface s after assembly or erec tion. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent struct ural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting co nstruction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Stru ctural Steel Buildings-- Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and ma sonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing pl ates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported memb ers have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surf aces; protect grout and allow to cure. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temper ature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally expo sed structural steel; fill holes with plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection. H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "S pecification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated otherwise on the Structural Drawings. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allo wable Stress Design and Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 4. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to a llowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces. a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: 1. Bolt Testing: Test 2 percent of all high strength bolts, nuts, and washers for compliance with all provisions of specified requirements. Revi ew all certifications and mill test reports. 2. Bolted Connections: Visually inspect all bolted co nnections to assure all bolts, nuts, and required washers have been installed and are of proper type, and all faying surfaces have been brought into snug contact. 3. Standard High Strength Bolts: Inspect tightness of 30 percent of all bolts (minimum of 2), selected at random in each slip-critical high stre ngth bolted connection of structural steel framing on Project. If rejectable bolts are found in an y connection, check all remaining bolts in that connection of tightness. Inspection will conform to “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” approved by Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 4. Tension Control (Self-Indicating) Bolts: a. Perform visual inspection of all high strengt h bolted connections to ensure all torque-off splines have been sheared. b. Splines not sheared, verify proper bolt tension has been achieved by the application of a properly calibrated testing torq ue device or remove and repl ace all bolts with un-sheared splines. Contractor will pay cost of additional inspections required. C. Welded Connections: Agency will perform following on shop and field welds: 1. All welds, including wall and shoring connections: 10 percent visual. 2. Full penetration groove welds in tran sfer elements: 100 percent ultrasonic. 3. Steel decking: 100 percent visual. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 05120
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado STEEL DECK 05310 - 1 SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Non-composite form deck. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories , and attachments to other construction. C. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer. D. Welding certificates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent ag ency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel accordin g to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, prov ide steel deck units identi cal to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. D. AISI Specifications: Comply with cal culated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Forme d Steel Structural Members." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado STEEL DECK 05310 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compli ance with requirements, manufacturer s offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Deck: a. ASC Profiles, Inc. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc. c. DACS, Inc. d. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. e. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. f. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. g. Roof Deck, Inc. h. United Steel Deck, Inc. i. Verco Manufacturing Co. 2.2 NONCOMPOSITE FORM (FLOOR) DECK A. Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form-deck panels to comply with “SDI Specifications and Commentary for No ncomposite Steel Form Deck,” in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40 (275), G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 22 gage. 4. Span Condition: per Structural Drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's sta ndard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-dr illing, self-threading screws. C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexag onal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcani zed, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield streng th of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design unco ated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado STEEL DECK 05310 - 3 G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated. H. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet , shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter. I. Flat Sump Plate: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. J. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instru ctions, and requirements in this Section. B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories arou nd openings and other wo rk projecting through or adjacent to deck. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for ma nual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. I. Reinforcement at Openings: 1. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pi eces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work shown. 2. Miscellaneous openings not shown on Drawings such as those required for vents, risers, conduits, etc., shall be cut and reinforced by the trade requiring the opening.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado STEEL DECK 05310 - 4 3.3 DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten deck panels to steel su pporting members by arc spot (pudd le) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location as recommended by deck manufacturer. B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports as indicated on Structural Drawings. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure stri ps over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manu facturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure. E. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet po ur stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. F. Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet cell closures, and Z-closures to deck according to SDI recommendations to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of deck panels, unless otherwise indicated. G. Uplifting Loads: Install and anchor roof units to resist net uplift loading of 30 lbs per square foot at entry canopy and eave overhangs, design for 45 lbs per square foot. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Testing agency will report inspection results prom ptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specifi ed requirements. E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor 's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado STEEL DECK 05310 - 5 END OF SECTION 05310
COLD-FO R MED METAL F R AMING 05400 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior load-bearing wall framing. 2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provid e cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Length/400 for wind loading.. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qua lified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel acco rding to AWS D1.3, "Struc tural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance pe r ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Speci fication for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."
COLD-FO R MED METAL F R AMING 05400 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C- and T-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Section Properties: As indicated on Structural Drawings. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Flange Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Section Properties: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2.2 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-B EARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Flange Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Section Properties: As indicated on Structural Drawings. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's st andard clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displ acement of primary structure through pos itive mechanical attachment to stud web. 2.3 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING A. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as indicated on structural drawings. B. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-sh aped steel joist track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as indicated on structural drawings. 2.4 ROOF TRUSSES A. Roof Truss Members: Manufacturer's standard st eel sections as indicated on structural drawings.
COLD-FO R MED METAL F R AMING 05400 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003 M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-re sistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-re sistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by vo lume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching. D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AI SI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
COLD-FO R MED METAL F R AMING 05400 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plum b, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. C. Install framing member s in one-piece lengths. D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in pl ace, undisturbed , until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. F. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, an d multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate ove r web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.3 EXTERIOR LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows: 1. Anchor Spacing: As shown on Shop Drawings. B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: As indicated. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations. D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated. G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, we b stiffeners, or gusset plates.
COLD-FO R MED METAL F R AMING 05400 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. 2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and be low wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs. H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. 1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each cas e, considering weight or load resulting from item supported. I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced as indicated. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches (150 mm) deep. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud- track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure. K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. 3.4 JOIST INSTALLATION A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and sp acings indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track. 1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated. D. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal le ngth to joist reinforcement, or as indicated on Shop Drawings. 1. Install web stiffeners to tran sfer axial loads of walls above. E. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Draw ings. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows:
COLD-FO R MED METAL F R AMING 05400 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist webs. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and joist- track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs. F. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. G. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fa steners, to provide a comp lete and stable joist- framing assembly. 3.5 TRUSS INSTALLATION A. Install, bridge, and brace trusses according to S hop Drawings and requirem ents in this Section. B. Do not alter, cut, or remove framing members or connections of trusses. C. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and pa rallel to each other, align, and accurately position at spacings indicated. D. Erect trusses without damagi ng framing members or connections. E. Align webs of bottom chords and load-bearing studs or continuously reinforce track to transfer loads to structure. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points. F. Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses as indicated on Shop Drawings and designed according to LGSEA's Technical Note 551e, "Design Guide for Permanent Bracing of Cold-Formed Steel Trusses.". 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independen t testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not co mply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold- formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and main tain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
COLD-FO R MED METAL F R AMING 05400 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado END OF SECTION 05400
METAL FAB R ICATIONS 05500 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Shelf angles. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 4. Steel weld plates and angles. 5. Miscellaneous steel trim. 6. Metal bollards. 7. Pipe guards. B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for metal-framed stairs. C. See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube railings. D. See Division 5 Section "Gratings" for metal gratings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Metal nosings and treads. 2. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. Templates: For anchors and bolts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to comp liance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
METAL FAB R ICATIONS 05500 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials w ith smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. 3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 4. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels complying with MFMA-3, 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm). Channels made from galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.079- inch (2-mm) nominal thickness. 5. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79. B. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Available Products: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. c. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer. e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. g. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, high-zin c-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply w ith requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated.
METAL FAB R ICATIONS 05500 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 1. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accuratel y. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 4. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 5. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to r eceive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or la g screws, drill holes at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 2. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction with steel baseplates and top plates welded to pipe with fillet welds the same size as pipe wall thickness. C. Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricat e loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. 1. Lintels in Exterior Walls: Galvanize. D. Shelf Angles: Fabricate shelf angles of sizes indi cated and for attachment to framing. Fabricate with horizontally slotted holes to recei ve 3/4-inch (19-mm) bo lts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 1. Shelf Angles in Exterior Walls: Galvanize. 2. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in- place concrete. E. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Dr ill plates to receive anchor bolts. F. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Exterior Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Galvanize. G. Metal Bollards: Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick steel plate. 2. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) thic k steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch (19-mm) anchor bolts.
METAL FAB R ICATIONS 05500 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. H. Pipe Guards: Fabricate from 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick by 12-inch- (300-mm-) wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch (50-mm) clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch (19-mm) anchor bolts. 2.6 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Steel and Iron Finishes: 1. Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable. 2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." b. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting," for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in- place construction. 3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwo rk for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. C. Bollards: 1. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts at each bollard.
METAL FAB R ICATIONS 05500 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly w ith nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 3. Anchor bollards in place with concrete fo otings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. 4. Fill bollards solidly with concrete , mounding top surface to shed water. D. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection. 1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up paint with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500
METAL STAIRS 05511 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 05511 - METAL STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. West Stairwells: Preassembled steel stairs with abrasive-coating-finished formed-metal treads. 2. East Stairwells: Industrial-type stairs with ADA-compliant grip-strut steel treads. 3. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs and to walls adjacent to metal stairs. B. See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stai rs capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m). 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm). 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever is less. B. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal stairs.
METAL STAIRS 05511 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to comp liance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials w ith smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn). D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. E. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M). F. Iron Castings: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48 M, Class 30, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. G. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170). H. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205). I. Expanded Metal, Carbon Steel: ASTM F 1267, Class 1 (uncoated). J. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, 2-inch (50-mm) woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135-inch (3.5- mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).
METAL STAIRS 05511 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado K. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Cast-Metal Abrasive Nosings: Cast gray ir on, Class 20, with an integral abrasive finish. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. b. Balco Inc. c. Barry Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc. d. Granite State Casting Co. e. Safe-T-Metal Co. f. Wooster Products Inc. 2. Apply bituminous paint to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of units set into concrete. B. Fasteners: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. D. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply w ith requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated. E. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm)--W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Alfab, Inc. 2. American Stair, Inc. 3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The). B. Provide complete stair assemblies, including me tal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 3. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accu rately. Remove burrs and ease edges, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 4. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work. 5. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using c oncealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
METAL STAIRS 05511 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado C. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels]. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members. 1. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces. 2. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum-board shaft-wall assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. 3. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. D. Abrasive-Coating-Finished, Formed-Metal Stairs: Fo rm risers, treads, and plat forms from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.0966 inch (2.5 mm). Finish tread and platform surf aces with manufacturer's standard epoxy-bonded abrasive finish. E. Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platform s from rolled-steel floor plate of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets. F. ADA-compliant Serrated Grip-str ut stairs: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." 1. Fabricate treads with rolled-steel floor plate nosin g and with steel angle or steel plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts. Comply with ANSI requirements for slip resistance. 2. Manufacturer: Ohio Gratings, Inc 3. Shall be fabricated with serrated grating members. 4. Provide unit sizes to fit treads and landings at East egress stairs. 5. Provide concealed support members, including steel angles, bolts, etc. G. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Configuration: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square top and bottom rails and posts with infill panels made from woven wire mesh in steel channel frames. 2. Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. 3. Form changes in direction of railings by bending or by insertin g prefabricated fittings. 4. Form curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling. 5. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 6. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails. 7. Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. 8. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding. 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating fi nishes. Finish metal stairs after assembly. B. Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed products:
METAL STAIRS 05511 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Exterior Stairs (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of meta l stair components. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevati on, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abra de surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and plat forms to comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. F. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. 1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. G. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05511
PIPE AND TUBE R AILINGS 05521 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel pipe and tube railings. B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for st eel tube railings associated with metal stairs. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. (1.2 kN/sq. m) applied horizontally. c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples: For each exposed finish required.
PIPE AND TUBE R AILINGS 05521 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: a. Pisor Industries, Inc. b. Sharpe Products. c. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a divisi on of the Wagner Companies. 2.2 METALS A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel and Iron: 1. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn). 2. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 3. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 4. Castings: Either gray or mall eable iron, unless otherwise indicated. a. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. b. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 5. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type I (expanded), Class 1 (uncoated). 6. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, 2-inch (50-mm) woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135- inch (3.5-mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M). 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, unless unavoidable or standard for railings indicated. 1. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners comp lying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. B. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place, chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488. C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select acco rding to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
PIPE AND TUBE R AILINGS 05521 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado D. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint 5. E. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with ASTM C 1107; or water-resistant, nonshrink anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and details indicated, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. C. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. D. Form curves by bending in jigs to produce uniform curvature; maintain cross section of member throughout bend without cracking or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces. E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Prov ide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. H. Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill pa nels from woven-wire mesh crimped into 1-by-1/2- by-1/8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-mm) metal channel frames. 2.5 FINISHES A. Steel and Iron: 1. Galvanized Railings: Hot-dip galvanize exterior railings, after fabrication, to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. 2. Shop-Primed Galvanized Railings: After galvanizing, clean railings, treat with metallic-phosphate process, and apply primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting require d for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. 1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).
PIPE AND TUBE R AILINGS 05521 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into preset steel pipe sleeves or formed or core-drilled holes and grouting annular space. C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges. D. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. E. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped fo r concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. F. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05521
GRATINGS 05530 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 05530 - GRATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal bar gratings. 2. Metal frames and supports for gratings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Gratings: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Floors: Uniform load of 75 lbf/sq. ft. (3.59 kN/sq. m) or concentrated load of 2000 lbf (8.90 kN), whichever produces the greater stress. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings. 2. Paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of gratings. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Metal Bar Gratings: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation. b. All American Grating, Inc. c. Barnett/Bates Corp.
GRATINGS 05530 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado d. Borden Metal Products (Canada) Limited. e. Fisher & Ludlow. f. Grupo Metelmex, S.A. de C.V. g. IKG Industries; a Harsco Company. h. Marwas Steel Co.; Laur el Steel Products Division. i. Ohio Gratings, Inc. j. Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc. k. Tru-Weld. 2.2 METALS A. Ferrous Metals: 1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 30 4 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc- plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fasten ing aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Anchors: Provide anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. D. Fabricate toeplates for attaching in the field. E. Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports. F. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with bars of same size and material as bearing bars. G. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.
GRATINGS 05530 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.6 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabri cate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings. 2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded anchors. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by 8 inches (200 mm) long. B. Galvanize steel frames and supports in the following locations: 1. Exterior. 2. Interior, where indicated. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly. B. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for in stalling gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from es tablished lines and levels and free of rack. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of units that ha ve been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated. D. Metal Bar Gratings: Comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details. 1. Attach removable units to supporting members w ith type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown. 2. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above. E. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abrade d areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
GRATINGS 05530 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado END OF SECTION 05530
O R NAMENTAL R AILIN G S 05721 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 05721 - ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel and iron ornamental railings. B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for st eel tube railings associated with metal stairs. C. See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for railings fabricated from pipe and tube components. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. (1.2 kN/sq. m) applied horizontally. c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For railings assembled from standard components, grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
O R NAMENTAL R AILIN G S 05721 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado C. Samples: For each exposed finish required. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. B. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage testing agency to test railings according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. Payment will be made by Owner. 1. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and construction. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consistin g of two posts, top rail, infill area, and anchorage system components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, ma nufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel and Iron Ornamental Railings: a. Architectural Iron Designs, Inc. b. Artezzi. c. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. d. Braun, J. G., Company; a division of the Wagner Companies. e. Indital USA. f. Lawler Foundry Corporation. g. Livers Bronze Co. h. Olin Wrought Iron. i. Regency Railings. j. TT Triebenbacher - Bavarian Iron Works Co. k. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 2.2 METALS A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel and Iron: 1. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn). 2. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
O R NAMENTAL R AILIN G S 05721 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 4. Castings: Either gray or mall eable iron, unless otherwise indicated. a. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. b. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide concealed fa steners, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners comp lying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. B. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place, chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488. C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings." D. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. E. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zi nc-oxide primer compatible with finish paint systems indicated and complyi ng with SSPC-Paint 5. F. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with ASTM C 1107, or water-resistant, nonshrink, anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and details indicated, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. C. Mechanical Connections: Connect members w ith concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. D. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings. E. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Prov ide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FINISHES A. Steel and Iron:
O R NAMENTAL R AILIN G S 05721 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Galvanized Railings: Hot-dip galvanize exterior railings, after fabrication, to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. 2. Shop-Primed Galvanized Railings: After galvanizing, clean railings, treat with metallic-phosphate process, and apply primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting requi red for installing railings . Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. 1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m). B. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into preset steel pipe sleeves or formed or core-drilled holes and grouting annular space. C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces as indicated usi ng fittings designed and engineered for this purpose. D. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with sleeves concealed within railing ends or brackets on underside of rails connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. E. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. 1. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or la g bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood backing between studs. F. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean abraded areas and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. END OF SECTION 05721
R OUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 4. Wood furring and grounds. 5. Wood sleepers. 6. Plywood backing panels. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product indicated. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatm ent from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following: 1. Treated wood. 2. Engineered wood products. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors. 7. Building and window wrap. C. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemi cal treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials: 1. For each type of preservative-treated wood produc t, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 2. For waterborne-treated products, include statemen t that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. 3. For fire-retardant-treated wood products, includ e certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to bending strength, stiffness, and fastener-h olding capacities of treated materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to comp liance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.
R OUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.02 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive staine d or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grad e stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4 S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. B. Engineered Wood Products: Accep table to authorities having jurisd iction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Meet or exceed those indicated per manufacturer's published values determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.03 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: 1. Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preserva tive treated or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 2. Do not use chemicals contai ning chromium or arsenic. 3. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. (4.0 kg/cu. m). After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stri pping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. c. Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 lb/cu. ft. (6.4 kg/cu. m). 4. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials: a. Where fire-retardant-treated wood is indica ted, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL; U.S. Testing; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authoritie s having jurisdiction. b. Treatment Types: Interior Type A for protected wood and Exterior for wood exposed to weather. c. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or pl ywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. C. Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Commit tee Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
R OUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping , and similar concealed me mbers in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over co ncrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2.04 PLYWOOD A. Plywood: Provide either all-veneer, mat-formed, or composite panels complying with DOC PS 2, "Per- formance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels," unless otherwise indicated. Provide ply- wood panels complying with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Ply- wood," where plywood is indicated. B. Trademark: Factory mark structural-use panels with APA trademark eviden cing compliance with grade requirements. C. Span Ratings: Provide panels with span ratings required to meet "Code Plus" provisions of APA Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial." D. Plywood Underlayment: Underlayme nt B-C Exterior with fully sanded face, thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). E. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood: A-D Interior, thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). F. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant-treated plywood panels with grade, C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise indi- cated, not less than 15/32 inch (11.9 mm) thick. 2.05 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Of grades indicated according to the Am erican Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Grade as indicated on the Structural Drawings and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Northern species; NLGA. 3. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. C. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bear ing Partitions: Douglas Fir-Larch. Grade as indicated on the Structural Drawings. D. Exposed Framing: Hand select material for unif ormity of appearance and freedom from characteristics that would impair finish appearance. 1. Species and Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of same type. E. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Rooftop bases and support curbs.
R OUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Blocking. 3. Cants. 4. Nailers. F. For items of dimension lumber size, provide lumber grade as indicated on the Structural Drawings with 15 percent maximum moisture content of any species. 2.06 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. B. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated un its, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs , let into and bonded to flanges. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055. C. Rim Boards: Product desi gned to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists. 2.07 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1, single-floor panels as indicated on the Structural Drawings. B. Plywood Underlayment for Ceramic Tile: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, 3/4 inch thick. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 3. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. B. Metal Framing Anchors: Made from hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, zinc coating of one ounce per square foot. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. b. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. c. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. d. KC Metals Products, Inc. e. Silver Metal Products, Inc. f. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. g. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. h. United Steel Products Company, Inc.
R OUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project. 3. Allowable Design Loads: Meet or exceed those indicated per manufacturer's published values determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1- inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. D. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, w ith members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply w ith requirements for attaching other construction. B. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to su bstrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. In accordance with “ICBO 2304.9.1.” D. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. E. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. F. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. G. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. 1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide. H. Fastening Methods: 1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: Glue and nail to framing. 2. Underlayment: Nail or staple to subflooring. END OF SECTION 06100
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 06108 - 1 SECTION 06108 - EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior decks and support framing. 2. Wood decking. B. Refer to Section 06100 for preservative-treated sleepers installed on roof to support deck framing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For preser vative-treated wood products and metal framing anchors. B. Material Certificates: 1. For lumber specified to comply with minimum a llowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 2. For preservative-treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. C. Evaluation Reports: For the following: 1. Preservative-treated wood products. 2. Wood decking. 3. Expansion anchors. 4. Metal framing anchors. 5. Decking fasteners. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by ALSC's Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by ALSC's Board of Review to inspect and grade lu mber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each item with gr ade stamp of grading agency. 2. For items that are exposed to view in the completed Work, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 06108 - 2 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. B. Deck and Stair Framing: No . 2 grade or higher and any of the following species: 1. Hem-fir (North); NLGA. 2. Southern pine; SPIB. 3. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. C. Dimension Lumber Posts: No. 2 grade or higher and any of the following species: 1. Hem-fir or hem-fir (North); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2.3 BOARDS A. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent. B. Provide boards hand selected for freedom from characteristics, on expo sed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot holes, shak e, splits, torn grain, and wane. C. Board Decking: 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-) thick radius-edged decking of any of the following species and grades: 1. Redwood, Heart Clear; RIS. 2. Western red cedar, Select Dex, WCLIB. 3. Grade Characteristics: a. Clear one face; small pin knots and worm holes allowed on back face. b. Straight grained and parallel cut. c. Free of heart centers. d. No decay, incipient decay , honeycomb, knot holes, shakes, splits, or wane. e. No discoloration. 2.4 TIMBER A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. B. Dressing: Provide timber that is band-sawn unless otherwise indicated. C. Timber Posts: southern pine; No. 2, SPIB. 2.5 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Pressure treat boards and dimension lumber with waterborne preservativ e according to AWPA 31. B. Pressure treat timber with wate rborne preservative according to AWPA C15 requirements for "sawn building poles and posts as structural members."
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 06108 - 3 1. Treatment with CCA shall include post-treatment fixation process. C. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not use chemicals contai ning arsenic or chromium except for timb er posts. D. Use process that includes water-repellent treatment. E. Use process that does not include water repellents or other substances that might interfere with application of indicated finishes. F. After treatment, redry timber to 19 percent maximum moisture content. G. Mark treated wood with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. H. Application: Treat all exterior rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 1. Framing members less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade. 2. Sills and ledgers. 3. Members in contact with masonry or concrete. 4. Posts. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into wood substrate. 1. Use fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 unless otherwise indicated. 2. For pressure-preservative-treated wo od, use stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For plastic decking, use stainless-steel fast eners where fasteners are exposed to view. B. Postinstalled Anchors: Stainless-steel, chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Stainless-steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4). 2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compli ance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. 3. KC Metals Products, Inc. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 5. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 06108 - 4 6. USP Structural Connectors. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated on Drawings. Ma nufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated st eel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: AS TM A 666, Type 304. 2.8 CONCEALED DECKING FASTENERS A. Deck Clips: Black oxide coated stai nless-steel clips designed to be fastened to deck framing with screws, and to secure decking material with teeth. 1. Products: Subject to co mpliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Tiger Claw Inc.; Tiger Claw Hidden Deck Fasteners. B. Deck Tracks: Formed metal strips designed to be fastened to deck framing and to secure decking material from underside with screws. Made from epoxy powder-coated, hot-dip galvanized steel. 1. Products: Subject to co mpliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Grabber Deckmaster, a division of John Wagner Associates, Inc.; Deckmaster. b. Ty-Lan Enterprises Inc.; Shadoe Track. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set exterior rough carpentry to required levels and lines , with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit exterior rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install plastic lumber to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Secure decking to framing with deck ing fasteners selected by Architect. E. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. F. Do not splice structural members betwee n supports unless otherwise indicated. G. Comply with AWPA M4 fo r applying field treatment to cut surf aces of preservative-treated lumber. H. Securely attach exterior rough car pentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 06108 - 5 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. I. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent treads and risers and no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variation betwee n largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. J. Treads and Risers: Secure by screwing to carriages. Countersink fastener heads, fill flush, and sand filler. Extend treads over carriages. K. Railings: Secure wall rails with metal brackets. Fasten freestanding railings to newel posts and to trim at walls with countersunk-head wood screws or rail bolts and glue. END OF SECTION 06108
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-1 SECTION 06130 - HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes framing using rough sawn glu-lam columns, beams, braces and trusses. B. See Drawings for sizes and locations. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Timbers: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. B. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 2. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 3. WCLIB - West Coast Lu mber Inspection Bureau. 4. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Inspection: Issued by lumber grading agency for exposed timber not marked with grade stamp. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Timber Standard: Comply with AITC 108, "Standard for Heavy Timber Construction." 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery of heavy timber construction to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HEAVY TIMBER, GENERAL A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Boar d of Review, as applicable. 1. Factory mark each item of timber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed timber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, apply grade stamps to surfaces that will not be exposed to view or omit grade st amps and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 2.02 TIMBER A. Provide pressure treated fabricated members with airborne solution for above-ground use, complying with AWPA C2. 1. Provide preservative treatment solution free of water repellents and other substances that might interfere when applying finishes as required for timber work.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-2 B. After fabrication and surfacing of each unit, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit. Protect fr om moisture damage during on site st orage by shrink wrapping prior to delivery or providing a well ventilated covering. C. Provide protection for all members below grade. D. Refer to structural drawings for wood species, dimensional requirements, attachments, and connection details. E. Timber Species and Grade: D ouglas fir-larch WCLIB, or WWPA. F. Moisture Content: Provide timber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. G. Dressing: Provide timber that is rough sawn (Rgh), unless indicated otherwise. H. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standa rd, transparent, colorless wood seal er that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts. I. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transp arent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish. 2.03 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural-steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. B. Provide bolts, 3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; nuts complying with ASTM A 563; an d, where indicated, flat washers. C. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with ru st-inhibitive primer, 2-mil dry film thickness. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Seal Coat: After fabricating and surfacing each unit, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect heavy timber construction true and plumb. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. B. Fit members by cutting and restoring exposed su rfaces to match specified surfacing. Predrill for fasteners and assembly of units. 1. Finish exposed surfaces to rem ove planing or surfacing marks and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. 2. Coat crosscuts with end sealer. C. Install timber connectors as indicat ed. Install bolts with orientation as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Contractor.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-3 D. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged heavy timber construction if repairs are not approved by Architect. END OF SECTION 06130
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SHEATHING 06160-1 SECTION 06160 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Building paper. 4. Sheathing joint-and-penetration treatment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated produc t. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatme nt and ire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by trea ting plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following: 1. Preservative-treated plywood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood. 3. Foam-plastic sheathing. 4. Building wrap. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemb lies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptabl e to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Plywood: DOC PS 1. 2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SHEATHING 06160-2 B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat all plywood, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27. 1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for roof sheathing and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. C. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another te sting and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.4 WALL SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corporation. 2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. B. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: per Structural Drawings. 2. Nominal Thickness: per Structural Drawings. 2.5 ROOF SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Roof Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with re quirements, provide "Dens-Deck" by G-P Gypsum Corporation. 3. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. B. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: per Structural Drawings. 2. Nominal Thickness: per Structural Drawings. 2.5.1 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Structural I, Underlayment single-floor panels. 1. Span Rating: per Structural Drawings. 2. Nominal Thickness: per Structural Drawings.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SHEATHING 06160-3 B. Plywood Subflooring: Exposure 1, Structural I single-floor panels or sheathing. 1. Span Rating: per Structural Drawings. 2. Nominal Thickness: per Structural Drawings. C. Underlayment, General: Provide underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) over smooth subfloors and not less than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) over board or uneven subfloors. D. Hardboard Underlayment: AHA A135.4, Class 4 (S ervice), Surface S1S; w ith back side sanded. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size an d type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recomm ended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resist ance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. F. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. 1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch (0.835 mm) thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 1002. 2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick, att ach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 954. 2.7 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Elastomeric silicone joint sealant recommended by sheathing manufacturer. B. Sheathing Tape for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers. 2.8 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SHEATHING 06160-4 B. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when te sted according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company) a. Tyvek® CommercialWrap® 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 152g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). C. Building-Wrap Tape: Tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calcula ted according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberiz ed-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Sel ect fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that exclude exterior moisture. G. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SHEATHING 06160-5 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendati ons in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide." B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Nail or staple to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of wall sheathing panels. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. 1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends. 3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with screws. 2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry, concrete or similar materials. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing. 3.4 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasten ers and trowel flat. Apply sufficient quantity of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing board joints, and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are co mpletely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. 3.5 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap, unless otherwise indicated.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SHEATHING 06160-6 B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch (50-mm) overlap and a 6-inch (150-mm) end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.6 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm), except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 2. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings. 3. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings. 4. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sh eathing by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with weather- resistant sheathing paper securely fastened to framing. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed. END OF SECTION 06160
EXTE R IOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 06201 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior standing and running trim. 2. Lumber siding. 3. Exterior soffits. 4. Wood shutters and hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. B. Samples: For each type of siding indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. C. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: 1. Lumber: AWPA C2. Kiln dr y after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to author ities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 3. Application: Where indicated. 2.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim: 1. Species and Grade: Western red ce dar, Grade A; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent. 3. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth) or Saw textured, per Architect.
EXTE R IOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.4 LUMBER SIDING A. Provide kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20. B. Species and Grade: Grade A wester n red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. C. For exterior work use 9-12% lumber with final moisture of 7-12%. D. Vertical Siding: 8” minimum width face, tongue and groove vertical siding 1. Species and finish: per Architect, to match adjacent North Building. 2.5 WOOD SHUTTERS AND HARDWARE A. Dogs - Whittington, hand forged iron offset beacon hill shutter tiebacks, dog 3 ¼” L x ½” W x 5” H with ½” W x 4” H lag screw, sold in set of two, black powder coat finish. B. Hinges – Whittington, Wrenne iron hinge strap, hand-forged iron, sold individually, trap dimension 13” L x 7/8” W (front to back) x 2 1/8” H, ½” pin diameter, includes mounting hardware, black powder coat finish. C. Mounting location: Mount the dogs on the side of the shutter one third of the way up from the bottom. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into wood substrate. 1. Fasteners: Stainless steel or aluminum fasteners, face applied, countersunk and filled, or colored to match finished siding. B. Insect Screening for Soffit Vents: Aluminum, 18-by-16 (1.4-by-1.6-mm) mesh. C. Round Soffit Vents: Stamped aluminum louvered vents, 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter. D. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF and with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"; recommended by sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of substrates for intended application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer.
EXTE R IOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3.2 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. B. Install trim with minimum number of joints pract ical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less th an 24 inches (610 mm) lo ng except where necessary. 1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members. C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners. 3.3 SIDING INSTALLATION A. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Lumber Siding: Apply starter strip along bottom edge of sheathing or sill. Install first course of siding with lower edge at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) below starter strip and subsequent courses lapped 1 inch (25 mm) over course below. Nail at each stud. Do not allow nails to penetrate more than one thickness of siding. 3.4 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Shutter banding colors: 1. Green, match Benjamin Moore Paint, HC-123, Kennebunkport Green. 2. Off-white, match Benjamin Moore Paint, 1B Seashell 926. END OF SECTION 06201
INTE R IOR FINISH CA R PENTRY 06202 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 06202 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim to match existing in each unit. 2. Interior mouldings, chair rails and other wood trim items. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. B. Samples: For each type of paneling indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. Lumber: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20, Interior Type A. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. B. Plywood: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27, Interior Type A. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. C. Application: Where indicated. 2.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Hardwood Lumber Trim: 1. Species and Grade: Match existing. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. B. Hardwood Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): WMMPA HWM 2, N-grade wood moldings made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12.
INTE R IOR FINISH CA R PENTRY 06202 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Species: Match existing. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. 2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset. 4. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent treads and risers and with no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. 3.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. END OF SECTION 06202
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 1 SECTION 07141 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cold fluid-applied polyurethane or latex-rubber waterproofing for use on concrete substrates at: 1. Foundation walls at basement level only. 2. Horizontal decks 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested phy sical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions. C. Product test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Preinstallation Conference: C onduct conference at Project site. 1.4 STORAGE A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above dew point. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, and agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does no t comply with requirements or th at does not remain watertight for a period of five years after date of Substantial Completion.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, use the following: 1. Spray-applied Waterproofing: a. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.; “Barricoat”, 60 mil application thickness, applied in two coats. B. Other Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Single-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; A-H Seamless Membrane. b. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.; CCW-525. c. Cetco; LDC 60. d. Karnak Corporation; One-Kote System. e. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 201. f. Miradri, T. C.; Miraseal. g. Neogard, Div. of Jones-Blair; Neogard 7403/7405. h. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Deck B.T. i. Pecora Corporation; Duramem 500. j. Sonneborne, Div. of ChemRex Inc.; HLM 5000. k. Tremco; Tremproof 60. l. United Coatings; Elastall 1000. 2. Two-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: a. Futura Coatings, Inc., Subsidiary of IPI International, Inc.; Futura-Flex 518. b. Gaco Western Inc.; LM-60. c. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 222. 3. Single-Component, Unmodified Polyurethane Waterproofing: a. Neogard, Div. of Jones-Blair; Permagard 7410. b. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 101. c. 3M Construction Markets; Scotch Clad 5893/5864. 4. Two-Component, Unmodified Polyurethane Waterproofing: a. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.; CCW 703 Liquiseal. b. Lymtal International, Inc.; Isoflex 550 SP. c. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 102. d. Stellar-Mark; Pro-Deck 7520. e. 3M Construction Markets; FC 100. 5. Two-Component, Unmodified Latex-Rubber Waterproofing: a. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Procor.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 3 2.2 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS A. Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836. B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard, f actory-formulated polyurethane or epoxy primer. C. Sheet Flashing: 50-mil- (1.3-mm-) minimum, nonstaining uncured sheet neoprene. 1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive. D. Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric. 2.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 2 Section "Subdrainage." B. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (0.21-mm) sieve laminated to 1 side and a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a 3-dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft. (112 to 188 L/min. per m). C. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded -Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 (0.43- mm) sieve laminated to 1 side of a 3-dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per ft. (35 L/min. per m). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manuf acturer's written recommendations. Provide clean, dust- free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. 1. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. B. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. E. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at term inations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves accord ing to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 4 1. Apply a double thickness of waterproofing and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. F. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cr acks in substrate according to ASTM C 898 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Re move dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces. G. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate according to ASTM C 898. 3.2 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A. Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry film thickness of 60 mils (1.5 mm) and a minimum dry film thickness of 50 mils (1.3 mm) at any point. B. Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting subsequent construction operations. 3.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage pane ls to substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile fabric to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 3.4 CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer 's written recommendations, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. 1. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07141
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado TRAFFIC COATINGS 07180 - 1 SECTION 07180 - CONCR ETE TRAFFIC COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes traffic coatings for the following applications: 1. Exterior pedestrian concrete surfaces. 2. Coordinate with liquid hardener/sealer in Section 03300. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show extent of each traffic coating. Include details for treating substrate joints and cracks, flashings, deck penetrations, and other termination conditions. Include layout of traffic striping and markings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color ch arts showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of product indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of traffic coating required, prepared on rigid backing and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. 1. Provide stepped samples on backing large enough to illustrate build-up of traffic coatings. E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of traffic coatings with requ irements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations within the last three years. F. Material Certificates: Signed by ma nufacturer certifying that traffic coatings comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations within the last three years. G. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Identify substrates and types of traffic coatings applied. Include recomm endations for periodic inspections, cleaning, care, maintenance, and repair of traffic coatings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Restrictions/Critical Criteria: 1. Concrete must be cured minimum of 28 days prior to application. 2. Apply two (2) coat system per manufacturer’s recommendations.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado TRAFFIC COATINGS 07180 - 2 B. Installer (Applicator) Qualifications: An experienced applicator who has specialized in installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that in dicated for this Project and who is acceptable to or certified by manufacturer. 1. Certification: Written approval or license of applicator by traffic coating manufacturer. C. Source Limitations: As follows: 1. Use traffic coatings of a single manufacturer. 2. Obtain primary traffic coating materials, includin g primers, from traffic coating manufacturer. Obtain secondary materials incl uding aggregates, sheet flashings, joint sealants, and substrate repair materials of type and from source recommended by traffic coating manufacturer. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For traffic coatings as follows: 1. Fire-response testing was performed by UL, ITS, or another independent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having juri sdiction and that performs testing and follow-up services. 2. Provide materials identical to t hose of traffic coatings tested according to ASTM E 108 for deck type and slopes indicated and that comply with requirements for roof-covering Class indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containe rs with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels showing the following information: 1. Manufacturer's brand name. 2. Type of material. 3. Directions for storage. 4. Date of manufacture and shelf life. 5. Lot or batch number. 6. Mixing and application instructions. 7. Color. B. Store materials in a clean, dry loca tion protected from exposure to di rect sunlight. In storage areas, maintain environmental conditions within range recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coatin gs within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply traffic coatings to damp or wet substrates, when temperatures are below 40 deg F (5 deg C), when relative humi dity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above dew point. 1. Do not apply traffic coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during the application and curing period. Apply only when frost-free conditions occur throughout the depth of the substrate. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado TRAFFIC COATINGS 07180 - 3 B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by traffic coating manufact urer agreeing to repair or replace traffic coatings that do not comply with requirement s or that deteriorate during the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of traffic coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, formation of new substrate cracks exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in width, fire, vandalism, or abuse by snowplow, maintenance equipment, and truck traffic. 1. Deterioration of traffic coatings includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Adhesive or cohesive failures. b. Abrasion or tearing failures. c. Surface crazing or spalling. d. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, de icer chemicals, or acids into deck substrate. C. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Physical Requirements: Pr ovide traffic coatings complying with ASTM C 957. B. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base, interm ediate, and top coats; and miscellaneous materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2.2 TRAFFIC COATING A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Tremco Commercial Sealants and Waterproofing. 1. Product: Vulkem 350NF/351NF. 2. Install per manufacturer’s requirements and as follows. B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard factory-formulated primer recomme nded for substrate and conditions indicated. 1. Material: Urethane. C. Preparatory and Base Coats: Single- or multic omponent aromatic liquid urethane elastomer. D. Intermediate Coat: Single- or multicomponent aromatic liquid urethane elastomer. E. Top Coat: Single- or multicomponent ar omatic liquid urethane elastomer. 1. Color: Beige. F. Aggregate: Uniformly graded washed silica sand of particle sizes, shape, and minimum hardness recommended in writing by tr affic coating manufacturer. 1. Spreading Rate: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service conditions indicated, but not less than the following: a. Intermediate Coat: To refusal. b. Top Coat: As required to achieve slip-resistant finish.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado TRAFFIC COATINGS 07180 - 4 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: Multi-component urethane sealant r ecommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions indicated and for compatibility with traffic coatings; complying with ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications or Grade P for deck applications, and Use T where subject to traffic or Use NT elsewhere. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and for other conditions affecting performance of traffic coatings. 1. For the record, prepare written re port, endorsed by Applicator, listing conditions detrimental to performance. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates. 3. Begin coating application only after minimum c oncrete curing and drying period recommended by traffic coating manufacturer has passed, after un satisfactory conditions have been corrected, and after surfaces are dry. 4. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for moisture by by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 5. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrates acco rding to manufacturer's written r ecommendations to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for traffic coating application. B. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings, deck drains, and other deck substrate penetrations to prevent spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings. C. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically abrade conc rete surfaces to a uniform profile according to ASTM D 4259. Do not acid etch. 1. Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete. 2. Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections. 3. Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, form-release agents, and other incompatible material s that might affect coating adhesion. 4. Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258. 3.3 TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminati ons and penetrations through traffic coatings and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves accordin g to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado TRAFFIC COATINGS 07180 - 5 A. Per Manufacturer: Cracks in concrete topping to be ground out ¼” x ½” deep and filled, surface to be leveled and made smooth by applying a coat of sand -filled epoxy, apply Vulkem 350 N coating, apply Vulkem 351 coatings per manufacturer recommendations for this system. B. Prepare, treat, rout, and f ill joints and cracks in substrates acco rding to ASTM C 1127 and traffic coating manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coati ng surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. 1. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation. 3.5 TRAFFIC COATING APPLICATION A. Apply traffic coating material according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.6 CURING AND PROTECTING A. Cure traffic coatings according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Prevent contamination and damage during application and curing stages. B. Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 07180
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Perimeter insulation under slabs-on-grade. 2. Perimeter wall insulation (supporting backfill). 4. Concealed building insulation. 6. Loose-fill building insulation. 8. Vapor retarders. 9. Sound attenuation insulation. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm (13-m/s) air velocity. 2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units fo r each type of exposed insulation indicated. C. Product test reports. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of build ing insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulatio n and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptabl e to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent ne cessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not de liver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF DECK INSULATION A. Basis of Design Manufactur er: Atlas Roofing Corporation. 1. Product: ACFoam® CrossVent® 2. Description: Closed-cell polyiso insulation board with 1.0", 1.5" or 2.0" vent spacer strips separating 7/16 in. APA/TECO rated OSB from the polyiso foam insulation. 2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: 1. Available Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products Division. B. Fabric-Faced, Extruded-Polystyrene Drainage Panels: ASTM C 578, Type VI, with a density of 1.80 lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m), faced with insulation manufacturer's standard nonwoven filtration fabric and fabricated with 1 side having a matrix of drainage and edge channels. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Owens Corning. b. T. Clear Corporation. 2.3 GLASS-FIBER BOARD INSULATION A. Unfaced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA; ASTM C 553, Types I, II, and III; or ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50,
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 respectively, passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; and with a nominal density to achieve an STC rating of 50 for the wall assembly. 1. Location: Acoustical partitions, at locations indicated on plans. In stall to fill space and as required to achieve STC ratings indicated on plans. 2. Available Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Fiber Glass. d. Owens Corning. B. Faced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, T ype IA or Types IA and IB; faced on 1 side with foil-scrim-kraft or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor retarder, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; and of the following nominal density and thermal resistivity. 1. Location: attached to face of studs on exteri or walls at locations indicated on Drawings. 2. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Owens Corning FIBERGLAS™ 700 Series a. Product: Type 711 b. Depth: 1” thick c. R-Value: R4.3 d. Flame spread: 25 per ASTM E 84 e. Smoke developed: 50 per ASTM E 84 f. Density: 6.0 pcf g. K-value: 0 .23 2.4 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Available Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning. B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface wi th a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor- retarder membrane on 1 face. 1. Install kraft-faced batts below enclosed ceiling. 2. Install foil-faced batts above ceiling. 2.5 SLAG-WOOL-FIBER/ROCK-WOOL-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Location: Acoustical partitions, at locations indicat ed on plans. Install to fill space and as required to achieve STC ratings indicated on plans.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4 B. Available Manufacturers: 1. Fibrex Insulations Inc. 2. Owens Corning. 3. Thermafiber. Basis of Design Product: Creased Thermafiber SAFB at demising walls. C. Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2.6 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION A. Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type I for pneumatic application or Type II for poured application; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5. 2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m). B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, sel f-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers. D. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates. E. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and with demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated. 2.9 INSULATION LOCATIONS A. Provide building insulation of rigid and blanket types as applicable: 1. Exterior Walls: a. R-24 Glass fiber blanket type between studs. b. R-4 Rigid attached to face of studs. 2. Stair Tower Walls: a. R-32 Glass fiber blanket type between studs. 3. Ceilings and Soffits: Glass fiber blan ket type; R-38, with foil-facing. 4. Foundation walls (exterior face): Rigid, 2 inches thick. 5. Slabs on grade: Rigid, 2 inches thick, at perimeter. 6. Interior walls (acoustic): Sound attenuation blankets per wall types on plans to achieve STC 45 rating at unit demising walls and floor/ceiling assemblies. See section 01230 Alternate #1 and sheet A0.3 for details. 7. Demising Walls: Creased Thermafiber SAFB, basis of design. B. Provide vapor barrier at building perimeter. Vapor barrier: 6 mil clear polyethylene sheet. C. Perimeter insulation 2 inches thick four feet high, cl osed cell expanded polystyrene. At first floor slab on grade area, apply vertically at the foundation wall.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 5 D. Glass fiber batt insulation (1.7 p.c.f.) R-19 at wa lls (stud cavity) at all heated spaces, friction-fit, use mechanical fasteners where required. Provide Kraft paper backing on batts used below the ceiling line and foil-faced above the ceiling. E. Acoustical partition insulation: Semi-rigid glass fiber (3 p.c.f.), 3 1/2 inch thick, or mineral wool blankets (full thickness). Friction fit between st uds. Provide in partitions unit demising walls, floor/ceiling assemblies, mechanical room, and all separations between public and non-public spaces. Refer also to Division 9, gypsum board systems, and to plans for interior wall types requiring insulation. F. Perimeter wall firesafing and sealants, firesafing at pipe, duct, and conduit penetrations, and top-of-wall firesafing where required to maintain fire ratings. G. Fill all void spaces in exterior assemblies with glass fiber blanket insulation. 2.10 AUXILIARY INSU LATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cro ss ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. 2.11 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envel op entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 6 A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below exterior grade line. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insula tion units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. C. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection course with joints butted. Se t in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions. D. Protect top surface of horiz ontal insulation from damage du ring concrete work by applying protection course with joints butted. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved in to place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units w ith vapor retarder to warm-in-winter side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder , and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. D. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. 5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity he ights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. E. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneou s voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 7 3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR SOUND ATTENUATION A. Acoustical partition insulation: Semi-rigid glass fiber (3 p.c.f.), 3 1/2 inch thick, or mineral wool blankets (full thickness). Friction fit between st uds. Provide in partitions unit demising walls, floor/ceiling assemblies, mechanical room, and all separations between public and non-public spaces. Refer also to Division 9, gypsum board systems, and to plans for interior wall types requiring insulation. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. END OF SECTION 07210
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 07311 - ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof deck insulation. 1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Self-adhering sheet underlayment. 3. Ridge vents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For asphalt shingles, ridge and hip cap shingles, and ridge vent. C. Product test reports. D. Research/evaluation reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles ridge vents and self-adhering sheet underlayment through one source from a single asphalt shingle manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide aspha lt shingle and related roofing materials with the fire- test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL or another testing and insp ecting agency acceptable to author ities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's sta ndard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials within specified warranty period. 1. Material Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with first 5 years nonprorated, or manufacturer’s standard warranty, whichever is greater.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF DECK INSULATION A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Atlas Roofing Corporation. 1. Product: ACFoam® CrossVent® 2. Description: Closed-cell polyiso insulation board with 1.0", 1.5" or 2.0" vent spacer strips separating 7/16 in. APA/TECO rated OSB from the polyiso foam insulation. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORC ED ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing. Color selections by Architect, as selected from manufacturer’s full range. 1. Basis of Design Products: a. Steep Slope Roofing: CertainTeed Corporation; Independence. b. Color: Match Lion Square Lodge North Building. c. Alternate: Owens Corning Co.; Oakridge Pro with 30-year warranty. d. Low Slope Roofing: Certainteed, Laminated Shingles, Landmark Series, 30 year, with low slope underlayment WinterGuar d HT (or approved equal, WR Grace Ice and Water Shield). B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Granular Surfaced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 55-mil- (1.4-mm-) thick sheet; glass-fiber-mat-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt; mineral-granule surfaced; with release paper backing; cold applied. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40-mil- (1.0- mm- ) thick, slip-resisting, polyethyl ene-film-reinforced top surface lami nated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. 2.4 RIDGE VENTS A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UV- stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips and with external deflector baffles; for use under ridge shingles. 1. Basis of Design Product: Cor-A-Vent X-5 Xtreme Ridge Ventilation System, or approved substitute. 2. Available Products: a. Air Vent Inc., a CertainTeed Company; ShingleVent II. b. Cor-A-Vent, Inc.; V-Series. c. GAF Materials Corporation; Cobra Rigid Vent II. d. Globe Building Materials, Inc.; SmartAir Ridge Vent.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado e. Lomanco, Inc.; OR-4. f. Mid-America Building Products; RidgeMaster Plus. g. Obdyke, Benjamin Incorporated; Xtractor Vent X18. h. Owens Corning; VentSure Ridge Vent. i. Ridglass Manufacturing Company, Inc.; Coolvent. j. Solar Group, Inc. (The), a Gibraltar Company; PRV4. k. Trimline Building Products; Trimline Ridge Vent. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Eave Ventilation: 1. Basis of Design Product: Cor-A-Vent S-400 strip vent. B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. C. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) diameter, barbed shank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) through OSB or plywood sheathing. 1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. 2.6 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Sheet Metal: Anodized aluminum, Kynar dark bronze finish. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adh ering sheet underlayment, wr inkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 3.2 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." 3.3 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION A. Install asphalt shingles according to manuf acturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," an d asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consis ting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs removed at least 7 inches (175 mm) wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge. 1. Extend asphalt shingles 3/4 inch (19 mm) over fascia at eaves and rakes. C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure. D. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a mini mum of six roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Closed-Cut Valleys: Extend asphalt shingle strips from one side of valley 12 inches (300 mm) beyond center of valley. Use one-piece shingle strips without joints in the valley. Fasten with extra nail in upper end of shingle. Install asphalt shingle courses from other side of valley and cut back to a straight line 2 inches (50 mm) short of valley center line. Trim upper concealed corners of cut-back shingle strips. 1. Do not nail asphalt shingles within 6 inches (150 mm) of valley center. 2. Set trimmed, concealed-corner asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide bed of asphalt roofing cement. F. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. G. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. 3.4 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Asphalt Shingles: Match asphalt roofing at North building; CertainTeed Corporation, Independence. Color by Architect. END OF SECTION 07311
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONO MER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 1 SECTION 07531 - ETHYLEN E-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fully adhered EPDM membrane over decking. 2. Vapor retarder. 3. Roof insulation. B. Locations: 1. Flat roofs. 2. Roof decks. 3. Balconies. C. Refer to Section 07650 Pedestal Paver System for roof deck systems applied over EPDM system specified in this section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide installed roofing me mbrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each ty pe of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONO MER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 2 3. Insulation fastening patterns. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam. 2. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of roof insulation. 3. 12-inch (300-mm) length of metal termination bars. 4. 12-inch (300-mm) length of battens. D. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufact urer to install roofing system. E. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For comp onents of membrane roofing system. H. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. J. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as do cumented according to ASTM E 548. D. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as roofing membrane. E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency representative; roofing Installer; roofing system manufacturer's representativ e; deck Installer; and
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONO MER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 3 installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roof ing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and ve rify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities need ed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requ irements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair pr ocedures after roofing installation. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged cont ainers in a clean, dry, pr otected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipm ent in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONO MER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 4 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to comp liance with requirements, provid e products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE A. EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type I, non-reinforced flexible sheet made from EPDM, and as follows: 1. Products: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated b. Firestone c. Versico. d. WeatherBond 2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal, or better 3. Reinforcement: reinfor ced if available. 4. Exposed Face Color: Archit ect select Black or Grey. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: 45-mil (1.5-mm) thick EPDM, partially cured or cu red, according to application. C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. D. Seaming Material: Single-component butyl splici ng adhesive and splice cl eaner, combined with Manufacturer's standard synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch (75-mm) wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. E. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-comp onent sealant, color to match roofing membrane. F. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant. G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors. H. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum -zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch (25 mm) wide by 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick, prepunched. I. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic pl ates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substr ate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONO MER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 5 J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealer s, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 2.4 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's st andard sizes and of thicknesses indicated. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. Minimum thickness 1 ½”. C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48), unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recomm ended by insulation manufact urer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. B. Cover Board: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, oriented strand board, 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick. C. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. 2.6 WALKWAYS A. Walkpad: Factory-formed , nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resis ting, surface-textured walkway pads, approximately 100 mil thick, of materials acceptabl e to roofing system manu facturer. Color: Grey. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Inst aller present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions aff ecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 5 Section "Steel Deck." 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatis factory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONO MER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 6 A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and othe r substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's writte n instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-dra in plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashings and prov ide temporary seals to pr event water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. D. Install acoustical roof deck rib insulation strips, specified in Division 5 Section "Steel Deck," according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor re tarder in a single layer over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and 6 inches (1 50 mm), respectively. 1. Seal laps with tape or with roofing membrane manufacturer's standard adhesive. B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations. 3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches (50 mm) or great er, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previo us layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so co mpleted surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. F. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 ga l./100 sq. ft. (0.3 L/sq. m) and allow primer to dry. 2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature. 3. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. G. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between board s. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations. 2. Minimum thickness: 1 ½”, installed in two layers with staggered joints.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONO MER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 7 H. Install slip sheet over insulation and immediately beneath sheet. 3.5 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to me mbrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. B. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane. D. Mechanically or adhesively fast en roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. E. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of sp lice areas, apply splicing cemen t, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofi ng membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. F. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofi ng membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements. 3.6 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessori es and adhere to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of flashing sheet at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing as recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and firmly roll flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. F. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechani cally anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.7 COATING INSTALLATION A. Apply coatings to roofing membrane or base flashings according to manufacturer's written recommendations, by spray, roller, or other suitable application method.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONO MER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 8 3.8 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Walkways: Install walkway pads in locations indicated . Heat weld or adhere walkway pads to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work w ith specified requirements. C. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, according to manufacturer's written instructions, and repair seam sample areas. D. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of the date and time of inspection. 3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect sheet membrane roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, reinstall roofing, and repair sheet flashings to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. END OF SECTION 07531
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing. 2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work. C. Samples: For each exposed produ ct and for each finish specified. D. Maintenance data. E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's st andard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 2. Color: Dark bronze, to match sheet metal roofing. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sh eet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. 4. Color: Dark bronze, to match sheet metal roofing. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-m odified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C). 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C). B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory- applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gu tter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Alum inum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Alum inum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 15 3M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent soli ds, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 REGLETS A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible wi th flashing indicated with factory-mitered and - welded corners and junctions or with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet. 1. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick or Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick. 2. Finish: Mill, where not exposed to view. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate ite ms at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Obtain field measurements for acc urate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3. Conceal fasteners and expansi on provisions where possible. Expo sed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpan sion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. G. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. 2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof-Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, joint cover plates. B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceed ing 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, secti ons, under copings, at shelf angles , and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to ex tend 6 inches (150 mm) beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit s ubstrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (3 00 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimil ar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with b ituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expans ion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws. E. Seal joints as shown and as re quired for watertight construction. F. Soldered Joints: Not allowed. G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength. 3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and solder ed joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eav e or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets or straps spaced not more than 36 inches (900 mm) apar t. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet (15.24 m) apart. Install expansion-joint caps. C. Built-in Gutters: Join sections with riveted and solder ed or lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. 1. Install felt underlayment layer in built-in gutter trough and extend to drip edge at eaves and under felt underlayment on roof sheathing. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with roofing nails. Install slip sheet over felt underlayment.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet (15.24 m) apart. Install expansion-joint caps. D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between. E. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs. Set in adhesive material compatible with the roofing. F. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flan ges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. G. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch (25 mm) below scupper or gutter discharge. H. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch (75-mm) centers. C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outwar d forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counte rflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receive rs and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with sealant. F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies” and “Stone Masonry." C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete” and Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies”. D. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metallic-coated steel surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3.9 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Rake and eave paint color: dark brow n, match C2 Paint, C2-354 A, Beaucoup. END OF SECTION 07620
SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM 07720-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 07720 – SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Deck-mount snow fences. B. Roof ladders & platforms. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be installed, including model number, material, color, finish and installation instructions. C. Verification Samples: Two representative samples of each type of product to be installed. D. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer's engineered layout chart based on roof material, code ground snow load, roof slope and sheathing thickness. E. Manufacturer's Certification: Manufacturer's standard warranty stating in writing that systems and layout have been engineered for project conditions and location and are suitable for use. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Convene a pre-installation conference prior to commencement of field operations to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. Agenda for meeting shall include review of layout and installation details. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide Installer's two-year warranty on workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: TRA-MAGE Roof A ccessory Systems, which is located at: 1657 S. 580 East P. O. Box 682 ; American Fork, UT 84003; Toll Free Tel: 800-606-8980; Tel: 801-756- 8666; Fax: 801-756-7891; Email: info@tra-mage.com; Web: www.tra-mage.com
SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM 07720-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provis ions of Section 01600. 2.2 SNOW FENCES A. Mountin g: 1. Deck Mount, Two Pipes; Model: D-2HL. 2. Deck Mount, Three Pipes; Model: D-3H. 3. Deck Mount, Four Pipes; Model: D-4H. B. Components: 1. Pipe: 1-inch (25 mm) diameter, 10-foot (3050 mm) sections, each section includes one union. 2. Mounting Bracket: 1/4 inch (6 mm) plate. 3. Mounting Bracket: 3/16 inch (10mm) plate. 4. Material: Zinc plated steel 5. Material: Flouropolymer-coated steel. C. Base Size: 1. Base Size: Standard. 2. Base Size: Extended. D. Finish: 1. Finish: Kynar (Two-Coat Fluoropolymer) Paint. 2. Color: Dark Bronze, Architect confirm through submittal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until roofing work is complete in the area in which products will be installed. B. If roof-covering materials are the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Snow Fences: Install one row of snow fences at th e eave over the plate line. Secure to the rafters. Space supports every 2 feet (610 mm) or per manufacturer's recommendations. Add additional rows according to manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Brackets for rafter-mounted snow fence shall be installed prior to roof sheathing. 3.3 ROOF ACCESS EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Roof Davits: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07720
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPSYSTEMS 07841-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 07841 – THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes firestopping for the following: 1. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated floor and roof construction including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items. 2. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated walls and partitions including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items. 3. Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing compartmentalized areas involving both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. 4. Sealant joints in fire-resistance-rated construction. 1.02 SYSTEM PERFOR MANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, according to requirements indicated, and th e passage of smoke and other gases. B. F-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire- resistance rating of the constructions penetrated. C. T-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where indicated and where systems protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. T-rated assemblies are required where the following conditions exist: 1. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities. 2. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 3. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction containing doors required to have a temperature-rise rating. 4. Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4 inch (100 mm) diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. (100 sq. cm) in overall cross-sectional area. D. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per UL-2079, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs. E. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces ex ceeding 4 inches (100 mm) or more in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting the floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means. 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. F. For firestopping exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread values of less than 25 and smoke- developed values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPSYSTEMS 07841-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of product specified. 1. Manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheet (MSD S) for each type of material to be installed. 2. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC s) and are nontoxic to building occupants. B. Schedule: 1. Indicate type of materials, installation methods, and relationships to adjoining construction for each through-penetration firestop system, and each kind of construction co ndition penetrated and kind of penetrating item. 2. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance with requiremen ts for each condition. 3. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop configura tion for construction and penetrating items. C. Samples for Selection and Verificat ion of Color: Architect reserves the right to require sealant color samples for exposed areas. D. Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firest opping that complies with the following requirements and those specified under the "System Performance Requirements" article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency performing testing and follow- up inspection services for firest op systems that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Through-penetration firestop syst ems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 under conditions where pos itive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01 inch of water (2.5 Pa) is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch (20 mm) below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: 3. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 4. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through- penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory," by Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency. 5. Fire-resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire-response characteristics per UL-2079 under conditions where the positive furn ace pressure differential is at least 0.01 inch of water (2.5 Pa), as measured 0.78 inch (20 mm) from the face exposed to furnace fire. Provide systems complying with the following requirements: 6. Fire-Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPSYSTEMS 07841-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 7. Joint sealants, including backing materials, bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency. B. Information on Drawings referring to specific design designations of through-penetration firestop systems is intended to establish requirements for pe rformance based on conditions that are expected to exist during installation. Any changes in conditions and designated systems require the Architect's prior approval. Submit documentation showing that the performance of proposed substitutions equals or exceeds that of the systems they would replace and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Single-Installer Qualifications: Engage a single experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. D. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." E. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." G. Owner will employ and pay a qualified inspection agency to check installed firestopping systems for compliance with requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualifie d testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Notify Owner's inspection agency at least 1 week in advance of firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. B. Do not cover up those firestopping installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspection agency and authorities having jurisdiction, if requir ed, have examined each installation.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPSYSTEMS 07841-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide firestoppi ng composed of components that ar e compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fi restopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestoppin g system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. A ccessories include but are no t limited to the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following: a. Semirefractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation. b. Ceramic fiber. c. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. d. Fire-rated formboard. e. Joint fillers for joint sealants. f. Temporary forming materials. g. Substrate primers. h. Collars. i. Steel sleeves. C. Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section that comply with system performance and other requirements. 2.02 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUG H-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating: Ceramic fibers in bulk form formulated for use with mastic coating, and ceramic fiber manufacturer's mastic coating. B. Endothermic, Latex Compound Sealant: Single-component, endothermic, latex formulation. C. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex formulation. D. Intumescent Putty: Nonhardening, dielectric, wate r-resistant putty containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one side. F. Job-Mixed Vinyl Compound: Prepackaged vinyl-based powder product for mixing with water at Project site to produce a paintable compound, passing ASTM E 136, with flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of zero per ASTM E 84. G. Mortar: Prepackaged dry mix composed of a blend of inorganic binders, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogenous mortar. H. Pillows/Bags: Re-usable, heat-expanding pillows/bags composed of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPSYSTEMS 07841-5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado I. Silicone Foam: Two-component, silicone-based liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands and cures in place to produce a flex ible, nonshrinking foam. J. Silicone Sealant: Moisture-curing, single-com ponent, s ilicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealant of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation fo r openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in verti cal and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/ gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions. K. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumes cent Sealant: Solvent-release-curing, single-component, synthetic- polymer-based sealant of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation fo r openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/ gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 2.03 FIRE-RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses, and requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire-resistive joint sealants. B. Single-Component, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. C. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. D. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. 2.04 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping manufacturer's directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required ), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce firestopping products of uniform quality with opti mum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPSYSTEMS 07841-6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints im mediately prior to installi ng firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. 2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. B. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fire stopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.03 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and the through- penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming material s and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible fo rming materials and other accessori es not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firest op systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming ma terials, accessories, and penetrating items. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.04 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requi rements" article in Part 1, with ASTM C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required. C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling reces ses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPSYSTEMS 07841-7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealan t application and prior to the time skinning or curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce fire-resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting agency employed and paid by Owner will examine completed firestopping to determine, in general, if it is being installed in compliance with requirements. B. Inspecting agency will report observations promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. C. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until reports of examinations are issued. D. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with requirements. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adj acent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur. B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07841
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 07842 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following: 1. Floor-to-floor joints. 2. Floor-to-wall joints. 3. Head-of-wall joints. 4. Wall-to-wall joints. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For joints in the following constructions , provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rati ng of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed: 1. Fire-resistance-rated load-bearing walls, includ ing partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings. 2. Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings. 3. Fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies. 4. Exterior curtain-wall assemblies and fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies. B. Fire Resistance of Joint Systems: Assembly ratings and movement capabilities indicated, but with assembly ratings not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions in which joints are located, as determined by UL 2079. 1. Load-bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time test. C. Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire-Containment Syst ems: Integrity and insulation ratings indicated as determined by UBC Standard 26-9 and UL 2079. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint syst em, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are installed and relationships to adjoining cons truction. Include fire-resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items. C. Product Certificates: For each type of fire-r esistive joint system, signed by product manufacturer. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From fire-resistive joint system manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with fill materials. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. F. Evaluation Reports: Evidence of fire-resistive join t systems' compliance with ICBO ES AC30, from the ICBO Evaluation Service. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fire-resistive joint system. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint sy stems for each kind of join t and construction condition indicated through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to fire-resistive joint system manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of material s that will contact or affect fill materials. 1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of fill materials to joint substrates. a. Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during installation. 2. Submit no fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, forming materials, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-r esistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per ICBO ES AC30 and are qualified for types of joints and joint movement capabilities indicated in a current Evaluation Report by the ICBO Evaluation Service. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classifi cation marking applicable to Project and with intact
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicom ponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resi stive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, co ndensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint system s are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems. C. Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and build ing inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requir ements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Basis-of-Design Products: Th e design for each fire-resistive jo int system is based on products named in Part 2 articles. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named products or comparable products by one of the following: a. Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 1) DAP Inc. 2) Firestop Systems Inc. 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) 3M Fire Protection Products. 5) United States Gypsum Company. b. Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: 1) Specified Technologies Inc. 2) United States Gypsum Company.
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrat ed by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and othe r conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates forei gn materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, soun d surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migra tion onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill ma terials of fire-resistive jo int system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on co mpletion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to co mply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/packing/backing ma terials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07842
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following ap plications, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in the fo llowing vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints between metal panels. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. e. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces. f. Other joints as indicated. 2. Exterior joints in the following horizo ntal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Joints in stone paving units, including steps. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Other joints as indicated. 3. Interior joints in the fo llowing vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints on expose d interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfa ces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. d. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. e. Other joints as indicated. 4. Interior joints in the follo wing horizontal traffic surfaces: f. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. g. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring. h. Control and expansion joints in brick flooring. i. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. j. Other joints as indicated. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide exterior elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications th at establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each jo int-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the standard range of colors availabl e for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants in 1/2- inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Application shall be done by a Joint Sealant Subcontractor with five years experience. Submit documentati on to the Architect and Owner B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Manufacturer Technical Assistance: Materials shall be supplied by manufacturer who will provide qualified technical assistance at the Project site. D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. 1. Testing Agency Qualificati ons: An independent testing ag ency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for complian ce with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods. 3. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with insta llation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with in stallation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion ar e removed from joint substrates. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Submit 2 copies of written 2-year special warranty agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which fail to perform as airtight and watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration re sistance, or general durability; or appear in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manuf acturer’s data as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. B. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, si gned by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warr anty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric jo int sealants to repair or repl ace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Tremco Manufacturing. 2. Dow Corning. 3. General Electric. 4. Pecora Corporation. 5. Maneco International. 6. Sika Corporation. 7. Sonneborn Building Products. 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on tes ting and field experience. 2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with AS TM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastome ric sealants are specified in the Elastomeric Joint- Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. D. Interior Silicone Rubber Sealant: 1. Silicone rubber-base, one-part elastomeric sealant, complying ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS. 2. Use acid-type for non-porous joint surfaces, a nd non-acid type where one or both joint surfaces are porous. 3. For wet areas use type compounded specifically for mildew resistance. 4. Use for interior joints between equipment or countertops and walls. E. Two-Component Polyurethane Sealant: 1. Polyurethane-based, 2-part elastomeric sealant, complying with ASTM C920 Type M, Class 25, Grade NS (non-sag), Tremco “Dym eric”, Pecora “Dynatrol II.” 2. Optional Sealant: Contractor may, as an option, provide 1-component silicone sealant, “Silpruf” by General Electric or #790 by Dow-Corning in lieu of above. 3. For exterior and interior sidewalk and floor joints, polyurethane as above except Grade P (self- leveling), Tremco “Dymeric”, Pecora “Urexpan NR-200.” F. Exterior Sealant: 1. Two-Component Polyurethane: Polyurethane-based, 2-part elastomeric sealant, complying with ASTM C920 Type M, Class 25, Grade NS (non-sag ), Tremco “Dymeric”, Pecora “Dynatrol II.” 2. One-Component Silicone: a. Precast Concrete Surfaces: #790 by Dow-Corning b. Stone and Glass Surfaces: #795 by Dow-Corning 3. For exterior and interior sidewalk and floor joints, polyurethane as above except Grade P (self- leveling), Tremco “Dymeric”, Pecora “Urexpan NR-200.” 2.04 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product. B. One-component Acrylic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion sealant, one-part, mildew resistant and paintable, complying with ASTM C834, recommended by manufacturer for general use as an exposed building construction sealant, Pecora AC-20. 2.05 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints : For each product of this description indicated in the Acoustical Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by te sting representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce tran smission of airborne sound. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Ex posed and Concealed Joints: a) PL Acoustical Sealant; Ch emRex, Inc.; Contech Brands. b) AC-20 FTR Acoustical and In sulation Sealant; Pecora Corp. c) SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a) BA-98; Pecora Corp. b) Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc. 2.06 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS A. Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: For each produ ct of this description in dicated in the Preformed Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured low-modulus silicone extrusio n, in sizes to fit joint widths i ndicated, combined with a neutral- curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. B. Preformed Foam Sealants: For eac h product of this description indicated in the Preformed Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, impregnated, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from high-density urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent; factory produced in precompressed sizes and in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated and to develop a watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified by manufacturer; and complying with the following: 1. Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, and compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealants. 2. Impregnating Agent: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Density: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Backing: Pressure-sensitive adhesive, factory applied to one side with protective wrapping. 2.07 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fille rs; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. 2. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin. 3. Type: Any material indicated above.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materi als or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant fa ilure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant ma nufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates. B. Cleaners for Nonporou s Surfaces: Chemical cleaners accepta ble to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent n onporous surfaces in any way, and formul ated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint seal ants, with Installer pres ent, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after un satisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before in stalling joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (e xcept for permanent, protective co atings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint su bstrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these meth ods to produce a clean, sound su bstrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical clean ers or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of in terfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates wher e recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufactur er's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migra tion onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer 's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicab le to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of inst alled sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly co ntact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and de pths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. H. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Apply a bead of silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed silicone-sealant system manufact urer's printed schedule and covering a bonded area of not less than a 3/8 inch (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead inside of masking tape by 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to ap ply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. 4. Complete installation of horizontal joints before installing vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At end of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife. I. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of s ealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, to produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires accelera tion to produce seal, apply heat to sealant to comply with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or s ealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction opera tions or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. END OF SECTION 07920
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND F R AMES 08110 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 08110 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART I – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Work under this section comprises of furnishing hollow metal doors and frames, including transom frames, sidelight and window frames with provision for glazed, pane led or louvered openings, fire labeled and non-labeled, as scheduled. 2. Provide hollow metal doors at non-public spaces and as indicated (refer to Door Schedule). B. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section. C. RELATED SECTIONS 1. 06200 – Finish Carpentry 2. 08210 – Flush Wood Doors 3. 08710 – Finish Hardware 4. 08810 – Glass and Glazing 5. 09900 – Painting 1.02 REFERENCES A. STANDARDS 1. NFPA-80-1995 – Fire Doors and Windows 2. ANSI/SDI-100-98 – Recommended Specificati ons for Standard Steel Doors an Frames 3. SDI-105-91 – Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames 4. SDI-107-78 – Hardware on Steel Doors (reinforcement application) 5. ANSI-A250.4-1994 – Steel Doors and Frames Physical Endurance 6. UL10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies B. CODES 1. NFPA-101-1994 – Life Safety Code 2. IBC 2003 – International Building Code 3. ANSI-A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities 4. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Submit copies of the hollow metal door and fram e shop drawings in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND F R AMES 08110 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. PRODUCT DATA 1. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door and frame types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. SHOP DRAWINGS 1. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and door openings as those on the contract documents. Shop drawings should include the following information: a. Material thickness and/or gauge. b. Door core material. c. Mortises and reinforcements. d. Anchorage types. e. Locations of exposed fasteners. f. Glazed, louvered and paneled openings. g. Mounting locations of standard hardware. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SUBSTITUTIONS 1. All substitution requests must be submitted within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 1, General Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his consultant. B. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS 1. Manufacturer shall be a member in good st anding of the Steel Door Institute (SDI.) C. FIRE RATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES 1. All labeled fire door assemblies to be of a type that have been classified and listed in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA80 and test in compliance with NFPA-252, UL-10B, and UBC-7-2. A physical label is to be affixed to the fire door at an authorized facility; em bossed labels are acceptable on standard 3 sided door frames. 2. For openings required to be fire rated exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit manufacturer’s certification that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. 3. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S-label requirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with hardware and other door manufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. a. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The supplier shall deliver all materials to the pr oject site; direct factory sh ipments are not allowed unless agreed upon beforehand. Supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND F R AMES 08110 - 3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Deliver doors cardboard wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and jobsite storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to any factory-finished doors. Mark all doors and frames with opening numbers as shown on the contract documents and shop drawings. C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage . Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptab le to the architect. Otherwise, remove and replace damaged goods as directed. D. Store doors and frames at the bu ilding site in a dry and secure place. 1. Place units on minimum 4” high wood blocking. 2. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. 3. If cardboard wrapper on door become s wet, remove carton immediately. 4. Provide ¼” spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. 1.06 WARRANTY A. All doors and frames shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year commencin g on the date of final completion and acceptance. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to comp liance with requirements, available ma nufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Firedoor Corporation. 7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 8. Habersham Metal Products Company. 9. Kewanee Corporation (The). 10. Mesker Door Inc. 11. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 12. Security Metal Products Corp. 13. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 14. Windsor Republic Doors. 2.02 MATERIALS A. All doors and frames shall be manufactured of commercial quality cold rolled steel per ASTM-A366 and A568 general requirements or galvanized to A60 or G60 minimum coating weight standard per ASTM- A924. Internal reinforcing may be manufactured of hot rolled pickled and oiled steel per ASTM-A569. B. Supports and anchors shall be fabricated of not le ss that 18-gauge sheet steel, galvanized where galvanized frames are used. C. Frames to be 16 gauge. Doors to be 16 gauge f aces for exterior doors and 18 gauge for interior doors. All leafs to be 3'-0" x 7'-0" unless otherwise noted.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND F R AMES 08110 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado D. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, inse rts, bolts and fasteners shall be hot dipped galvanized in compliance with ASTM-A153, Class C or D as applicable. E. Doors and frames shall be shop primed for field painting. Rust inhibitive enamel or paint primer shall be used, baked on, and suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1, “Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces on Steel Doors and Frames.” F. All exterior hollow metal doors shall be insulated: 0.30 U factor G. Provide all hollow metal doors and frames recei ving electrified hardware with ElectroLynx wiring harness and concealed plug connectors on one end to accommodate up to twelve wires. Coordinate ElectroLynx connectors on end of the wiring harness to plug directly into the electrified hardware and the electric hinge. 2.03 DOORS A. Provide 1 3/4” thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI-100 grades and models specified below, or as indicated on drawings or schedules: 1. Interior Doors: Level 2, Model 2 – Seamless a. Interior doors shall be minimum 18-gauge steel with both lock and hinge rail edge of door intermittently welded, filled and ground smooth the full height of door. 1) Ceco: Regent-18-SEM 2) Curries: 707N-18 2. Exterior Doors: Level 3, Model 2 – Seamless a. Exterior doors shall be minimum 16-gauge steel with both lock and hinge rail edge of door intermittently welded, filled and ground smooth the full height of door. Exterior doors shall be insulated with a solid slab of expanded polystyrene or polyurethane foam permanently bonded to the inside of each face skin. The to p of all doors shall be closed flush by the addition of a 16- gauge screwed-in top cap to prevent water infiltration. 1) Ceco: Legion-16-SEM 2) Curries: 707N-16 B. All doors shall be beveled 1/8” in 2” and shall have top and bottom channels of not less than 16-gauge, flush or inverted, welded to the face sheets. Doors shall have a full height 14-gauge hinge rail reinforcement channel, or in dividual 10 gauge hinge reinforcements. C. All doors to conform to ANSI-A250.4-1996 Level “A” criteria and shall be tested to 1,000,000 operating cycles and 23 twist tests. Certification of Level “A” doors is to be submitted with approval drawings by supplier upon request. Do no bid or supply any type or gauge of door not having been tested and passed these criteria. 2.04 FRAMES A. Provide hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on the drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interior Frames: Level 2, 16-gauge 2. Exterior Frames: Level 2, 16-gauge
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND F R AMES 08110 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado a. Ceco: SF Series b. Curries: M Series B. Fabricate frames with mitered and faces only welded corners, re-prime at the we lded areas. All welds to be flush with neatly mitered or butted material cuts. C. All frames shall have minimum 7 gauge hinge reinforcements, 14-gauge lock strike reinforcing, and 12- gauge closer reinforcing. D. Provide temporary shipping bars to be removed before setting frames. E. Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive three (3) silencers on stri ke jambs of single frames and two (2) silencers on heads of double frames. F. Provide minimum 0.0179” thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufactur er's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements. 1. Clearances shall be no more than 1/8” at jambs and heads except between non fire rated pairs of doors which may be no more than 1/4.” Not more than 3/4” at the bottom of the doors. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, incl uding stiles and rails of non-flush units, from only cold- rolled steel sheet. C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide exposed fasteners with countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. F. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI-107 and ANSI-A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. G. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. Provide internal reinforcements for all doors to receive door closers and exit devices. H. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Arch itectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." I. Provide glazing stops with minimum 0.0359-inch- thick steel or 0.040-inch- thick aluminum. J. Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. K. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass and other panels in doors
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND F R AMES 08110 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install steel doors, frames, and accessories accord ing to shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Comply with provisions of SDI-105, “Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Door Frames,” unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in pos ition, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly construction, place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. 3. At existing concrete or masonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 4. In metal-stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In steel-stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 5. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, with in clearances specified in ANSI/SDI 100. Install fire rated doors with clearances specified in NFPA 80. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer B. Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 08110
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 08212 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes stile and rail exterior and interior wood doors and sidelites. B. See Division 6 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames. C. See Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass vision panels in stile and rail wood doors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and other pertinent data. C. Samples: For each species and finish required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard for Doors of Stock Design and Construction: Comply with WDMA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors." B. Quality Standard for Doors of Special Design and Construction: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards." C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors that are listed a nd labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to comp liance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.2 MATERIALS A. Assemble exterior doors and sidelites, in cluding components, with wet-use adhesives. B. Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea-formaldehyde resins. 2.3 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF STOCK DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Artistic Doors and Windows, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 3. International Door and Latch. 4. JELD-WEN, Inc. 5. Maywood, Inc. 6. McPhillips Manufacturing. 7. QSM Doors, Inc. 8. Simpson Door Company. B. Exterior Doors and Sidelites: 1. Grade for Transparent Finish: Premium or Select, solid core doors. 2. Wood Species: Premium Cedar a. Alternate: Premium Douglas Fir.. 3. Finish: Stained and sealed per Section 09900 Painting. 4. Glass for Openings: Uncoated, clear, insulating-glass units made from 2 lites of 3.0-mm-thick, fully tempered glass with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) interspace. C. Interior Doors: 1. Grade for Transparent Finish: Premium or Select, solid core doors. 2. Wood Species for Transparent Finish: Premium Oak, to match existing oak unit entry doors to remain.. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting. B. Factory machine doors for hardwa re that is not surface applied. C. Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated, complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing." D. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to matc h adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction. E. Exterior Doors: Factory treat ex terior doors after fabrication with water-repellent preservative to comply with WDMA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.5 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop apply stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish specified in Division 9 Sec tion "Painting" to faces and edges of doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in correspondin g fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. B. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frame s with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of lim its set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3 .2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 -1/2 degrees) on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. END OF SECTION 08212
ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD DOO R S 08213-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 08213 - ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes preassembled aluminum-cla d wood frame door units, glazing and accessories. B.Architect to select from manufacturer’s full line of: 1. Wood species and finish. 2. Insect screen composition and type. 3. Hardware selections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sh eets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. B. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, mi nimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for: 1. Wood Members: 10 years. 2. Aluminum Cladding Structural Performance: Lifetime. 3. Exterior Aluminum Finish: 20 years. 4. Insulating Glass: 20 years. 5. Other Components: 10 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Custom fabrications as indicated on drawings. B. Basis of Design Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1.Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows: a. Marvin Windows and Doors. b.Jeld-Wen, Inc. 2.2 DOORS - GENERAL A. Doors: Complying with AAM A/NWWDA 101/I.S. 2; factory assembled and glazed, complete with
ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD DOO R S 08213-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado weatherstripping, operating hard ware and specified accessories. 1. Total Jamb Depth: As indicated on Drawings; provide factory installed jamb extensions. 2. NFRC certified thermal performance. 2.3 ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD DOORS A. Inswinging Doors: 1. Style: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Single Standard Doors: Rating HGD-LC45, maximum size 36 by 96 inches (915 by 2438 mm), standard door. 3. Jamb Depth: As indicated on the Drawings. 4. Top Rail Height: 5-3/8 inches (136 mm). 5. Stile Width: 5-3/8 inches (136 mm). 6. Bottom Rail Height: 12 inches (305 mm). 7. Provide hinged screen; screen frame finish to match cladding; spring latch and door closer. B. Outswinging Doors: 1. Style: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Single Standard Doors: Rating HGD-LC60, maximum size 36 by 95 inches (915 by 2413 mm), with high performance sill. 3. Jamb Depth: As indicated on the Drawings. 4. Top Rail Height: 5-3/8 inches (136 mm). 5. Stile Width: 5-3/8 inches (136 mm). 6. Bottom Rail Height: 12 inches (305 mm). C. Wood Frame and Sash Members: Select kiln dried wood, water and insect repellent and preservative treated in accordance with WDMA I.S.4; wood members not fastened or adhered to cladding. 1. Wood Species: As selected by Architect. 2. Doors: Frames finger jointed, sash veneer-wrapped. 3. Frame Corners: Block mitered, stapled, and sealed with silicone. 4. Sash Corners: Mortised and tenoned, glued, m echanically fastened, and sealed with silicone. 5. Interior Finish: Factory applied stain with cl ear polyurethane top coat; color as selected from manufacturer's full line. D. Cladding: 0.055 inch thick aluminum extrusions on both frame and sash, one piece in any one length; with mitered corners mechanically fastened with corner locks and st ainless steel screws; sash cladding applied by sliding onto wood members, not fastened or adhered to wood. 1. Finish: Factory-applied Thermoset Kynar finish complying with AAMA 2605. 2. Frame Color: As selected from ma nufacturer’s full line of standard colors. 3. Sash Color: Selected fr om manufacturer's full line. 4. Provide matching exterior trim in profiles as indicated on the drawings. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Screens: To match the windows as indicated in Division 8 Section “Metal Clad Windows”. B. Glazing: Sealed insulating glass; glass of th ickness recommended by manufacturer for size and application; rated CBA in accordance with ASTM E 774. 1. Overall Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm), except 3/4 inch (19 mm) for doors, sidelights, transoms,
ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD DOO R S 08213-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado geometrics, and circle top windows. 2. Doors and Sidelights: Both lites fully tempered, complying with ASTM C 1036 quality Q3 and ASTM C 1048, Kind FT. 3. Tint: None. C. Hardware Finishes: 1. Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”. D. Swinging Door Hardware and Weatherstripping: 1. Inswing Door Sill: Sloped extruded aluminum with interior oak threshold; with internal drainage to exterior, top plate removable for cleaning. 2. Inswing Door Sill: Low-rise saddle type, extruded aluminum with thermal break. 3. Outswing Door Sill: Bumper type, extruded aluminum with interior oak threshold; compression weatherstripping on bumper. 4. Outswing Door Sill: Low-rise saddle type, extruded aluminum with thermal break. 5. Sill Finish: Bronze anodized. 6. Weatherstripping: High performance compression weatherstripping on frame stop; six finger sweep weatherstripping on bottom of door. 7. Outswinging Doors: Provide extruded drip cap and flange. 8. Locks: Three-point concealed locking, all bolts operated by single mechanism; keyed deadbolt with interior turn knob placed above handle. a. Operation: Automatic locking upon closing door. b. Operation: Manual activation of locking mechanism. c. Provide U.S. standard key cylinders keyed alike. d. Provide U.S. standard key cylinders keyed differently. e. Allow for U.S. standard key cylinder to be furnished by others. 9. Handles: Provide handles and trim plates bo th sides; style selected from manufacturer's standard line. 10. Provide dummy trim on inactive leaves. 11. Hinges: a. Type: Commercial grade hinges. b. Type: Adjustable hinges, allowing vertical and horizontal adjustment. c. Provide 3 hinges on each leaf up to 96 inches (2440 mm) tall. d. Provide 4 hinges on each leaf 96 inches (2440 mm) or taller. 12. Hardware Finish: Coated finish selected from manufacturer's full line. E. Interior Trim and Casings: Pr ofiles as indicated on the drawings; same species as interior frame and sash; finger jointing is acceptable for opaque finishing. F. Structural Mullion Reinforcement: As indicated on the drawings or required to comply with local code requirements; provide drip ca p at horizontal zero mullions. G. Metal Trim Accessories: Type and configuration as required to make a complete, weatherproof installation; same finish as exterior frame. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION
ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD DOO R S 08213-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommende d by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. After installation adjust units for proper operation, without binding, sticking, or racking. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged pr oducts before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08213
ACCESS DOORS 08305-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the fo llowing types of access doors: 1. Wall access doors. 2. Fire-rated wall access doors. 3. Ceiling access doors. 4. Fire-rated ceiling access doors. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of access door assembly specified, including details of construction relative to materials, individual components, profiles, finishes, and fire-protection ratings (if required). 1. Include complete schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. B. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installa tion of customized access doors and frames, including details of each frame type, elevations of doo r design types, anchorage, and accessory items. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for the entire Project from one source and by a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per test method as indicated below, and are labeled and listed by UL, ITS (formerly Warnock Hersey), or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Test Method for Vertical Installations: ASTM E 152. 2. Test Method for Horizontal Installations: ASTM E 119. C. Size Variations: Obtain Archit ect's acceptance of manufacturer's st andard size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to complian ce with requirements, manufact urers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include the following: 1. Jensen Industries 2. J.L. Industries. 3. Milcor, Inc. 4. Bilco 5. Cesco Products 6. Larsen’s Manufacturing Co.
ACCESS DOORS 08305-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 commercial-quality, co ld-rolled steel sheet with baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. 2.03 ACCESS DOORS A. Non-Insulated, Flush Mount Fire-Rated Doors: Self-latching units consisting of frame, trim, door, and hardware, including automatic closer, interior latch release, and complying with the following requirements: 1. Frame: 16 gauge cold rolled steel. 2. Door & Trim: 16 gauge cold rolled steel. 3. Hinge: Continuous piano type hinge. 4. Latches: Self latching tool-key or ring operated latch (as selected by owner). 5. Fire-Protection Rating for Walls: 1-1/2 hours. B. Drywall Flange-Flush Doors: Units consisting of frame with drywall corner beads on all sides, door, hardware, and complying with the following requirements: 1. Frame: 16 gauge cold rolled steel. 2. Door & Trim: 16 gauge cold rolled steel with 28 gauge flange. 3. Hinge: Concealed pivot type. 4. Locks: Screwdriver-operated lock. 5. Finish: Baked on prime coat (commercial grey). 6. Packaging: Individually boxed. C. Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 inch for gypsum board infill. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with drywall bead for gypsum board surfaces. 4. Hinges: Concealed pivoting rod hinge. 5. Latch: Screwdriver-operated cam. 6. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Concealed Frame for Clean Dr ywall Finishes; Bauco plus Access Panel Solutions, Inc. b. Access Door Type RDW; Karp Inc. D. Sizes (unless otherwise noted within the construction documents): 1. 16”x16” - Hand Access 2. 30”x20” - Person Access 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation. B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fa steners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated.
ACCESS DOORS 08305-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Exposed Flange: Nominal 1 inch wide around perimeter of frame. 2. For gypsum board assemblies, furnish frames with edge trim for gypsum board in accordance with Drywall Flange-Flush Door s requirements within this section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. Furnish inserts an d anchoring devices for access doors that must be built into other construction. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's inst ructions for inst alling access doors. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach secure ly to supports with plan e of face panels aligned with adjacent finished surfaces. C. Install concealed-frame access doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces. D. Provide the owner with all related access door s and frames hardware, keys, maintenance manuals and warranties at time of substantial completion. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08305
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550- 1 SECTION 08550 – ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes aluminum-clad wood-framed windows. B. Architect to select from manufacturer’s full line of: 1. Wood species and finish. 2. Insect screen composition and type. 3. Hardware selections. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide wood windows capable of comply ing with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representa tive of those specified, and that are of test size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. B. Structural Performance: Prov ide wood windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less, at design pressure based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Lo ad Deflection Test or structural computations. C. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Provide glazed wi ndows capable of resisti ng impact from windborne debris, based on the pass/fail criteria as determined from testing glazed windows identical to those specified, according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of wood window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sec tions, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and installation details. C. Samples: For each exposed finish. D. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550- 2 E. Product test reports. F. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. D. Preinstallation Conference: C onduct conference at Project site. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Metal Finish: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Jeld-Wen, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine (paint grade) or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) d eep by 2 inches (51 mm) wide; water- repellent preservative treated.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550- 3 B. Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding, High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. 1. Color: Match existing (green). 2.3 WINDOW A. Window Type: As indicated in schedule. B. Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. 1. Performance Class and Grade: R20. C. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum indicated at 15-mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to NFRC 100. 1. U-Factor: 0.43 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.5 W/sq. m x K) or less. D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide wood windows with a whole-window SHGC maximum of 0.50, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. 2.4 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed wood window units. 2.5 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on inside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitere d or coped joints or corner extr usions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. 1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 (1.1-by-1.4-mm) or 18-by-16 (1.0-by-1.1-mm) mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration; in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. B. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weathe r stripping for each operable sash and ventilator.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550- 4 C. Factory machine windows for openings and for hardware that is not surface applied. D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. E. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. F. Avoid using exposed fasteners. If necessary for structural performance, such fasteners shall be zinc- coated or non-ferrous, countersunk and filled to match wood. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural su pport, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gask ets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. D. Separate aluminum and other co rrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. E. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. F. Clean exposed surfaces immediat ely after installing windows. A void damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. G. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after in stalling windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. H. Remove and replace glass that has been broken , chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. 3.9 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Windows and frame color: match existing windows with green color. B. Window wood trim color: a. In buff color stucco field and buff color vertical siding fiel d, match C2 Paint, C2-362 P, Kalahari; b. In red, match North building red stucco color. END OF SECTION 08550
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-1 SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: Finish Hardware for door openings, except as otherwise specified herein. 1. Door hardware for steel (hollow metal) doors. 2. Door hardware for aluminum doors. 3. Door hardware for wood doors. 4. Door hardware for other doors indicated. 5. Keyed cylinders as indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6: Rough Carpentry. 2. Division 8: Aluminum Doors and Frames 3. Division 8: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 4. Division 8: Wood Doors. 5. Division 26 Electrical 6. Division 28: Electronic Security C. References: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specific requirements, the most restrictive shall govern. 1. Builders Hardware Manufacturing Association (BHMA) 2. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 3. NFPA 80 -Fire Doors and Windows 4. ANSI-A156.xx- Various Performance Standards for Finish Hardware 5. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies 6. ANSI-A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 7. DHI /ANSI A115.IG – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware D. Intent of Hardware Groups 1. Should items of hardware not definitely specified be required for completion of the Work, furnish such items of type and quality comparable to adjacent hardware and appropriate for service required. 2. Where items of hardware aren’t definitely or corr ectly specified, are required for completion of the Work, a written statement of such omission, error, or other discrepancy to Architect, prior to date specified for receipt of bids for clarification by addendum; or, furnish such items in the type and quality established by this specification, and appropriate to the service intended. E. Allowances 1. Refer to Division 1 for allowance amount and procedures. F. Alternates 1. Refer to Division 1 for Alternates and procedures.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2 1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Comply with Division 1. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Comply with Division 1. B. Special Submittal Requirements: Combine submittals of this Section with Sections listed below to ensure the "design intent" of the system/assembly is understood and can be reviewed together. C. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical da ta including the following: 1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Wiring diagrams for each electri c product specified. Co ordinate voltage with electrical before submitting. 4. Submit 6 copies of catalog cuts with hardware schedule. 5. Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management for products listed in Materials Section 2.2 D. Shop Drawings - Hardware Schedule: Submit 6 complete reproducible copy of detailed hardware schedule in a vertical format. 1. List groups and suffixes in proper sequence. 2. Completely describe door and list architectural door number. 3. Manufacturer, product name, and catalog number. 4. Function, type, and style. 5. Size and finish of each item. 6. Mounting heights. 7. Explanation of abbreviations and symbols used within schedule. 8. Detailed wiring diagrams, specia lly developed for each opening, indicating all electric hardware, security equipment and access cont rol equipment, and door and frame rough-ins required for specific opening. E. Templates: Submit templates and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" to door and frame supplier and others as applicable to enable proper and accurate si zing and locations of cu touts and reinforcing. 1. Templates, wiring diagrams and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" of electrical terms to electrical for coordination and verification of voltages and locations. F. Samples: (If requested by the Architect) 1. 1 sample of Lever and Rose/Escutcheon design, (pair). 2. 3 samples of metal finishes G. Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with Division 1 including specific requirements indicated. 1. Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 3 sets containing the following. a. Complete information in care, maintenance, and adjustment, and data on repair and replacement parts, and informati on on preservation of finishes. b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Name, address, and phone number of lo cal representative for each manufacturer. d. Parts list for each product.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-3 2. Copy of final hardware schedule, edited to reflect, "As installed". 3. Copy of final keying schedule 4. As installed “Wiring Diagrams” for each piece of hardware connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts. 5. One set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Division 1. 1. Statement of qualification for distributor and installers. 2. Statement of compliance with regulatory requirements and single source responsibility. 3. Distributor's Qualifications: Firm with 3 year s experience in the distribution of commercial hardware. a. Distributor to employ full time Architectural Hardware Consultants (AHC) for the purpose of scheduling and coordinating hardware and establishing keying schedule. b. Hardware Schedule shall be prepared and signed by an AHC. 4. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with 3 years experi enced in installation of similar hardware to that required for this Project, includ ing specific requirements indicated. 5. Regulatory Label Requirements: Provide testing ag ency label or stamp on hardware for labeled openings. a. Provide UL listed hardware for labeled and 20 minute openings in conformance with requirements for class of opening scheduled. b. Underwriters Laboratories requirements have precedence over this specification where conflict exists. 6. Single Source Responsibility: Except where specified in hardware schedule, furnish products of only one manufacturer for each type of hardware. B. Review Project for extent of finish hardware requir ed to complete the Work. Where there is a conflict between these Specifications and the existing hard ware, notify the Architect in writing and furnish hardware in compliance with the Specification unle ss otherwise directed in writing by the Architect. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Comply with Division 1. 1. Deliver products in original unopened packagin g with legible manufacturer's identification. 2. Package hardware to prevent dama ge during transit and storage. 3. Mark hardware to correspond with "reviewed hardware schedule". 4. Deliver hardware to door and frame manufacturer upon request. B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security a nd similar requirements indicated, as necessary for the proper installation and function, regardless of omissi ons or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-4 B. Review Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adeq uate provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware. 1.7 WARRANTY: A. Refer to Conditions of the Contract B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: 1. Closers: Ten years 2. Exit Devices: Three Years 3. Locksets & Cylinders: Three years 4. All other Hardware: Two years. 1.8 OWNER’S INSTRUCTION: A. Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of hardware units. 1.9 MAINTENANCE: A. Extra Service Materials: Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products installed. Package products with protective covering and identif y with descriptive labels. Comply with Division 1 Closeout Submittals Section. 1. Special Tools: Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each differe nt or special hardware component. 2. Maintenance Tools: Provide main tenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. 3. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner’s requirements for delivery, storage and protection of extra service materials. B. Maintenance Service: Submit for Owner’s considera tion maintenance service agreement for electronic products installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. The following manufacturers are appr oved subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in accordance with Division 1. Item: Manufacturer: Approved: Hinges Stanley Bommer, McKinney Locksets Best Cylinders Best Card Reader Locks SafeLock Card Reader Exits Advantex SafeLock Exit Devices Precision Closers Stanley D-3550 Push/Pull Plates Trimco Hager, Rockwood Push/Pull Bars Trimco Hager, Rockwood Protection Plates Trimco Hager, Rockwood Overhead Stops ABH Rixson, Glynn Johnson Magnetic Holders ABH Door Stops Trimco Hager, Rockwood
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-5 Flush Bolts Trimco ABH, Rockwood Coordinator & Brackets Trimco ABH, Rockwood Threshold & Gasketing National Guard Reese, Pemko 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Hinges: Shall be Five Knuckle Ball bearing hinges 1. Template screw hole locations 2. Bearings are to be fully hardened. 3. Bearing shell is to be cons istent shape with barrel. 4. Minimum of 2 permanently lubricated non-detachable bearings on standard weight hinge and 4 permanently lubricated bearing on heavy weight hinges. 5. Equip with easily seated, non-rising pins. 6. Non Removable Pin screws shall be slotted stainless steel screws. 7. Hinges shall be full polished, front, back and barrel. 8. Hinge pin is to be fully plated. 9. Bearing assembly is to be installed after plating. 10. Sufficient size to allow 180-degree swing of door 11. Furnish five knuckles with flush ball bearings 12. Provide hinge type as listed in schedule. 13. Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7 foot 6 inch height. Add one for each additional 30 inches in height or fraction thereof. 14. Certified by BHMA for all applicable ANSI Standards for type, size, function and finish 15. UL10C listed for Fire B. Mortise Type Guest Locks: 1. Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1, UL10C. 2. Fit ANSI A115.1 door preparation 3. Functions and design as indicated in the hardware groups 4. Provide sufficient curved strike lip to protect door trim 5. Provide locksets with cylinders 6. Provide 5 Guest Cards per Lockset 7. Each lever to have independent spring mechanism controlling it 8. Card Readers on lockset as required for match of facility 9. Provide training and related equipment for complete installation C. Cylindrical Type Locks and Latchsets: 1. Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Operationa l Grade 1, Extra-Heavy Duty, and be UL10C listed. 2. Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management. 3. Fit modified ANSI A115.2 door preparation. 4. Locksets and cores to be of the same manufacturer to maintain complete lockset warranty 5. Locksets to have anti-rotational studs that are thru-bolted 6. Keyed lever shall not have exposed “keeper” hole 7. Each lever to have independent spring mechanism controlling it 8. 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) backset 9. 9/16 inch (14 mm) throw latchbolt 10. Outside lever sleeve to be seamless, of one-pi ece construction made of a hardened steel alloy 11. Keyed lever to be removable only after core is removed, by authorized control key 12. Provide locksets with 7-pin removable and interchangeable core cylinders 13. Hub, side plate, shrouded rose, locking pin to be a one-piece casting with a shrouded locking lug. 14. Locksets outside locked lever must withstand minimum 1400 inch pounds of torque. In excess of that, a replaceable part will shear. Key from outside and inside lever will still operate lockset.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-6 15. Core face must be the same finish as the lockset. 16. Functions and design as indicated in the hardware groups. D. Cylindrical Deadbolt: 1. Tested and approved by ANSI A156.5, Operational Grade 1, 2. Fit modified ANSI A115.3 door preparation 3. Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management. 4. Locksets and cores to be of the same manufacturer to maintain complete lockset warranty 5. 2-3/4 inch (70mm) backset, or 2 3/8 inch backset as needed 6. 1 inch throw deadbolt 7. Provide locksets with 7-pin core. E. Exit Devices shall: 1. Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI 156.3, Grade 1 2. Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management. 3. Furnish UL or recognized independent laboratory certified mechanical operational testing to 9 million cycles minimum. 4. Provide a deadlocking latchbolt 5. Non-fire rated exit devices shall have cylinder dogging. 6. Touchpad shall be “T” style 7. Exposed components shall be of architectural metals and finishes. 8. Lever design shall match lockset lever design 9. Provide strikes as required by application. 10. Fire exit devices to be listed for UL10C 11. UL listed for Accident Hazard 12. Shall consist of a cross bar or push pad, the actuating portion of which extends across, shall not be less than one half the width of the door leaf. 13. Aluminum vertical rod assemblies are acceptabl e only when provide with the manufacturers optional top and bottom stainless steel rod guard protectors. F. Cylinders: 1. Provide the necessary cylinder housings, collars, rings & springs as recommended by the manufacturer for proper installation. 2. Provide the proper cylinder cams or tail piece as required to operate all locksets and other keyed hardware items listed in the hardware sets. 3. Coordinate and provide as re quired for related sections. G. Door Closers shall: 1. Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI 156.4, Grade 1 2. UL10C certified 3. Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management. 4. Closer shall have extra-duty arms and knuckles 5. Conform to ANSI 117.1 6. Maximum 2 7/16 inch case projection with non-ferrous cover 7. Separate adjusting valves for closing and latching speed, and backcheck 8. Provide adapter plates, shim spacers and blad e stop spacers as required by frame and door conditions 9. Full rack and pinion type closer with 1½“ minimum bore 10. Mount closers on non-public side of door, unless otherwise noted in specification 11. Closers shall be non-handed, non-sized and multi-sized. H. Door Stops: Provide a dome floor or wall stop for every opening as listed in the hardware sets.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-7 1. Wall stop and floor stop shall be wrou ght bronze, brass or stainless steel. 2. Provide fastener suitable for wall construction. 3. Coordinate reinforcement of walls where wall stop is specified. 4. Provide dome stops where wall st ops are not practical. Provide sp acers or carpet riser for floor conditions encountered I. Over Head Stops: Provide a Surface mounted or conc ealed overhead when a floo r or wall stop cannot be used or when listed in the hardware set. 1. Concealed overhead stops shall be he avy duty bronze or stainless steel. 2. Surface overhead stops shall be heav y duty bronze or stainless steel. J. Push Plates: Provide with four beve led edges ANSI J301, .050 thickness, size as indicated in hardware set. Furnish oval-head countersunk screws to match finish. K. Pulls with plates: Provide with four beveled edges ANSI J301, .050 thickness Plate s with ANSI J401 Pull as listed in hardware set. Provide proper fasteners for door construction. L. Push Pull Bars: Provide ANSI J504, .1” Dia. Pull and pu sh bar model and series as listed in hardware set. Provide proper fasteners for door construction. M. Kickplates: Provide with four beveled edges ANSI J102, 10 inches high by width less 2 inches on single doors and 1 inch on pairs of doors. Furnish oval-head countersunk screws to match finish. N. Mop plates: Provide with four beveled edges ANSI J103, 4 inches high by width less 1 inch on single doors and 1 inch on pairs of doors. Furnish oval-head countersunk screws to match finish. O. Door Bolts: Flush bolts for wood or metal doors. 1. Provide a set of Automatic bolts, Certified AN SI/BHMA 156.3 Type 25 for hollow metal label doors. 2. Provide a set of Automatic bolts, Certified ANSI /BHMA 156.3 Type 27 at wood label doors. 3. Manual flush bolts, Certified ANSI/BHMA 156.16 at openings where allowed local authority. 4. Provide Dust Proof Strike, Certified ANSI/BHM A 156.16 at doors with flush bolts without thresholds. P. Coordinator and Brackets: Provide a surface mounted coordinator when automatic bolts are used in the hardware set. 1. Coordinator, Certified ANSI/BHMA A1156.3 Type 21A for full width of the opening. 2. Provide mounting brackets for soffit applied hardware. 3. Provide hardware preparation (cutouts) for latches as necessary. Q. Magnetic Door Holders: Provide magnetic door holder s with Tri-Voltage that can be wired 12VDC, 24V AC/DC or 120V AC 1. Wall magnetic door holders shall be Recessed, Surface or Flush mounted. 2. Armature shall be thru-bolted and can be provided with any projection required. 3. Models will be available in US28, sprayed finishes and US32D. 4 Floor mounted shall be provided for a single door or double door hold open application. R. Seals: All seals shall be finished to match adjacent frame color. Seals shall be furnished as listed in schedule. Material shall be UL listed for labeled openings.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-8 S. Weatherstripping: Provide at head and jambs only thos e units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable. Where bar-type weatherstrip is used with parallel arm mounted closers install weatherstrip first. 1. Weatherstrip shall be resilient seal of (Neopr ene, Polyurethane, Vinyl, Pile, Nylon Brush, Silicone) 2. UL10C Positive Pressure rated seal set when required. T. Door Bottoms/Sweeps: Surface mounted or concealed door bottom where listed in the hardware sets. 1. Door seal shall be resilient seal of (Neoprene, Polyurethane, Nylon Brush, Silicone) 2. UL10C Positive Pressure rated seal set when required. U. Thresholds: Thresholds shall be aluminum beveled type with maximum height of ½” for conformance with ADA requirements. Furnish as specified and pe r details. Provide fasteners and screws suitable for floor conditions. V. Silencers: Furnish silencers on all in terior frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs. Omit where any type of seals occur. 2.3 FINISH: A. Designations used in Schedule of Finish Hardware - 3.5, and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18 including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products B. Powder coat door closers to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted. C. Aluminum items shall be finished to match predominan t adjacent material. Seals to coordinate with frame color. 2.4 KEYS AND KEYING: A. Provide keyed brass construction cores and keys during the construction period. Construction control and operating keys and core shall not be part of the Owner's permanent keying system or furnished in the same keyway (or key section) as the Owner's pe rmanent keying system. Permanent cores and keys (prepared according to the accepted keying schedule) will be furnished to the Owner. B. Cylinders, removable and interchangeable core system: Best Patented Cormax 7-pin. C. Permanent keys and cores: Stamped with the applicab le key mark for identification. These visual key control marks or codes will not include the actual key cuts. Permanent keys will also be stamped "Do Not Duplicate." D. Transmit Grand Masterkeys, Masterkeys and other Security keys to Owner by Registered Mail, return receipt requested. E. Furnish keys in the following quantities: 1. 1 each Grand Masterkeys 2. 4 each Masterkeys 3. 2 each Change keys each keyed core 4. 15 each Construction masterkeys 5. 1 each Control keys
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-9 F. The Owner, or the Owner's agent, will install permanent cores and return the construction cores to the Hardware Supplier. Construction cores and keys re main the property of the Hardware Supplier. G. Keying Schedule: Arrange for a keying meeting, with Architect Owner and hardware supplier, and other involved parties to ensure locksets and locking hardware, are functionally correct and keying complies with project requirements. Furnish 3 typed copies of keying schedule to Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: Examine doors, frames, related items and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimen tal to proper and or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 HARDWARE LOCATIONS: A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the follo wing publications except as specifically indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations. 1. Recommended Locations for Builder’s Hardware fo r Standard Steel Doors and Frames, by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). 2. Recommended locations for Architectural Hardware for flush wood doors (DHI). 3. WDMA Industry Standard I.S.-1A-04, Industry Standard for Architectural wood flush doors. 3.3 INSTALLATION: A. Install each hardware item per manufacturer's instru ctions and recommendations. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as neces sary for proper installation and operation. B. Conform to local governing agency security ordinance. C. Install Conforming to ICC/ANSI A117.1 A ccessible and Usable Building and Facilities. 1. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that from the open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the landing side of the door. D. Installed hardware using the manufacturers fasteners provided. Drill and tap all screw holes located in metallic materials. Do not use “Riv-Nuts” or similar products. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND FINAL ADJUSTMENT A. Contractor/Installers, Field Services: After installation is complete, contractor shall inspect the completed door openings on site to verify installation of hardware is complete and properly adjusted, in accordance with both the Contract Do cuments and final shop drawings. 1. Check and adjust closers to ensure proper operation.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-10 2. Check latchset, lockset, and exit devices are properly installed an d adjusted to ensure proper operation. a. Verify levers are free from binding. b. Ensure latchbolts and dead bolts are engaged into strike and hardware is functioning. 3. Report findings, in writing, to architect indicating that all hardware is installed and functioning properly. Include recommendations outlining corrective actions for improperly functioning hardware if required. 3.5 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE: Manufacturer List Code Name AB ABH Manufacturing Inc. BE Best Access Systems BY By Others NA National Guard PR Precision SA SAFLOCK ST Stanley TR Trimco Finish List Code Description AL Aluminum PC Prime Coat S1 Sprayed Aluminum Finish 600 Primed for Painting 626 Satin Chromium Plated 630 Satin Stainless Steel 689 Aluminum Painted US26D Chromium Plated, Dull US32D Stainless Steel, Dull Option List Code Description FL Fire Exit Hardware LBR LESS BOTTOM ROD NRP NON REMOVEABLE PIN HINGE
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-11 Hardware Sets SET #1 3 Hinges By Prehung Dr. Mfg. 626 BY 1 Entry Cardlock SAFELOCK MO RTISE W/DB AND PRIVACY 626 SA 1 Door Closer D-3550 S 689 ST 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA SET #2 3 Hinges By Prehung Dr. Mfg. 626 BY 1 Deadlock 83T-0 KL STK 626 BE 1 Patio Set 93K-0P14DS3 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA SET #3 2 Hinges By Gate Mfg. US26D ST 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR NOTE: Gate: Mounting boxes are needed to mount hardware listed. Provide all Mounting boxes. Coordinate the requirements with the Gate Mfg. SET #4 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Exit Device 2101 (Exit Only) 630 PR 1 Door Closer D-3550 S 689 ST 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Drip Cap 16 A 4"ODW NA 1 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA SET #5 3 Hinges By Prehung Dr. Mfg. 626 BY 1 Entry Cardlock SAFELOCK MORTISE W/LATCHBOLT 626 SA 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA SET #6 3 Hinges By Prehung Dr Mfg. US32D ST 1 Advantex Exit Device 10 SERIES X SAFELOCK CARD ACCESS TRIM US32D SA 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Drip Cap 16 A 4"ODW NA 1 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-12 SET #7 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Exit Device 2103 X 1703A 630 PR 1 Rim Cylinder 1E-72 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA SET #8 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US32D ST 1 Exit Device FL 2103 X 1703A 630 PR 1 Rim Cylinder 1E-72 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 S 689 ST 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Drip Cap 16 A 4"ODW NA 1 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA SET #9 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Drip Cap 16 A 4"ODW NA 1 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA SET #10 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Exit Device FL 2114 X 4914D 630 PR 1 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #11 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Exit Device 2108 X 4908D 630 PR 1 Rim Cylinder 1E-72 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA SET #12 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Exit Device FL 2108 X 4908D 630 PR 1 Rim Cylinder 1E-72 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-13 SET #13 3 Hinges By Prehung Dr. Mfg. 626 BY 1 Deadlock 83T-0 KL STK L/C 626 BE 1 Patio Set 93K-0P14DS3 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 S 689 ST 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA SET #100 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Entry Cardlock SAFELOCK MO RTISE W/DB AND PRIVACY 626 SA 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Door Guard 4016 626 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #101 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Lockset 93K-7D14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #102 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Exit Device FL 2114 X 4914D 630 PR 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 601 A NA SET #103 NOTE: Existing pair of closet doors all hardware to remain. SET #104 3 Hinges By Prehung Dr Mfg. US32D ST 1 Advantex Exit Device 10 SERIES X SAFELOCK CARD ACCESS TRIM US32D SA 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 3 Door Silencers 1229A TR SET #105 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Entry Cardlock SAFELOCK MO RTISE W/DB AND PRIVACY 626 SA 1 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Door Guard 4016 626 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-14 SET #106 NOTE: All hardware by the bifold door Mfg. SET #107 NOTE: Overhead coiling door to be linked to the fire alarm system and have smoke gasketing. All hardware is to be furnished by the coiling door Mfg. SET #108 NOTE: Existing Door. All hardware to remain SET #109 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Lockset 93K-7D14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #110 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Entry Cardlock Safelock Mortise w/Latchbolt 626 SA 1 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 3 Door Silencers 1229A TR SET #111 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Set Auto Flush Bolts 3810 X 3810 630 TR 1 Lockset 93K-7D14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Coordinator 3094B Series PC TR 2 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 2 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Dustproof Strike 3910 630 TR 1 Astragal By Dr Mfg. 600 BY 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #112 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 2 Flush Bolt 3917-12 626 TR 1 Lockset 93K-7D14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST NOTE: Closer on active door only 2 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Dustproof Strike 3910 630 TR 2 Door Silencers 1229A TR SET #113 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Passage Set 93K-0N14DS3 626 BE 1 Magnetic Holder 2100 S1 AB 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA NOTE: Magnetic holder is to be tied into the fire alarm system.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-15 SET #114 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Lockset 93K-7D14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #115 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Deadlock 83T-7 KLSTK L/C 626 BE 1 Patio Set 93K-0P14DS3 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 S 689 ST 1 Door Holder 1220-5 626 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA SET #116 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Exit Device FL 2108 X 4908D 630 PR 1 Rim Cylinder 1E-72 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA SET #117 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 2 Exit Device FL 2208 X 4908D LBR 630 PR 2 Rim Cylinder 1E-72 PATD 626 BE 2 Door Closer D-3550 S 689 ST 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #118 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 2 Flush Bolt 3917-12 626 TR 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 2 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 2 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Astragal By Dr Mfg. 600 BY 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 2 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA SET #119 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 2 Flush Bolt 3917-12 626 TR 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 2 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 2 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Astragal By Dr Mfg. 600 BY 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 2 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-16 SET #120 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Set Auto Flush Bolts 3815L X 3815L 630 TR 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Coordinator 3094B Series PC TR 2 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 2 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Dustproof Strike 3910 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #121 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Set Auto Flush Bolts 3815L X 3815L 630 TR 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Coordinator 3094B Series PC TR 2 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 2 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 2 Mounting Bracket 3095 or 3096 as Req. PC TR 1 Dustproof Strike 3910 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #122 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Set Auto Flush Bolts 3810 X 3810 630 TR 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Coordinator 3094B Series PC TR 2 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 1 Dustproof Strike 3910 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #123 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #124 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #125 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Exit Set 93K-0Y14DS3 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Door Guard 4016 626 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA END OF SECTION 087100
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 1 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following pr oducts and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements ar e specified by reference to this Section: 1. Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows. 2. Exterior Wood Doors. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-gla ss unit that contains dehydr ated air or a specified gas. C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated including warranty. B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples for glass.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 2 1. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers). B. Referenced Standards: Comply with published standards of Flat Glass Marketing Association, latest edition and all applicable manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Insulated Glass: Insulated glass shall meet performance requirements of ASTM E774 (Class CBA). Insulating glass units shall be manufactured by a member of Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) or Sealed Insulating Glass Manuf acturing Association (SIGMA). Units shall be double sealed with ½-inch minimum air space, a single seal is not acceptable. C. Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain cl ear float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer. D. Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one manufacturer using the same type of glass and other compone nts for each type of unit indicated. E. Source Limitations for Glazi ng Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. F. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products. 1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the tes ting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. G. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. H. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanen tly mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or anothe r certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 3 J. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certifica tion label of the following inspecting and testing agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufact urer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Every individual piece of glass shall have a label de signating type, thickness and quality. Do not remove labels until inspected by Architect. C. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating- glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to comp liance with requirements indicated on Drawings, provide products by one of the following: 1. PPG, Inc. 2. Temp Safe Inc. 3. Kwik Temp 4. General Glass Corporation 5. Guardian Industries Corporation 6. PPG Industries 7. AFGD 8. HPG Industries 9. Tempglass 10. Viracon 2.3 GLASS A. Primary Float Glass: Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated on drawings.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 4 B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class, kind, and condition as indicated on drawings. 2.5 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units cons isting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float gl ass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) wher e safety glass is indicated. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions as indicated on drawings are nominal and the overall thicknesses of un its are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. 3. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's st andard spacer material and construction. 2.6 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As sel ected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied, chemically curing seal ant, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. 1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is required, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements in ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. C. Glazing Sealant for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire-protection rating. 2.7 GLAZING GASKETS A. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in si ze and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 5 B. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extrude d gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 4. Any material indicated above. C. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or mo lded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 4. Any material indicated above. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass an d other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Seal ers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.9 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in si zes required to glaze openin gs indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surf ace conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges. 2.10 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES A. Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows: Low-E coated, clear insulating glass suitable for high-altitude installation with no leakage of interior air space. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: Manufacturer standard 5/8 or ¾ inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: Ma nufacturer standard, 3mm minimum. 3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or spu ttered on second or third surface. 7. U-Factor: 0.32 maximum.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 6 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.48 maximum. 9. Provide safety glazing labeling. B. Exterior Wood Doors: Low-E coated, clear insulating glass suitable for high-altitude installation with no leakage of interior air space. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: Manufacturer standard 5/8 or ¾ inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: Ma nufacturer standard, 3mm minimum. 3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or spu ttered on second or third surface. 7. U-Factor: 0.30 maximum. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.24 maximum. 9. Provide safety glazing labeling. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, in cluding those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between join ts of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after un satisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent re quirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Maintain minimum glazing tolerance between gla ss faces and frame or metal stops as recommended by the Flat Glass Marketing Associ ation. For ¼-inch thick glass, maintain 1/8-inch clearance between glass face and metal stops. D. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. E. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. F. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized an d located to comply with referenced glazing
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 7 publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. G. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. H. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve re quired face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. I. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by gla ss manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. J. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and fra me or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed an d installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant reco mmended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.5 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufactur er's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediatel y after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not appl y markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, ab raded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days
L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 8 before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior 3-coat stucco system for installation over two layers of 15 lb felt underlayment. 1. Metal lath and accessories. 2. Portland cement plaster. 3. Acrylic-based finishes. B. Related Section: Subcontractor responsible for Work of this Section shall comply with Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.” C. Existing Conditions: GC to field verify existing stucco bonding to substr ate throughout and notify architect of any broken bonds. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each product specified. B. Samples for selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units at least 12 inches (300 mm) square showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of finish indicated. 1. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected. 2. Include similar Samples of material for jo ints and accessories involving color selection. C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. D. Control joints to be provided as necessary in stucco with architect approval. Provide layout of proposed control joints for Architect review and comment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who has specialized in the application of Portland cement plaster similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to stucco system manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain materials from one source. C. Mockups: Prior to installing plaster work, cons truct panels for each type of finish and application required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Contractor. 2. Erect mockups 48 by 96 inches (1200 by 1200 mm) by full thickness in presence of Contractor using materials, including lath, support system, and control joints, indicated for final Work. 3. Notify Contractor 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Contractor's approval of mockups before start of plaster Work. 6. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed portland cement plaster Work. a. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of plaster manufactur er for environmental conditions before, during, and after plaster application. B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Provide heat and protectio n, temporary or permanent, as required to protect each coat of plaster from freezing for at least 24 hours after application. Distribute heat uniformly to prevent concentration of heat on plaster near heat sources; provide deflection or protective screens. C. Warm-Weather Requirements: Protect plaster agains t uneven and excessive evaporation and from strong flows of dry air, both natural and artificial. Apply and cure plaster as required by climatic and job conditions to prevent dry out during cure period. Provide suitable coverings, moist curing, barriers to deflect sunlight and wind, or combinations of these, as required. D. Exterior Plaster Work: Do not apply plaster when ambient temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg C). E. Protect contiguous work from soiling and moisture deterioration caused by plastering. Provide temporary covering and other provisions necessary to minimize harmful spattering of plaster on other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Wire-Fabric Lath: a. Davis Wire Corporation. b. Jaenson Wire Company. c. Keystone Steel & Wire Co. d. K-Lath Building Products. 2. Metal Accessories: a. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Metalex (Keene Products). c. MM Systems Corp. d. National Gypsum Co. e. Pittcon Industries. f. Unimast, Inc. g. United States Gypsum Co. h. Western Metal Lath Co. 2.2 LATH A. Woven-Wire Lath: ASTM C 1032, fabricated into 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) hexagonal-shaped mesh with minimum 0.0510-inch- (1.3-mm-) diameter, galvanized steel wire. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063 and the requirements indicated below; coordinate depth of accessories with thickne sses and number of plaster coats required.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Galvanized Steel Components: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G40 (ASTM A 653M, Z90) minimum coating designation. 2. Zinc-Alloy Components: ASTM B 69, 99 percent pure zinc. B. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large-mesh, diamond-metal lath fabricated from zinc-alloy or welded-wire mesh fabricated from 0.0475-inch- (1.2-mm-) diameter, zinc-coated (galvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce exte rnal corners of portland cement plas ter on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement. C. Cornerbeads: Small nose cornerbeads fabricated from the following metal, with expanded flanges of large-mesh diamond-metal lath allowing full plaster encasement. 1. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch (0.53 mm) thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick. D. Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with expanded flanges of the following material: 1. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch (0.53 mm) thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick. E. Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below: 1. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick. 2. Galavanized steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch thick 3. One piece type: Folded pair of nonperforated scre eds in M-shaped configuration, with expanded or perforated flanges. a. Provide removable protective tape on plaster face of control joints. F. Foundation Sill (Weep) Screed: Manufacturer's standa rd profile designed for use at sill plate line to form plaster stop and prevent plaster from contacting damp earth, fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. G. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations indicated. H. Exterior Insulation Finish System Formed Relief: 1. Compatibility: Provide substrates, adhesive, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish-coat materials, sealants, and accessories th at are compatible with one another and approved for use by system manufacturer for Project. 2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Finish Coat: Match field color of Portland Cement Plaster as selected by Contractor. 3. Primer-Sealer: System manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated and adhesive used for application of insulation. 4. Adhesive for Application of Insulation: System manufacturer's standard formulation designed for use, compatible with substrate. 5. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold. Comply with system manufacturer's requirements, ASTM C 578 for Type I, and "EIMA Guideline Speci fication for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for more stri ngent requirements for material performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following: a. Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado a. Provide insulation in boards not more than 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm) and in thickness indicated but not more than 4 inches (102 mm) or less than that allowed by ASTM PS 49. 6. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other system materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. (21 dN/cm) per EIMA 105.01, complying with ASTM D 578 and the following requirements for minimum weight: a. Standard Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m). b. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. (127 g/sq. m). c. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4 oz./sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m). d. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd. (244 g/sq. m). 7. Base-Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture. 8. Primer: System manufacturer's standard fact ory-mixed elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat. 9. Finish-Coat Materials: System manufacturer's st andard mixture. Manufact urer's waterproof, clear acrylic-based sealer for protecting finish coat. 2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. B. Colorants for Job-Mixed Finish-Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster color to match Architect's sample. C. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. E. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating sy stems, formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over portland cement plaster base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based finishes. 1. Available Products: a. Bonsal, W. R. Co.; b. ChemRex, SonoWall Stucco Systems; c. Dryvit Systems, Inc.; d. El Rey Stucco, Inc. e. Parex Incorporated; f. Pleko Products, Inc.; g. Senergy, Inc.; h. Sto Corp.; i. Stuc-O-Flex International, Inc.; 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. ft. (16 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. B. Portland Cement Base-Coat Mixes: See Drawings for locations. 1. Over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). 2. Over Monolithic Concrete: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows: a. For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 part lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious mate rial (sum of separate volumes of each component material). 3. Over Concrete Unit Masonry: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows: a. For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2- 1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). C. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic -based finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free of contaminates, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. B. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932. D. Building Paper: 2 layers of 10 minute; or 1 layer of 60 minute moisture resistance rated Grade D asphalt saturated Kraft building paper conforming with U.B.C Standard No. 14; or 1 layer of asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D226 Type I. E. Building Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. F. Line Wire: 0.0475-inch- (1.2-mm-) diameter, zinc -coated (galvanized), soft, annealed steel wire. G. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fa stening metal lath to steel members 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2.7 MIXING A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate material s for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Products: Provide system manufacturer's listed and recommended chemically curing, elastomeric sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials, and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in "EIMA Guide for Use of Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB" and with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for products corres ponding to description indicated below: 1. Low-modulus, multipart, nonsag urethane sealant. 2. Low-modulus silicone sealant. B. Preformed Foam Sealant Products: Provide sealan t compatible with adjacent materials and complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." C. Sealant Color: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Match finish-coat color of system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF LATH AND FURRING, GENERAL A. In accordance with Manufacture’s written instructions. B. Standards: Comply with ML/SFA 920, "Guide Sp ecifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," and with requirements of ASTM C 1063. C. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, handrails, furnishings, and similar work to comply with details indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable written instructions of lath and furring manufacturer. D. Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure horizontally and where partition sufficiently isolate from structural movement to prevent transfer of loading from building structure. Install slip- or cushion-type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. 1. Frame both sides of control joints independently and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accessories. E. Install additional framing, furring, runners, lath, and beads, as required to form openings and frames for other work as indicated. Coordinate support system for proper support of framed work that is not indicated to be supported independently of metal furring and lathing system. 3.2 LATHING A. Install metal lath for the following applications where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials indicated that comply with referenced ML/SFA specifications and ASTM lathing installation standards. 1. Exterior horizontal surfaces using woven-wire lath with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) hexagonal-shaped mesh with minimum 0.0510-inch- (1.3-mm-) diameter, galvanized steel wire. 2. Exterior sheathed soffit surfaces using woven-wire lath with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) hexagonal- shaped mesh with minimum 0.0510-inch- (1 .3-mm-) diameter, galvanized steel wire.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3.3 PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING A. In accordance with Manufacture’s written instructions. B. Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct ap plication of plaster, removing loose material and substances that may impair the Work. C. Install screeds and temporary gro unds to ensure accurate rodding of pl aster to true surfaces; coordinate with plaster-coat work. 1. Terminate base of stucco system with weep screed in direct contact with concrete foundations in accordance with Manufacture r’s written instructions. D. Refer to Division 6 Sections for installing permanent wood grounds, if any. E. Flashing: Refer to Division 7 Sections for installing flashing as indicated. F. Surface Conditioning: Immediately before plaste ring, dampen concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces that are indicated for direct plaster applica tion, except where a bonding agent has been applied. Determine and apply amount of moisture and degree of saturation that will result in optimum suction for plastering. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES A. In accordance with Manufacture’s written instructions. B. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope acces sories at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaste r bases to hold accessories in place and in alignment during plastering. Install accessories of type indicated at following locations: 1. External Corners: Install corner reinforcement at external corners. 2. Terminations of Plaster: Install casing beads, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Control Joints: Install at locations complying with the following criteria and approved by Contractor: a. Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of construction directly behind plaster membrane. b. Distance between Control Joints: Not to ex ceed 18 feet (5.4 m) in either direction or a length-to-width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1. c. Horizontal Surfaces: Not more th an 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in area. d. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of plaster membrane. 3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION A. Plaster Application Standard: Apply plaster materials, composition, and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926. B. Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, lump y, dirty, or contaminated by foreign materials. C. Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado D. Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than pl us or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as meas ured by a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge placed at any location on surface. E. Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base-coat plaster material, and before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated or required for fire- resistance rating, grout at least 6 in ches (152 mm) at each jamb anchor. F. Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that neither will be damaged by installation of other. G. Plaster flush with metal frames a nd other built-in metal items or accessori es that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where interior plaster is not terminated at metal frame by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. H. Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush with cornerbeads on interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior work. I. Number of Coats: As indicated by Manufacturer’s product designations. J. Finish Coats: Apply finish coats to comply with the following requirements: 1. Float Finish: Apply finish coat to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm) to completely cover base coat, uniformly floated to a true even plane with fine-textured finish matching Contractor's sample or selection. 2. Prepared Finish: Apply acrylic-based fi nish coats according to manufacturer's written instructions. K. Moist-cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including written instructions for time between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations." 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qua lified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field quality-control tests and in spections and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace por tland cement plaster Work that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Subcontractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with requirements. 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point-up finish plaster surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters , buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defect s. Repair or replace work as necessary to comply with required visual effects.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -9 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of plaster on other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not to be plastered. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, equipment, and plaster debris. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure plaster work is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 3.9 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Stucco field color: buff, match C2 Paint, C2-362 P, Kalahari. B. Stucco 2 nd and 3 rd floor belly band color: tan, matc h Benjamin Moore Paint, 1055. C. Stucco balcony base, wall and wingwall color: red, match North building red stucco color . END OF SECTION 09220
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. 3. Tile backing panels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inc h- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated. 2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard si ze for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-re sistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those test ed in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and se t quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compli ance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with re quirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum Co. b. BPB America Inc. c. G-P Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple. h. USG Corporation. B. Regular Type: 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Type X: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum. 2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. F. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.2 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for insta lling paper-faced metal trim accessories. 2. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 3. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." 2.4 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. B. Finish Levels: 1. Provide Level 1 finish at concealed spaces and plenums. 2. Provide Level 2 finish on substrates for tile and applied wood finishes. 3. Provide Level 4 finish where expo sed or indicated to receive paint. C. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray application. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. G-P Gypsum; Georgia-Pacific Ceiling Textures/Vermiculite. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture (Aggregated). D. Drywall texture at East Entry Lobby, F itness Room Wainscot and Fitness Restroom:
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Texture: Medium Skip-Trowel. 2. Paint: She r win Willia m s 3. Color: to b e dete r m ined b y architec t 4. Ty p e: Su p er Pain t 5. Finish: Eggshellor Sa t in 6. Installation: 2 coats ove r p ri m ecoa t asneeded. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at th ese locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. D. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. E. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install aco ustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. 3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Where required fo r fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim accordin g to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside co rners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 5. U-Bead: Use where indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings. 3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints[, rounded or be veled edges,] and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Core and shell areas of project. 3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces ar e specified in other Division 9 Sections. 5. Level 5: none. 3.5 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact w ith surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene fi lm, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surf aces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manuf acturer's written recommendations. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged incl ude, but are not limited to , fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 09265 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rated walls to achieve a 1 or 2-hour rating, as indicated on sheet A0.3. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire- resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Gypsum Company. 2. BPB America Inc. 3. G-P Gypsum. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland Forest Products Corporation. 8. USG Corporation. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL A. Provide materials and components complying w ith requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated. 1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M. 1. Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces. a. Core: As required to achieve required fire-rating. b. Long Edges: Double bevel. 2. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type X: Manufactur er's proprietary liner panels and with moisture- and mold-resistant core and surf aces; comply with ASTM D 3273. a. Core: As required to achieve required fire-rating. b. Long Edges: Double bevel. B. Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board." 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and co ntrol joints of material and shapes specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" that comply w ith gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. C. Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board." D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies so both elements of Work remain complete and unda maged. Patch or replace sprayed fi re-resistive materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials." 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applie d, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runner tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. B. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies and without reduci ng the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indi cated. Protect remaining fi re-resistive materials from damage.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following: 1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels. B. Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support. C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing. 1. At elevator hoistway entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of door frame. 2. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.0312-inch (0.79-mm) minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and secured behind at least 1 gypsum boar d face-layer panel. D. Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies by locating cavity of assemblies where required to enclose rods. E. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elev ator floor indicators, and similar items. F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction. G. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. H. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect, while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies. I. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical seal ant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each a ssembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke- tight seal; and comply with ASTM C 919 requirements or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. J. In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies cannot be positioned within 4 inches (102 mm) of the shaft face of structural be ams, floor edges, and similar projec tions into shaft, install 1/2- or 5/8-inch- (13- or 16-mm-) thick, gypsum board cants covering tops of projections. No recesses allowed (at steel beams especially). 1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches (6 10 mm) o.c. with screws fastened to shaft-wall framing. 2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. and extend studs from the projection to shaft-wall framing. K. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged incl ude, but are not limited to , fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09265
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WA LL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Resilient wall base. 3. Resilient flooring accessories. 4. Resilient carpet accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's standard sample sets consisting of sections of units showing the full range of colors and patterns availabl e for each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: In manuf acturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each product color and pattern specified. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient wall base a nd accessories certifying that each product furnished complies with requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each ty pe and color of product specified fr om one source with resources to provide products of consistent qua lity in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 662. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, duri ng installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's wr itten recommendations specify longer time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). B. Do not install products until they are at the same te mperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. For resilient products installed on traffic surfaces, close spaces to traffic during installation and for time period after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado D. Coordinate resilient product installation with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. Insta ll resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for each 500 linea r feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each different type, color, patte rn, and size of resilient product installed. 2. Deliver extra materials to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to complian ce with requirements, provide produc ts, by the manufacturers indicated in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I and with requirements specified in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule. 2.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES A. Rubber Accessories: Products complying with requirements specifi ed in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule. 2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including those for maximum moisture content. Verify that substrates and cond itions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements specified. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient products.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, acc ording to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depr essions in substrates. D. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered im mediately before installing resilient products. After cleaning, examine substrates for mo isture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install resilient products according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilast ers, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. 2. Tightly adhere wall ba se to substrate th roughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 3. Do not stretch base during installation. 4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 5. Form outside corners on job, from straight pieces of ma ximum lengths possible, without whitening at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 6. Form inside corners on job, from straight pieces of maximu m lengths possible, by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at th e point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produ ce a snug fit to substrate. C. Place resilient products so they are butted to adjace nt materials and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products: 1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient product manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum horiz ontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by resilient product manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop or sponge resilient products to remove marks and soil. B. Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures du ring the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by resilient product manufacturer. C. Clean resilient products not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Proj ect. Clean products according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3.5 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. Rubber Wall Base: 1. Manufacturer: Johnsonite; Roppe; or as indicated in the Finish Schedule. 2. Style: Cove with top-set toe for vinyl composition tile and straight with no toe for carpet. 3. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). 4. Height: As indicated in the Finish Schedules and on the Drawings. 5. Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer, but not less than 96 feet (29.26 m). 6. Outside Corners: Premolded. 7. Inside Corners: Job formed or premolded. 8. Ends: Premolded. 9. Surface: Smooth. 10. Color: As indicated in the Finish Schedules. END OF SECTION 09653
CARPET 09680 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet: see Interior Fi nish Schedule for Manufacturer and Product. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product `indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Incl ude installation recommendations for each type of substrate required. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 3. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 4. Seam locations, types, and methods. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 8. Pile direction. 9. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 10. Type, color, and loca tion of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 11. Transition details to other flooring materials. 12. Type of cushion. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample. 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory : 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples. 3. Carpet Cushion: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Sample. 4. Carpet Seam: 6-inch (150-mm) Sample. 5. Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample. Show carpet pattern alignment. D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. E. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.
CARPET 09680 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installe r who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to au thorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpe t until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indi cated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreei ng to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to , more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Carpet Cushion Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet cushion manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet cushion that does not comply with requ irements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
CARPET 09680 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, to types of carpet indicated in the Finish Schedules and Drawings. B. Carpet 1. Manufacturer: Design Origins by Shaw 2. Contact: Laurie Mathis 303-288-3927 3. Style: to be determined 4. Pattern: to be determined 5. Colors: Strike off to be approved 6. Ply: 2 7. Cons t ruction: Cut Pile 8. Dye Method: Dye InjectionPrin t 9. Gauge: 1/10 10. Stitches p e r Inch: 12.3 11. Tufted Pile Height: .312 inches 12. Yarn Weight: 40.0 ozs / sq. y d.13. Weight Densi t y: 240,000 14. Anti Soil Treatment: Fluo r oca r b on 15. Pri m ary Backing: WovenPolyp r opylene 16. Secondary Backing: WovenPolyp r opylene 17. Warranty: 10 years 18. Fla m m a b ility: Class 1, S m oke Density less t han 450 19. Wid t h: 12’20. Weight: 40 oz. C. Carpet with CR 10 bleach and stain resistan t treatment and MP moisture protective backing. D. Install per manufacturer’s and installer’s recommendations. E. Carpet – Existing Units 1. Provide an allowance of $45/sy over entire unit area for Existing Units. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. B. Smooth Transition Strip 1. Manufacturer: Schluter 2. Contact: 800-472-4588 3. Style Number: Reno-TK or Reno-U 4. Finish: Brushed Stainless Steel 5. Location: Between carpeted areas and adjacent areas
CARPET 09680 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 6. Flooring Contractor to select among various sizes to accommodate different heights in stone flooring and carpeted areas. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mild ew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requiremen ts for installed carpet and that is recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. D. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. E. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match cushion thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 12.2. F. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for co mpliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing com pounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine ad hesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following: a. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the following:
CARPET 09680 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Carpet manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonat ion, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Stretch-in Installation." B. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Carpet on Stairs." C. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 1. Bevel adjoining border edges at seams with hand shears. D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. E. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, perm anent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. F. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, cl osets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or ma rked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face -beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104 , Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09680
PAINTING 09900-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparat ion and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coat s specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, ex cept where the paint schedules indicate th at a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint sche dules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work , and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal su rfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Acoustical wall panels. c. Metal toilet enclosures. d. Metal lockers. e. Unit kitchens. f. Elevator entrance doors and frames. g. Elevator equipment. h. Finished mechanical an d electrical equipment. i. Light fixtures. j. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following genera lly inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. d. Utility tunnels. e. Pipe spaces. f. Duct shafts. g. Elevator shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper.
PAINTING 09900-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code- required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. General: The standard procedure for measuring specular gloss is contained in ASTM D 523. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish w ith a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gl oss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a glo ss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system speci fied. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of re quired coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for ha ndling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. B. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, the Architect will fu rnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applie d, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications fo r each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. 3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only:
PAINTING 09900-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado a. b. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch- (100-mm-) square samples for each color and finish. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch (100-by-200-mm) samples of masonry, with m orta r join t in thecenter, fo r eachfinishan d color. c. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch- (300-mm-) square samples of each color and material on hardboard. d. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8-inch (100-by-200-mm) samples of natural-or stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces. e. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch- (100-mm-) square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch- (200-mm-) long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. D. Qualificat their cap a names an i on Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrat e b ilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses ,d addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project w ith a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Field Quality Control: 1. Review of first finished room, space, or item of each color scheme is required by Ar chitect for color, texture, and workmanship. 2. Use first acceptable room, space or item as Project standard for each color scheme. 3. For spray application, paint surface not smal ler than 100 square feet as Project standard. D. Secondary products not specified by name and required for the job such as shellac shall be "best grade" or "first line" products. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufact urer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions.
PAINTING 09900-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep st orage area neat and orderly. Re move oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that worker s and work areas are pr otected from fire and health hazards resulting from hand ling, mixing, and application. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperat ure of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints on ly when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish Owner clean, new, one-quart cans of paints used on the Project, well marked, indicating location of each color and type material used. One ca n if less than 1,000 square feet, two cans if over 1,000 square feet covered. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Provide one of the products in the paint schedules. B. Manufacturers Names: The foll owing manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: 1. Carboline Company (Carboline) 2. ICI Dulux Paints-Devoe Coatings (ICI) 3. Kwal •Howells, Inc (K •H). 4. Benjamin Moore & Company (Moore). 5. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W). 6. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec). C. Materials selected for coating sy stems for each type of surface shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
PAINTING 09900-5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.02 MATERIALS A. Quality: Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Paint ma terial containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. B. No claim as to the unsuitability or unavailability of any material specified, or unwillingness to use specified products, or inability to produce first-class work with specified products, will be entertained. C. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates in dicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. D. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sales paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. E. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Ar chitect from the manufacturer's full range of standard colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfact ory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On reques t, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machin ed surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that ar e not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying pa int or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
PAINTING 09900-6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean an d prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular s ubstrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompa tible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral- fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painte d. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as requi red to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use m echanical methods of surface preparation. 3. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. 4. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to rem ove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. 6. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other fo reign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces ex posed to view smoo th and dust off. 7. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, an d apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wo od filler. Sand smooth when dried. 8. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted i mmediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. 9. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. 10. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. 11. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 12. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-m etal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. 13. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10. 14. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.
PAINTING 09900-7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 15. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coat s that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 16. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Rem ove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint mate rials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surfa ce film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of underc oats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's wr itten instructions. Use ap plicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and fi nishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed su rfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiati on, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, pain t surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of du cts with a flat, nonspecular bl ack paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removabl e or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each suc ceeding enamel or varnish coat.
PAINTING 09900-8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness re quired are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat ha s cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to pr oduce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show th rough final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fast eners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer 's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the materi al and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipm ent with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the materi al and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Motors and mechanical equipment. 7. Accessory items. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear.
PAINTING 09900-9 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3. Panelboards. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where ev idence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and cove rage. Cloudiness, spottin g, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness , or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.04 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and pain t-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to sc ratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with pr ocedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.06 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. The following schedule for finishing is not intended to mention every particular item which will receive painter's finish. The kinds of paint and number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be as scheduled. 3.07 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 1. Semi-Gloss: Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Synthetic rust-inhibiting primer.
PAINTING 09900-10 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1) ICI: Devguard 4160 Tank and Structural Primer. 2) K •H: 9210Rus t InhibitingMetalPri m er 3) Moore: AlkydMetal Pri m e r M06.4) S-W: Ke m Kro m i k Metal Pri m er B50NZ6/B50WZ1. b. First and Second Coats: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex. 1) ICI: 2406 Decra-Shield Exterior Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 3200Acrylic LatexSe m i-Gloss 3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexHouse & Tri m #170. 4) S-W: A-100LatexHousean d Tri m Paint A82 Series. 2. High Performance Semi-Gloss Uret hane: One finish coat over primer. a. Primer: Synthetic rust-inhibiting primer, 1 to 2 DFT. 1) Carboline: Rustbond LTR Primer. 2) ICI: Devgua r d 4160Tan k an d S t ruc t ural Pri m er. 3) K •H: VyGua r dV13-F-28.4) Moore: Universal Metal Pri m er M06.5) S-W: Ke m KKro m i k Universal Metal Pri m er B50WZ1. 6) Tne m ec: Che m Pri m e37H. b. Finish Coat: Semi-Gloss Urethane, 3 to 4 mils DFT. 1) Carboline: 133HB. 2) ICI: Devthane378Aliphatic UrethaneSe m i-Gloss. 3) K •H: VyGua r dV41.4) Moore: M74/M75Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Se m i-Gloss.5) S-W: Acrolon218HSB65-650Se r ies 6) Tne m ec: EnduraSeries73. B. Galvanized Metal: 1. Paint System Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex: Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer. 1) ICI: 3210 Ultra-Hide Aquacrylic Gripper. 2) K •H: 5800100%Acrylic Pri m er.3) Moore: FreshS t art #023 4) S-W: DTMPri m e r FinishB66W1. b. First and Second Coats: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel. 1) ICI: 2406 Decra-Shield Exterior Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 3200Acrylic LatexSe m i-Gloss.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexHouse & Tri m #170. 4) S-W: A-100LatexHousean d Tri m Paint A82 Series. 2. High Performance Semi-Gloss Uretha ne: Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Synthetic rust-inhibiting primer, 1 to 2 DFT.
PAINTING 09900-11 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1) ICI: Decra-Shield 2200 Exterior Flat. 2) K H: 6400Accu-Tone100%Acrylic Flat Finish. 1) Carboline: Rustbond LTR Primer. 2) ICI: Devgua r d 4160Tan k an d S t ruc t ural Pri m er. 3) K •H: VyGua r dV13-F-28.4) Moore: Universal Metal Pri m er M07 5) S-W: Ke m K r o m i k Universal Metal Pri m er B50WZ1. 6) Tne m ec: Che m Pri m e37H. b. Finish Coat: Semi-Gloss Urethane, 3 to 4 mils DFT. 1) Carboline: 133HB. 2) ICI: Devthane378Aliphatic UrethaneSe m i-Gloss. 3) K •H: VyGua r dV41.4) Moore: M74/M75Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Se m i-Gloss.5) S-W: Acrolon218HSB65-650Se r ies.6) Tne m ec: EnduraSeries73 3. Heat-Resistant, Enamel Coating: For surface temperatures up to 400 degrees F (204 degrees C). Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer Coat: Manufactur er's recommended metal primer. 1) ICI: HT-10 Modified Silicone Black.2) K •H: N o p ri m e r required.3) Moore: N o p ri m e r required.4) S-W: N o p ri m e r required.5) Tne m ec: N o p ri m e r required. b. First and Second Coats: Heat-resistant Enamel. 1) ICI: HT-10 Modified Silicone Black. 2) K •H: VyGuar d Hi-Heat Silicone Coating 37-J-1, Black. 3) Moore: HighHeat CoatingBlac k M66-80 4) S-W: Ke m H;Te m p heat FlexII450.5) Tne m ec: Series39-661SiliconeAlu m inu m . 4. Heat-Resistant Coating: For su rface temperatures up to 1000 degrees F (538 degrees C). Provide two coats. a. First and Second Coats: Aluminum-pigmented, silicone-based heat-resistant coating. 1) ICI: HT-10 Modified Silicone Aluminum. 2) K •H: VyGuar d HighHeat Silicone Coating 37-F-2, Zinc Dust Gray. 3) Moore: HighHeat CoatingAlu m inu m M66-78 4) S-W: Hi-Hea t Silicone AlkydAlu m inu m , B59S8. C. Concrete and Concrete–based siding: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Acrylic Finish: Two coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. First and Second Coats: Exterior acrylic emulsion.
PAINTING 09900-12 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3) Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint #171.4) S-W: A-100Acrylic LatexFlat Exterio r Finish A-6Series. 3.08 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Ferrous Metal: 1. Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer. 1) ICI: Devguard 4160 Tank and Structural Primer. 2) K •H: 9210Metal Pri m er.3) Moore: AlkydMetal Pri m e r M06.4) S-W: Ke m Kro m i k Metal Pri m er B50NZ^/B50WZ1. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1) ICI: 1120 Ultra-Hide Oil/Alkyd Undercoat. 2) K •H: 4200Alky d Undercoat.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecAlkydEna m el Undercoate r andPri m e r Seale r #245 4) S-W: Prep-Rite Wall &Woo d Pri m e r B49W2. c. Finish Coat: Interior, Semi-Gloss, Alkyd. 1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 4600Accu-ProSe m iglossEna m el.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecAlkydSe m i-gloss Ena m el #271 4) S-W: ProMa r 200Se m i-GlossAlkydEna m el B34W200. 2. Two-Component Waterborne Epoxy Coating, Gloss Finish: a. Primer: Waterborne epoxy. 1) ICI: True-Glaze-WB 4030 Waterborne Epoxy Primer. 2) K •H: 5800Acrylic Pri m er.3) Moore: WaterborneEpoxy Pri m e r M08/M09. 4) S-W: Wate r -Base d CatalyzedEpoxy Pri m e r B70W100. b. First and Second Coats: Waterborne epoxy gloss coating. 1) ICI: True-Glaze-WB 4408 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss. 2) K •H 3110WaterborneCatalyzedEpoxy. 3) Moore: Acrylic Epoxy GlossCoatingM43/M44 4) S-W: Wate r -Base d CatalyzedEpoxy B70/B60V25. B. Galvanized Metal: 1. Semi-Gloss Finish: Two finish coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
PAINTING 09900-13 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer. 1) ICI: Devguard 4160 Tank and Structural Primer. 2) K •H: 5860All-PurposePri m er.3) Moore: FreshS t art #023 4) S-W: Galvite HSB50WZ30. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1) ICI: 1120 Ultra-Hide Oil/Alkyd Undercoat. 2) K •H: 4200Undercoater.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecAlkydEna m el Undercoate r an d Pri m e r Seale r #245. 4) S-W: Prep-Rite Wall &Woo d Pri m e r B49W2. c. Finish Coat: Interior, semi -gloss, low-odor , alkyd enamel. 1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 4600Acc-ProSe m iglossEna m el.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecAlkydSe m i-Gloss Ena m el #271 4) S-W: ProMa r 200Se m i-GlossAlkydEna m el B34W200 S eries. C. Concrete (Where scheduled Epoxy Paint): 1. Two-component, Polyamide-Epoxy Coating System with gloss finish. a. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended undercoat. 1) ICI: True-Glaze 4508 Ch emical Resistant Epoxy. 2) K •H: 9100Epoxy Ena m el.3) Moore: Polya m ideEpoxy GlossCoatingM36/M37 4) S-W: Tile-CladHighSolidsEpoxy B62Z Series. b. Second Coat: High-performance, polyamide-epoxy coating. 1) ICI: True-Glaze 4508 Ch emical Resistant Epoxy. 2) K •H: 9100Epoxy Ena m el.3) Moore: Polya m ideEpoxy GlossCoatingM36/M37 4) S-W: Tile-CladHighSolidsEpoxy B62Z Series. D. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): 1. Semi-Gloss, Acrylic Latex Finish: Two coats ov er filled surface with to tal dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat. a. Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler. 1) ICI: Bloxfil 4000 Heavy Duty Filler. 2) K •H: 5890Accu-ProAcrylicBloc k Filler. 3) Moore: Moorcraf t Supe r Craf t LatexBloc k Fille r #285. 4) S-W: P r oMa r Interior/Exterio r Bloc k Fille r B25W25. b. Primer: Interior Latex Primer:
PAINTING 09900-14 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1) ICI: 1416 Ultra-Hide Interior Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 2300Accu-ToneInterio r LatexSe m i-Gloss Ena m el.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexSe m i-Gloss Ena m el. #276 4) S-W: ProMa r 200LatexSe m i-GlossB31W200. c. Finish Coat: Interior, Semi-Gloss, Low-Odor, Acrylic Latex: 1) ICI: 1416 Ultra-Hide Interior Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 2300Accu-ToneInterio r LatexSe m i-Gloss Ena m el.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexSe m i-Gloss Ena m el. #276.4) S-W: ProMa r 200LatexSe m i-GlossB31W200. 2. Two-Component, Epoxy Emulsion Coating with Gloss Finish: Provide two finish coats of gloss, epoxy emulsion over concrete masonry block filler. a. Filler Coat: Concrete masonry block filler. 1) ICI: Bloxfil 4000 Heavy Duty Filler. 2) K •H: 5890AcrylicBloc k Filler.3) Moore: Moorcraf t Supe r Craf t LatexBloc k Fille r #285 4) S-W: Heavy Duty Bloc k Filler B42W46.5) Tne m ec: 130-6601Environfill. b. First and Second Coats: Gloss, Epoxy Emulsion. 1) ICI: True-Glaze-WB 4408 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss. 2) K •H: 3110WaterborneCatalyzedEpoxy. 3) S-W: Wate r Base d CatalyzedEpoxy,B70 Series/B60V15.4) Moore: Acrylic Epoxy GlossCoatingM43/M44 5) Tne m ec: Series113H.B.Tne m e-Tufcoat. E. Gypsum Board Systems: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: Two coats. a. Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer. 1) ICI: 1030 Ultra-Hide PVA Interior Primer. 2) K •H: 0890SandableDrywall Pri m er.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexEna m el Undercoate r an d Pri m e r Sealer.#253 4) S-W: PrepRite 200LatexWall Pri m e r B28W200. b. Finish Coat: Interior, flat, latex-based paint. 1) ICI: 1210 Ultra-Hide Interior Flat. 2) K •H: 1511Accu-ToneLatexFlat.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexFlat #275. 4) S-W: ProMa r 200LatexFlat B30W200. 2. Acrylic Latex Egg-Shell Enamel: Two finish coat s over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils. a. Primer:
PAINTING 09900-15 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 1) ICI: 1030 Ultra-Hide PVA Interior Primer. 2) K •H: 0890sandabledrywall p ri m er.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexEna m el Undercoate r an d Pri m e r Sealer.#253 4) S-W: PrepRite 200LatexWall Pri m e r B28W200. b. First and Second Coats: 1) ICI: 1412 Ultra-Hide Interior Eggshell. 2) K •H: 1903Accu-ProEggshell.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexEgg-Shell Ena m el #274.4) S-W: ProMa r 200LatexEg-Shell B20W200. 3. Low-Odor Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer. 1) ICI: 1030 Ultra-Hide PVA Interior Primer. 2) K •H: 0890sandabledrywall p ri m er.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexEna m el Undercoate r an d Pri m e r Sealer.#253. 4) S-W: PrepRite 200LatexWall Pri m e r B28W200. b. First and Second Coats: Interior, Semi-Gloss, Low-Odor, Alkyd Enamel. 1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 4600Accu-ProSe m iglossEna m el.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecAlkydSe m i-Gloss Ena m el #271.4) S-W: ProMa r 200Alky d Se m i-GlossB34W200. 4. High-Performance, Polyamide-Epoxy Coating System: Provide two coats with total dry film thickness not less than 4 mils. a. Base Coat: Manufacturer's recommended undercoat. 1) ICI: Ultra-Hide 3210 Aquacrylic Gripper. 2) K •H: 0890sandabledrywall p ri m er.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexEna m el Undercoate r an d Pri m e r Sealer.#253 4) S-W: P r opRite 200LatexWall Pri m er. 5) Tne m ec: 51-792PVASealer. b. First and Second Coats: High-p erformance, polyamide-epoxy coating. 1) ICI: True-Glaze 4508 Ch emical Resistant Epoxy. 2) K •H: 9100Epoxy Ena m el.3) Moore: Polya m ideEpoxy GlossCoatingM36/M37. 4) S-W: Tile-CladHSEpoxy B62ZSeries.5) Tne m ec: Series66. F. Woodwork and Hardboard: 1. Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish: Three coats.
PAINTING 09900-16 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado a. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat. 1) ICI: 1120 Ultra-Hide Oil/Alkyd Undercoat. 2) K•H: 4200 Alkyd Undercoat 3) Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Undercoater and Primer Sealer. #245. 4) S-W: Prep-Rite Wall & Wood Primer B49W2. b. First and Second Coats: Interior, Semi-Gloss, Low-Odor, Alkyd Enamel. 1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 4600Accu-ProSe m iglossEna m el.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecAlkydSe m i-Gloss Ena m el #271 4) S-W: ProMa r 200Alky d Se m i-GlossB34W200.. 2. Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: Three coats. a. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat. 1) ICI: 1020 Ultra-Hide Oil/Alkyd Undercoat. 2) K•H: 4200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3) Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Undercoater and Primer Sealer. #245. 4) S-W: Prep-Rite Wall & Wood Primer B49W2. b. First and Second Coats: Gloss Alkyd Enamel. 1) ICI: 2518 Ultra-Hide Durus Alkyd Gloss 2) K •H: 9800Accu-ProAlky d GlossEna m el. 3) Moore: UrethaneAlkydGlossEna m el M22. 4) S-W: IndustrialEna m elB-54Series. G. Stained Woodwork: 1. Stained-Varnish Rubbed Finish: Three finish coats over stain plus filler on open-grain wood. Wipe filler before applying first varnish coat. a. Stain Coat: Oil-type interior wood stain. 1) ICI: 1700 Woodpride Finishing Stain. 2) K •H: 8709Se m i-Transparent Stain.3) Moore: Benwoo d Pene t ratingS t ain#234.4) S-W: WoodClassicsOil StainA48-200Series. b. First Coat: Sealer. 1) ICI: 1908 Woodpride Polyurethane Gloss. 2) K •H: Woodkraft Seale r 4048.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecSandingSeale r #267. 4) S-W: WoodClassicsFas t DrySeale r B26V43. c. Filler Coat: Paste wood filler for open grain woods. 1) K•H: Old Master’s Paste Wood Filler.
PAINTING 09900-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2) Moore: Benwood Wood Grain Filler #238.3) S-W: She r -Woo d Fas t -Dr y Filler. d. Second and Third Coats: Oil rubbing varnish. 1) ICI: 1902 Woodpride Polyurethane Satin 2) K •H: Woodkraft SatinVa r nish.3) Moore: Benwoo d SatinFinishVarnish#404. 4) S-W: WoodClassicsVarnishG1A66-300 Series.. H. Natural-Finish Woodwork: 1. Rubbed Varnish Finish: Two finish coats over sealer plus filler on open-grain wood. a. First Coat: Sealer. 1) ICI: 1908 Woodpride Polyurethane Gloss. 2) K •H: Woodkraft Seale r 4048.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecSandingSeale r #413. 4) S-W: Woo d ClassicsFas t DrySeale r B26V43. b. Filler Coat: Paste wood filler for open grain woods. 1) K •H: Old Master’s Paste Wood Filler. 2) Moore: Benwoo d PasteWoodFille r #238.3) S-W: She r -Woo d Fas t -Dr y Filler. c. Second and Third Coats: Oil rubbing varnish. 1) ICI: 1902 Woodpride Polyurethane Satin. 2) K •H: Woodkraft SatinVa r nish.3) Moore: Benwoo d SatinFinishVarnish#404. 4) S-W: WoodClassicsVarnishGlossA66-300 Series. I. Exterior Wood Stain: 1. Stain Finish: Two coats to saturation. a. First Coat: Olympic Stain 700. b. Second Coat: Olympic Stain 700. END OF SECTION 09900
LOUVE R S AND VENTS 10200-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section, unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Standard Free Area: Free area of a louver 48 inches (1220 mm) wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high, identical to that provided. C. Maximum Standard Airflow: Airflow at point of beginning water penetration through a louver 48 inches (1220 mm) wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high, identical to that provided. D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver designed to coll ect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of gutters in front edges of blades and channels in jambs and mullions. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide exterior metal louvers capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fa tigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1440 Pa), acting inward or outward. 2. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, and other detrimental effects: a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. B. Air-Performance, Water-Penetratio n, and Air-Leakage Ratings: Provide louvers complying with performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units 48 inches (1220 mm) wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high. Test units according to AMCA 500. 1. Perform testing on unpainted, cleaned, degreased units. 2. Perform water-penetration testing on louvers without screens. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
LOUVE R S AND VENTS 10200-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado B. Shop Drawings: For louver units and accessories . Include plans; elevations; sections; and details showing profiles, angles, and spacing of louver blades. Show unit dimensions related to wall openings and construction; free area for each size indicated; profiles of frames at jambs, heads, and sills; and anchorage details and locations. C. Samples for Verification: Of each type of metal fi nish required, prepared on Samples of same thickness and material indicated for final Wo rk. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of louvers certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements and are licensed to bear the AMCA seal based on tests made according to AMCA 500 and complying with AMCA's Certified Ratings Program. E. Product Test Reports: Indi cate compliance of products with re quirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single manufacturer where alike in one or more respects regarding type, design, or factory-applied color finish. B. Welding Standards: As follows: 1. Comply with AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." 2. Certify that each welder ha s satisfactorily passed AWS qualifica tion tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Fixed, Extruded-Aluminum louvers: a. Airolite Co.; Louver Model CB605D, 5” Horizontal Front Drainage Continuous Blade Appearance. b. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Air Conditioning Louvers – 30 o Blade 0292/0291
LOUVE R S AND VENTS 10200-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5 or T-52. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy 319. F. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fasten ed metal or 300 series stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. 1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. G. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for loading and installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior insta llations and elsewhere as needed for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices fo r drilled-in-place anchors. H. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 but containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splic ing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark un its for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates and without interrupting blade-spacing pattern. B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separa tion between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining materials' tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. D. Include supports, anchorages, and accesso ries required for complete assembly. E. Provide vertical mullions of type and at sp acings indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c., whichever is less. At horizontal joints between louver units, provide horizontal mullions, unless contin uous vertical assemblies are indicated. F. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assemb ly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. G. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louv er blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view; unless otherwis e indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connecti ons between frame members necessary. 2.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Louver Construction: Provide fixed-blade louvers with extruded-aluminum frames and blades.
LOUVE R S AND VENTS 10200-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 2.5 FIXED, FORMED-METAL LOUVERS A. Louver Construction: Provide fixed-blade louvers with frames and blades formed from metal sheet of metal indicated. 2.6 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide each exterior louver with louv er screens complying with the following requirements: 1. Screen Location for Fixe d Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Bird screening, unless otherwise indicated. B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) from each corner and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate screen frames w ith mitered corners to louv er sizes indicated and to comply with the following requirements: 1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. a. Reinforce extruded-aluminum scr een frames at corners with clips. 2. Finish: Same finish as louver frame s to which louver screens are attached. D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: As follows: 1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) square mesh, 0.063-inch (1.6-mm) wire. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish louvers after assembly. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat , and apply coating to exposed meta l surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. 2.. Color and Gloss: a. Kynar 500 color as selected by Archit ect from manufacturers custom color range.
LOUVE R S AND VENTS 10200-5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate Setting Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louver units level, plumb, an d at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Prov ide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of unifor m width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. F. Protect galvanized and nonferr ous-metal surfaces from co rrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminou s paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. G. Install concealed gaskets, flas hings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints ar e required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING A. Periodically clean exposed surf aces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering to remove fingerprints and soil during constructi on period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces w ith water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. C. Protect louvers and vents from damage during construction. Use temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering at the time of Substantial Completion. D. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determin ed by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. END OF SECTION 10200
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 3. Fire-protection accessories. 4. Fire protections soffits: Spectis Moulders, Inc.; 1-800-685-9981; moulded high density polyurethane architectural products; custom product per fire protection interior soffit shown on drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed cabinet finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material i ndicated for the Work. If finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1. Size: 6-by-6-inch- (150-by-150-mm-) square Samples. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire ex tinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers." C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type , rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Maintenance: Provide filled-out Department of Tr ansportation certificate #B-927, inspection tag, on each extinguisher.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with re quirements, provide products by the following: 1. Portable Fire Extinguishers: Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Break Glass: Clear annealed float glass, ASTM C 1 036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick, single strength. C. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick. D. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished) or Finish 2 (patterned, textured). E. Acrylic Bubble: One piece. 2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, si ze, and capacity for each cabinet and other locations indicated. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg) nominal capacity, in enameled- steel container. 2.5 FIRE PROTECTION SOFFITS A. Manufacturer: Spectis Moulders, Inc.; 1-800-685-9981 B. Product: Moulded high density polyurethane architectural products; custom product per fire protection interior soffit shown on drawings. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of sizes required for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets. 2. Provide brackets for extinguishers located in cabinets. B. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with au thorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to door.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado a. Application Proce ss: Silk-screened. b. Lettering Color: Red. c. Orientation: Vertical. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Va riations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the ra nge of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other com ponents are acceptable if th ey are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL 1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: a. Exterior of cabinet door, and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet and door. 2. Aluminum: Color anodic. a. Color: Dark bronze. 3. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat. a. Color and Gloss: Dark Bronze. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves, hose racks, and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation. B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable frami ng depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets are to be installed. C. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. D. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE S OUTH Vail, Colorado 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructi ons for installing fire-protection specialties. B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indi cated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to structure and cabinets, square and plumb. 3. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 10520
LERCH BATES INC. ELECTR IC TRACTION ELEVATORS Elevator Consulting Group TABLE OF CONTENTS INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS 00020 .. REQUEST FOR QU OTATION ...................................................................................................00020-1 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO PROVIDERS ............................................................................................001 00-1 FORMS 00310 QUOTATION FORM ..................................................................................................................00310-1 CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT 00800 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS ...............................................................................................00 800-1 SPECIFICATIONS 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK ...............................................................................................................01010-1 01040 PROJECT PROCEDURES ........................................................................................................01040-1 01300 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................................01300-1 01600 MATERIAL A ND HANDLI NG .....................................................................................................01600-1 01700 FINAL CONTRACT COMP LIANCE REVI EW ............................................................................01700-1 01800 MAINTE NANCE .........................................................................................................................01800-1 01900 RELATE D WORK ......................................................................................................................01900-1 14210 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVAT OR (PROVIDE NEW).............................................................14210-1 14220 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVAT OR (MODERNIZA TION) ........................................................14220-1
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group REQUEST FOR QUOTATION SECTION 00020 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 1.01 PROJECT: ELEVATOR MODERNIZATI ON AND NEW INST ALLATION ........................................ 1 1.02 CONTRACT DO CUMENTS ............................................................................................................... 1 1.03 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE .......................................................................................................... 1 1.04 SEALED QUOTATION ....................................................................................................................... 1 1.05 NOTICE OF INTENT TO SUBMIT A QUOTATION ........................................................................... 2 1.06 OPENING ........................................................................................................................................... 3 1.07 QUOTATION ...................................................................................................................................... 3 1.08 PURCHASER’S RIGHTS ................................................................................................................... 3 1.09 INVITED CONT RACTORS ................................................................................................................ 3
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group REQUEST FOR QUOTATION JANUARY 7, 2008 00020 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 SECTION 00020 REQUEST FOR QUOTATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT: ELEVATOR MODERNI ZATION AND NEW INSTALLATION LION SQUARE LODGE 660 WEST LIONSHEAD PLACE VAIL, COLORADO A. Lerch Bates Inc. has been authorized by The Resort Company to invite your firm to submit a quotation for: 1. All engineering, labor, materials, transpor tation, services and equipment necessary and reasonably incidental to perform work required by Contract Documents. 2. Interim preventive maintenance. 3. Warranty preventive maintenance. 4. Continuing preventive maintenance subsequent to completion of work. 1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. 1 set of Contract Documents are provided for your use. B. Additional sets of Contract Documents are avail able at cost of reproduction and mailing from Lerch Bates Inc. by contacting Ms. Claudia Forster at 720-283-8182. C. Make inquiries to Lerch Bates Inc. Do not c ontact building personnel or the Purchaser, with the exception of requirement of item 1.02 D. D. Permission to review existing equipment and site co nditions shall be secured from Mr. Bill Anderson at 970-477-4432. 1.03 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE See Section 00310, “Quotation Form” for project schedule. 1.04 SEALED QUOTATION A. Quotations will be received until 2:00 p.m. prev ailing local time on January 25, 2008, in sealed envelope addressed and identified as follows:
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group REQUEST FOR QUOTATION JANUARY 7, 2008 00020 - 2 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 Contractor Address City/State/Zip ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION Lion Square Lodge 660 West Lionshead Place Vail, Colorado CONFIDENTIAL - SEALED QUOTATION - DO NOT OPEN Send two copies to: The Resort Company Vail Valley Division 660 West Lionshead Place, Vail, CO 81657 Mr. Bill Anderson, Vice President Send one copy to: Lerch Bates Inc. 7899 S. Lincoln Court., Suite 204, Littleton, CO 80122 Mr. Jeff Marsh Send one copy to: Melick Associates Inc. 355 S. Teller Street, Suite 370, Lakewood, CO 80226 Mr. Chip Melick B. Quotations must be submitted on form provided as a part of Contract Documents, Section 00310. Quotations shall be subject to all requirements of Contract Documents, site conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary and Special Conditions an d any other documents issued in connection with project. All blank spaces and questions on the quotation form must be completed and/or responded to. Failure to comply will constitute a non-responsive submittal. C. If Contractor desires to furnish items differently t han specified, Contractor shall submit substitution as an alternate quotation. Contractor shall supply Cons ultant with information in regard to proposed substitution of components or materials. Consultant shall decide whether the Contractor’s substitution is equal to that specified. Deviation from requi rements of Contract Documents shall be stated, in writing, in Contractor’s transmittal letter submitted with quotation. 1.05 NOTICE OF INTENT TO SUBMIT A QUOTATION Quotations have been invited from a limited number of pre-approved Contractors. Contractors, having reviewed Contract Documents and site conditions, who elect not to provide a quotation, shall notify Consultant no later than ten (10) working days prior to quotation due date. Failure to submit a quotation without prior notice will be construed as justifiable ca use for elimination of such Contractor for future consideration.
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group REQUEST FOR QUOTATION JANUARY 7, 2008 00020 - 3 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 1.06 OPENING A. Opening of quotations will be in private. Contract or selection will be based upon the following criteria: 1. Cost of required work. 2. Cost of interim maintenance. 3. Cost of warranty maintenance. 4. Cost of contract preventive maintenance. 5. Completion schedule. 6. Contractor’s successful completion of similar pr ojects and track record in the general location of project. 7. Contractor’s maintenance capability in the general location of the project. 1.07 QUOTATION A. All quotations shall be firm. Escalation will not be pe rmitted if Contract is awarded within 90 days from quotation due date. B. If award is deferred beyond 90 days, Contractors’ quotations shall be subject to adjustment to reflect changes in the cost of labor and material. 1.08 PURCHASER’S RIGHTS A. Purchaser reserves right to reject any or all quotations, to accept other than lowest quotation and to waive any informality in connection with opening and award of Contract. 1.09 INVITED CONTRACTORS Company KONE, Inc. Address 3 Inverness Drive East, Englewood, CO 80112-5519 Phone Number 303-792-3423 Contact Person Mr. Gary Kunz Email: gary.kunz@kone.com Company Otis Elevator Company Address 700 W. Mississippi Avenue, Unit E-1, Denver, CO 80223-4510 Phone Number 303-298-9300 Contact Person Mr. Dan Holton Email: dan.holton@otis.com Company Schindler Elevator Corporation Address 6950 W. Jefferson Avenue, Su ite 210, Lakewood, CO 80235-2334 Phone Number 303-777-5020 Contact Person Mr. Doug Crane Email: doug.crane@us.schindler.com Company ThyssenKrupp Elevator Company Address 960 Chambers Avenue, Suite B201, Eagle, CO 81631 Phone Number 970-328-5955 Contact Person: Mr. David Andrews Email: david.andrews@thyssenkrupp.com
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group REQUEST FOR QUOTATION JANUARY 7, 2008 00020 - 4 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 Contractor shall be prepared to provide evidence of ex perience, qualifications and financial ability to carry out requirements of Contract Documents. If Contractor’s contact person is other than indicated above, Contractor shall notify Consultant within five (5) days of receipt of this Request for Quotation. END OF SECTION
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group IN STRUCTIONS TO PROVIDER SECTION 00100 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 1.01 EXAMINATION................................................................................................................................... 1 1.02 EXISTING MAINTENANCE CONTRACT .......................................................................................... 1
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group IN STRUCTIONS TO PROVIDER JANUARY 7, 2008 00100 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO PROVIDER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 EXAMINATION A. In order to discover and resolve conflicts or la ck of definition which might create problems, Provider must review Contract Documents, existing site conditions, and existing equipment specified to be retained for compatibility with its product prior to subm itting quotation. Site review shall include, but not be limited to adequacy of access, retained equipm ent, elevator hoistways, pits, machine rooms, overhead clearances, electrical power characterist ics, structural supports, etc. Investigation and structural calculations required to determine comp liance of existing elevator components including machine support beams, with ASME A17.1, Rule 8.7.2.15.2, are responsibility of Provider. Compliance with all provisions of Contract Documents is assu med and required. If written exception is acceptable to Purchaser and Consultant, an Addendum to the specif ications will be issued. Purchaser will not pay for change to building structure, structural supports, mechanical, electrical or other systems required to accommodate Provider’s equipment if not identified be fore Contract award and authorized as stipulated above. B. Submission of quotation is considered evidence t hat Provider has visited and is conversant with the site facilities, site conditions, requirements of the Contract Documents, pertinent state and local codes, state of labor and material markets, and has made due allowance in his quotation for all contingencies. Should Provider’s investigation of site conditions, or local codes or rules reveal requirements contrary to Contract Documents, or if Provider finds any di screpancies or omissions from Contract Documents, or if Provider is in doubt as to their meaning, he sha ll contact the Consultant for clarification at least five working days prior to quotation due date. C. No oral explanation will be made and no oral inst ructions will be given before quotation due date. Provider shall act promptly and allow sufficient time for a reply to reach him before submission of its quotation. Any required interpretation or supplemental instructions will be issued in the form of an addendum to the specifications and forwar ded to all pre-qualified Providers. D. Provide everything necessary for and incidental to the satisfactory completion of work required by Contract Documents. All required preparations and hoisting and movement of new equipment, reused equipment, or removal of existing equipment shall be the responsibility of Provider. 1.02 EXISTING MAINTENANCE CONTRACT A. If Provider currently providing equipment maintenan ce under contract with Purchaser is included on the list of invited Providers for this Contract, Provider acknowledges and agrees that said contract shall be immediately null and void upon award of this Contract to Provider or alternate invited Provider. Further, if present Maintenance Provider is not the successf ul firm in regard to this Contract, Maintenance Provider agrees to deliver existing as modified control wiring diagrams to Purchaser and immediately remove its equipment and materials from the premises with the Purchaser or Purchasers’ representative present. Purchaser shall withhold final maintenance payment due until Maintenance Provider is in compliance with this requirement. END OF SECTION
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group QUOTATION FORM SECTION 00310 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 2 1.01 PROVIDER’S BASE QUOTATION .................................................................................................... 2 1.02 ADDENDA .......................................................................................................................................... 3 1.03 PROVIDER’S OTHER SUPPO RTING ENCLOS URES ..................................................................... 3 1.04 PURCHASER’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ............................................................................... 3 1.05 PROVIDER’S LIST OF SU PPLIERS/SUBPR OVIDERS ................................................................... 3 1.06 SUBMISSION AND ACCEPTA NCE OF QUOT ATIONS ................................................................... 3 1.07 PROVIDER SI GNATURE .................................................................................................................. 4
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group QUOTATION FORM JANUARY 7, 2008 00310 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 SECTION 00310 QUOTATION FORM DATE: PROJECT: LION SQUARE LODGE 660 WEST LIONSHEAD PLACE, VAIL, CO 81657 SUBMITTED BY: Name of PROVIDER PROVIDER’S Representative Telephone Number Street Address City State Zip Code TO: The Resort Company Vail Valley Division 660 West Lionshead Place Vail, CO 81657 A ttn: Mr. Bill Anderson Lerch Bates Inc. CC: 7899 S. Lincoln Court, Suite 204 Littleton, CO 80122 A ttn: Mr. Jeff Marsh CC: Melick Associates Inc. 355 S. Teller Street, Suite 370 Lakewood, CO 80226 A ttn: Mr. Chip Melick
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group QUOTATION FORM JANUARY 7, 2008 00310 - 2 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROVIDER’S BASE QUOTATION A. Having examined documents prepared by Lerch Bates Inc. dated January 7, 2008, and having reviewed site conditions, applicable codes and a ll conditions affecting and governing the work, the Undersigned Provider hereby offers to provide all engineering, labor, materials, transportation, services and equipment necessary and incidental to properly ex ecute required work of the Contract Documents for the sum of: ITEM 1: MODERNIZE PASSENGER ELEVATOR #1 (SECTION 14220) DOLLARS ($ ) ITEM 2 PROVIDE NEW PASSENGER ELEVATOR #2 (SECTION 14210) DOLLARS ($ ) B. MAINTENANCE 1. Interim Maintenance: We agree to furnish interim, preventive maintenance during the period from written award of this Contract or verbal not ice to proceed until all required work is complete for following amount per month per unit: Passenger Elevators 1 and 2 $ /Month/Unit NOTE: Do not include the cost of interim maintenance in “A” above, Base Quotations. 2. 12-Month Warranty Preventive Maintenance: Amount included in base quotation Items A, 1 and 2 above. $ Total Included in Item A. Passenger Elevators 1 and 2 $ /Month NOTE: Purchaser reserves the right to pay warr anty maintenance cost in a lump sum or on a monthly basis during period maintenance is actually performed. C. Enter a cost figure for all pricing requested. Failu re to comply subjects quotation to disqualification. D. Undersigned affirms that quotations provided re present entire cost including site conditions, code requirements, drawings, specifications, addenda, and any other Contract Documents, and no claim will be made due to any increase in wage scales, material prices, taxes, insurance, cost indexes or any other factors affecting the construction industry or th is project except as expressly allowed in Owner’s maintenance contract.
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group QUOTATION FORM JANUARY 7, 2008 00310 - 3 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 1.02 ADDENDA Undersigned acknowledges receipt of Addendum No. .......... thr ough ........... 1.03 PROVIDER’S OTHER SUPPORTING ENCLOSURES A. Undersigned has enclosed the following (Circle YES/NO): 1. Separate letter containing any “Qualificat ion” related to its Quotation. YES / NO 1.04 PURCHASER’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE UNIT START WORK DATE COMPLETION DATE ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... Note: Start work date is date existing unit is removed from service for modernization. 1.05 PROVIDER’S LIST OF SUPPLIERS/SUBPROVIDERS The undersigned Provider will utilize the following supplie rs/subcontractors for major components of work and submits these firms for approval. Upon accept ance of these Suppliers/Sub-Contractors by Purchaser/Consultant, no substitutions shall be made without written approval of Consultant. Suppliers/Subcontractor Name Component/Type of Work (Use back of page if necessary) 1.06 SUBMISSION AND ACC EPTANCE OF QUOTATIONS A. Undersigned Provider agrees to Purchaser’s right to reject any and all quotations without explanation. B. Undersigned Provider declares that preparatio n and submission of quotations herein contained do not obligate Purchaser or Consultant in any way. C. Undersigned Provider agrees and understands that Purchaser assumes no obligation to enter into a Contract.
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group QUOTATION FORM JANUARY 7, 2008 00310 - 4 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 1.07 PROVIDER SIGNATURE DATE: SIGNED: TITLE: NAME OF FIRM: STATE LICENSE NO.: LEGAL ADDRESS: ORGANIZED AS A (MARK ONE): ( ) INDIVIDUAL ( ) PARTNERSHIP ( ) CORPORATION UNDER STATE LAW OF TELEPHONE: - - (SEAL) END OF SECTION
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS SECTION 00800 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 1.01 DEFINITION OF TERMS ................................................................................................................... 1 1.02 CONSULTANT’S STATUS ................................................................................................................ 1 1.03 CONTRA CT ....................................................................................................................................... 2 1.04 MEASUREMENTS AND DRAWINGS ............................................................................................... 2 1.05 CODES AND O RDINANCES ............................................................................................................. 2 1.06 PROVIDER’S INSURA NCE ............................................................................................................... 2 1.07 PURCHASER IN SURANCE .............................................................................................................. 3 1.08 TAXES, OLD AGE PENSIONS AND UN EMPLOYMENT IN SURANCE ........................................... 3 1.09 LABOR LA WS .................................................................................................................................... 3 1.10 PATENTS ........................................................................................................................................... 3 1.11 ASSIGNMENTS ................................................................................................................................. 4 1.12 ADVERTISING ................................................................................................................................... 4 1.13 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PRO PERTY .................................................................................... 4 1.14 ACCIDENT REPORTS ...................................................................................................................... 5 1.15 STORAGE OF MATERIALS .............................................................................................................. 5 1.16 REMOVAL OF EQUIPMEN T AND RUBBISH ................................................................................... 5 1.17 MATERIALS AND WO RKMANSHIP ................................................................................................. 5 1.18 SUPERVISION ................................................................................................................................... 5 1.19 ROUTINE BU SINESS ........................................................................................................................ 5 1.20 CHANGES AND EXTRA WORK ........................................................................................................ 5 1.21 PAYMENTS ........................................................................................................................................ 5 1.22 PAYMENT WITHHELD ...................................................................................................................... 6 1.23 LIENS AND A FFIDAVITS .................................................................................................................. 6 1.24 CLAIMS FOR EXT RA COST ............................................................................................................. 6 1.25 DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME ............................................................................................... 6 1.26 PERMITS ........................................................................................................................................... 7 PART 2 SPECIAL CONDITI ONS ................................................................................................................................. 7 2.01 PROGRESS OF WORK ..................................................................................................................... 7 APPENDIX "A" 1 PAYMENT REQUEST FORM ............................................................................................................................... 2 PROGRESS REPO RT FORM .............................................................................................................................. 3
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS JANUARY 7, 2008 00800 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 SECTION 0800 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITION OF TERMS A. Term ELEVATOR CONSULTANT or CONSULTANT as used herein, refers to Lerch Bates Inc., (Lerch Bates). B. PURCHASER as used herein, refers to The Resort Company C. The term CONTRACT or CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, as used herein, consists of the Agreement, Conditions of Contract, Specifications, Addenda, Dr awings if included, and Alternates if accepted. D. PROVIDER or ELEVATOR PROVID ER, as used herein, refers to any persons, partners, firm or corporation having a contract with Purchaser to furn ish labor and materials for the execution of work required. E. CONTRACT AWARD, as used herein, refers to Purc haser’s verbal or written award for work required. F. SUBCONTRACTOR, as used herein , refers to any persons, partners, firm or corporation having a contract with Provider to furnish labor and materials for the execution of work required. G. As used in these Contract Documents, “provi de” shall be understood to mean “furnish and install.” H. As used in these Contract Documents, “retain or reuse existing” shall be understood to mean restore existing components or parts to like-new condition. I. Words in the singular shall include the plur al whenever applicable or context so indicates. J. All technical terms in these Cont ract Documents have their definition given in latest edition of American National Standard Safety Code for Elevators, Du mbwaiters, Escalators and Moving Walks ASME A17.1 and A17.2. 1.02 CONSULTANT’S STATUS A. Consultant shall act as Purchaser’s and/or Building Management’s representative on all matters pertaining to required work. Consultant shall in terpret Contract Documents, analyze Provider’s quotations, review Provider suggested alternates, re view all submittals of Provider, approve billings, review technical details and construction procedur e, perform work progress reviews and review and test completed work for compliance with Contract Documents prior to acceptance of work by Purchaser. B. Field Review Scheduling: Schedule progress and final work reviews with Consultant. Reply promptly, in writing, to corrective work indicated on Consultant ’s progress and/or final review reports, indicating status, and schedule for completion. Consultant anticipates scheduled site review appointments will be met. Provider’s price will be reduced to reimburse Consultant at its normal billing rates for appointments not kept, or for additional follow up reviews required due to Provider’s gross non compliance with previous review requirements.
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS JANUARY 7, 2008 00800 - 2 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 1.03 CONTRACT A. Contract includes all engineering, labor, tools and material required to complete the work in every respect, except those items specifically indicated to be done by other trades, Section 01900. Provider is cautioned to familiarize itself with existing site c onditions and to include all incidental work that might occur or be required during the work. After Contract has been awarded, verbally or in writing, no extra charges will be allowed for any labor or material ne cessary to complete required work whether exactly described in these specifications herein or not, as lo ng as such work, labor and material are required to accomplish desired effect and results. B. Any discrepancies or ambiguities found in Contra ct Document or drawings shall be reported to the Consultant prior to Provider’s quotation submittal. 1.04 MEASUREMENTS AND DRAWINGS Drawings or measurements included with Contract Docu ments are for convenience of Provider. Complete responsibility for detailed dimensions lies with Provider. Pr ovider shall verify all dimensions with the actual on site conditions. Where work of Provider is to join ano ther trade, Provider’s shop drawings shall show actual dimensions and method of joining work of those trades. 1.05 CODES AND ORDINANCES All work covered by these Contract Documents is to be done in full accord with national code, state and local codes, ordinances and elevator safety orders as are in effect at time of Contract award. All requirements of local Building Department and fire jurisdiction are to be fu lfilled by Provider and its Subcontractors. Also see Section 01040, Article 1.01. 1.06 PROVIDER’S INSURANCE A. Provider shall take out and maintain during the lif e of this Contract Worker’s Compensation Insurance with statutory limits set by the State of Co lorado laws for protection of its employees. B. Provider shall carry a comprehensive general liability policy including completed operations blanket contractual broad form property damage, and Purcha ser’s and Provider’s protective liability in a casualty or liability insura nce company acceptable to Purchaser. Insurance po licy shall fully protect Provider, its Subcontractors, Purchaser and Consultant from all loss and liability. C. Provider shall not commence work under this Contract until it has obtained all insurance required hereunder and certificate of such insurance has been filed with and approved by Purchaser. Provider will name the Purchaser/Building Management and Consul tant as additionally insured for this project. Provider shall provide insurance policy coverage until all work covered by this Contract is completed and accepted by Purchaser. Minimum insurance coverage as follows: TYPE OF COVERAGE LIMITS OF LIABILITY WORKMEN’S COMPENSATION STATUTORY EMPLOYER’S LIABILITY $1,000,000 COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY $2,000,000 SINGLE LIMIT CO MBINED BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS JANUARY 7, 2008 00800 - 3 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 TYPE OF COVERAGE LIMITS OF LIABILITY COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY BODILY INJURY PROPERTY DAMAGE $500,000 EACH PERSON $1,000,000 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 EACH OCCURRENCE D. Provider shall file with Purchas er a certificate of insurance from its insurance company, stating that such insurance is being carried and that Purchaser will be notified at least 10 days prior to any cancellation of said insurance. 1.07 PURCHASER INSURANCE Purchaser’s insurance policy covers work and equipm ent in place in building and approved and accepted by Consultant and Purchaser. All material and equipment st ored on site and not actually installed is not included in Purchaser’s policy and such material and equipment shall be covered under Provider’s Property Damage Insurance. 1.08 TAXES, OLD AGE PENSIONS AND UNEMPLOYMENT INSURANCE Provider’s quotations for required work, materials a nd equipment shall include all local, state and federal occupational and sales taxes, luxury taxes, excise taxes, federal and state old age pensions and unemployment insurance contributions, and any other sim ilar taxes and contributions in effect at time of award of Contract (verbally or in writing). Provi der shall be liable for aforementioned taxes whether or not specifically included in his quotation or in final Contra ct Document. In event additional sales or use taxes are imposed after award of Contract, such sales or use ta xes are to be paid, in addition to original Contract amount, by Purchaser to Provider, who in turn is to pa y them to proper authorities. Reciprocally, if any of above mentioned taxes or contributions in effect at ti me of award of Contract should be revoked before consummation of Contract, Provider shall rebate Purchas er amount of taxes included in original quotation and Contract. Where required by law, amount of the tax is to be specifically stated in Provider’s quotation; however, failing to do so will not relieve Provider fr om responsibility for assu mption of these taxes. 1.09 LABOR LAWS Provider and its Subcontractors performing work under th is Contract shall comply with applicable provisions of all federal, state and local labor laws. 1.10 PATENTS A. Provider shall save and hold harmless Purchase r and its officers, agents, servants, employees and Consultant, from liability of any nature or kind on account of any patented or unpatented invention, process, article or appliance manufactured or used in performance of Contract, including its use by Purchaser including all cost and expenses for defendi ng any suits unless otherwise specifically stipulated in Contract Documents. B. Licenses which may be required for completion of required work are to be obtained and paid for by the Provider.
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS JANUARY 7, 2008 00800 - 4 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 1.11 ASSIGNMENTS Neither party to this Contract shall assign Contract or sublet it as a whole wit hout written consent of other party, nor shall Provider assign any payment due him or to become due to him hereunder without previous written consent of Purchaser. 1.12 ADVERTISING Advertising privileges will be retained by Purchaser. It is the duty of Provider to keep premises free from posters, signs, decorations, etc., unless specifically approved by Purchaser. 1.13 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Provider shall continuously maintain adequate pr otection of all its work from damage and shall protect Purchaser property from injury or loss arising out of this Contract. Provider shall make good any such damages, injury or loss, except such as may be directly caused by agent s, subcontractors, or employees of the Purchaser. Provider shall prov ide all barricades required to protect open hoistways or shafts per OSHA regulations. Design of barrica des in public areas shall be approved by Purchaser prior to fabrication and installation. B. If Contract includes work which would be disrupt ive during normal business operations, or would be dangerous to building occupants, said work shall be performed during hours as building management dictates. Examples of such work include, without limitation, saw cutting of concrete, jack hammering, welding, metal cutting, pouring concrete, erecting st eel or hoisting equipment over occupied portions of the building or performing tests requiring all elevators in a group. Provider shall perform such work during off-hours and shall include all costs in its quotation. C. Provider shall install a suitable protective coveri ng on all finished floors (whether marble, wood, carpet or other) in areas where work is being performed. No material handling equipment shall be permitted on or over finished floors unless said floors ha ve been protected in a manner approved by building management. D. Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided through out Provider’s area of work and shall be placed so as to be accessible at all times. Extinguishers sha ll be multi-purpose dry chemical type, provided on a basis of one 2A-20BC rated unit for each 3,000 square feet of floor area. Extinguishers to remain property of Provider. E. Provider shall at all times maintain work areas so that all portions are accessible to fire department personnel and apparatus. Fire hydrants and fire depa rtment connections to building sprinkler systems must be kept free from obstruction at all times. F. Provider shall strictly supervise any welding, metal cutting or other operations employing open flame work. All welding and cutting equipment shall be safely arranged and all combustibles in vicinity of any work being performed shall either be removed or prot ected by a noncombustible cover. Welding or cutting shall be attended by an assistant or fire watchman who is equipped with at least one 2A-20BC rated multi-purpose dry chemical fire extinguisher. Fire watchman will maintain strict surveillance during entire welding or cutting operation and extinguish flying sparks or burning slag. After welding or cutting operation, fire watchman shall thoroughly search entire area for remnants of smoldering materials before he is released from his duty. Any welding or other operation employing open flame in any portion of building shall be scheduled with and receive approval of Purchaser. G. Provider shall keep noise level below 80 db level dur ing normal building hours. When it is necessary to produce noise above this level, Provider shall adv ise building management of such needs and times
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS JANUARY 7, 2008 00800 - 5 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 will be scheduled as directed. The Provider sha ll anticipate and schedule excessive noise generating procedures and include allowance for same in its quotation and schedule. 1.14 ACCIDENT REPORTS In the event of accidents of any kind, Provider shall fu rnish Purchaser with copies of all accident reports. Reports shall be sent without delay and at same time that they are forwarded to any other parties. 1.15 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Provider shall confine storage of materials on job site to limits approved by Purchaser and shall not unnecessarily encumber premises or overload any portion of building with materials to a greater extent than structure design load. 1.16 REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT AND RUBBISH Provider shall remove and properly dispose of all rubbish, as fast as it accumulates including all existing parts and components not retained, keeping building and premises clean during progress of work and leave premises at completion in a condition acceptable to the Purchaser. All parts and components not retained shall become property of Provider. 1.17 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP All materials and equipment furnished shall be new and best quality. Installation shall be accurate, workmanlike and subject to approval of Consultant. All materials and equipment provided shall conform to regulations of enforcement bodies having jurisdiction. Provider shall furnish material samples for approval. 1.18 SUPERVISION Provider shall assign a competent Project Manager, superintendent and on-site foreman for project satisfactory to Purchaser and Consultant. Such persons shall represent Provider and all instructions given to them shall be binding as if given to Provider. 1.19 ROUTINE BUSINESS After award of Contract, all business relating to requi red work shall be transacted through Consultant, unless otherwise directed. 1.20 CHANGES AND EXTRA WORK Purchaser may at any time make changes to Contract Documents, plans and drawings, omit work or require additional work by Provider. For such additional work performed hereunder, Purchaser shall pay Provider on the basis of a mutually agreed lump sum. See Articl e 1.25 for method of computing lump sum cost of additional work. Provider shall make no additions, chang es, alterations or omissions, or perform extra work, without receipt of written authorization of Purchaser. 1.21 PAYMENTS A. Unless otherwise agreed, Provider shall submit monthly applications for payment together with necessary data, information, waiver s and affidavits to Consultant. Co nsultant shall review data for accuracy and forward such applications to Purchase r for payment. Information shall be submitted with payment request and work progress forms include d at the end of this section as Appendix “A.”
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS JANUARY 7, 2008 00800 - 6 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 B. Applications for payments are to cover 90% of t he value of labor performed and material installed and delivered during the preceding month. C. Balance (retention) shall be paid by Purchaser upo n final acceptance of entire work by Consultant and Purchaser and after performance guarantees have b een satisfactorily demonstrated. See Section 01700, Article 1.02, D-G. 1.22 PAYMENT WITHHELD A. Purchaser and/or Consultant may withhold approval of payment on any Provider request to such extent as may be necessary to protect Purc haser from loss on account of: 1. Believed negligence on part of Provider to ex ecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of Contract. Purchaser, after 30 days’ written notice to Provider, may without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct its cost from the overall Contract sum. 2. Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims by other Providers or Subcontractors. 3. Failure of Provider to make proper payments to its material suppliers or Subcontractors for material and labor. 4. A reasonable doubt that required work can be co mpleted by Provider for balance then unpaid or in Contract time frame. 5. Provider’s damage to building or another Provider. B. When the above grounds are removed, pay ment shall be made in full, less retention. 1.23 LIENS AND AFFIDAVITS Neither final payment nor any part of billing retentio n shall become due until Provider shall deliver to Purchaser a complete release of all liens arising out of this Contract, or receipts marked paid in full in lieu thereof. In addition, Provider shall furnish an affidavit to Purchaser that so far as he has knowledge or information, releases or receipts include all labor and materials for which a lien could be filed. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made by Purcha ser, Provider shall refund to Purchaser all monies the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such a lien, including all costs and reasonable attorney’s fees. 1.24 CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST Provider claims for extra cost due to additions or change s to required work shall be submitted to Consultant in writing within a reasonable time after such additions or changes identified or are requested and in any event before proceeding with required work. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. Maximum charge for additions/changes to work shall be Provider cost +1 0% handling fee + overhead and profit. Providers cost shall be verifiable from actual supplier in voices, purchase orders, time tickets, etc. 1.25 DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME If Provider progress is delayed due to acts of Purchaser or Consultant, acts of ot her Providers, fire, floods, strikes or other casualties beyond the c ontrol or without fault or negligence of Provider, time for completion of the work shall be extended for a period determined by Cons ultant to be equivalent to time of such delay. Provider must notify Consultant, in writing, of such delay within 48 hours after delay commences, or no extension of time will be granted. Extension of time wit hout written request within said period on one or more occasions shall not be deemed a waiver of provisions of this article.
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS JANUARY 7, 2008 00800 - 7 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 1.26 PERMITS Provider shall obtain and pay for or cause its Subcontr actor to obtain and pay for all permits required to complete required work. In addition, Provider shall a rrange, schedule and pay for or cause its Subcontractors to arrange, schedule and pay for all required final insp ections by state, local or independent certified inspecting authorities necessary for issuance of a ll required Purchaser utilization permits in regard to completed work. PART 2 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 2.01 PROGRESS OF WORK A. Upon award, verbally or in writ ing, Provider shall reconfirm in wr iting, starting and completion schedule including equipment delivery dates based upon the in formation submitted on its quotation form, Section 00310. B. Provider shall submit in writing, monthly r eports with payment request, including current equipment delivery dates and anticipated completion dates for individual units and groups of units. C. Project Manual: Upon award, verbally or in writi ng, Provider shall prepare three project manuals neatly bound in a three ring binder. One manual shall be retained by Provider, one provided to Purchaser and one provided to Consultant. The manuals shall contai n the following information and sections identified in an index with numbered divisions. 1. Project Specification, revised if required to indi cate basis of award. (While maintaining original text and clearly identifying revision.) 2. Provider completed Bid Form, specification Sect ion 00310. Include copy of original submission and any revisions. 3. Alternate quotations indicating Pu rchaser acceptance or rejection. 4. Purchaser’s executed Contract. 5. Initial project schedule with estimated ve rsus actual milestone dates. Include schedule revisions. 6. Project payment requests including verification of payment and lien releases. 7. Code acceptance. 8. Purchaser’s temporary acceptance documents 9. Purchaser’s final acceptance documents. 10. Consultants progress review comments and requirements. 11. Consultant’s final Contract review comments and requirements. 12. Shop drawing submittals, includi ng set(s) with review remarks. 13. As built drawings, including control wiring diagrams. A second manual shall include the identical sectio n numbers and shall be identified and utilized for general correspondence on these subjects. Additional sections shall include correspondence not specifically identified by one of these sections. An index in front of this section shall number and identify source of correspondence and subject. Provider shall maintain all six manuals in an up-to-dat e condition. Prior to final payment, Provider shall deliver to Purchaser the documents in Items 1, 2, and 3 above on computer disk. END OF SECTION
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS JANUARY 7, 2008 00800 - A1 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 APPENDIX "A"
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS JANUARY 7, 2008 00800 - A2 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 PAYMENT REQUEST FORM ELEVATOR COMPANY: PAYMENT REQUEST NO.: DATE: JOB: CONTRACT NO.: WE HEREBY APPLY FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT: $ LESS 12 MONTH WARRANTY COST CHANGE ORDERS NO.: : $ : $ : $ SUBTOTAL: $ VALUE OF CONTRACT PROGRESS TO DATE PER BREAKDOWN ATTACHED: $ LESS 10% RESERVE PER CONTRACT: $ LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS: $ LESS PAYMENTS NOT RECEIVED: $ NET AMOUNT APPLICATION: $
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS JANUARY 7, 2008 00800 - A3 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 PROGRESS REPORT FORM BUILDING: TRACTION ELEV(S).: ELEVATOR COMPANY: ITEM TOTAL MATERIAL PRICE % COMP BILLING TOTAL LABOR PRICE % COMP BILLING TOTAL ADJUSTING MISC. BOND HOIST MACHINE DRIVE UNIT CONTROLLER DEFLECTOR SHEAVE GOVERNOR & ROPE HOIST ROPES GUIDE RAILS & BRACKETS BUFFERS ENTRANCES, SILLS, & HARDWARE SLING & PLATFORM COUNTERWEIGHT SAFETY COMPENSATION GUIDES ENCLOSURE
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS JANUARY 7, 2008 00800 - A4 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 PROGRESS REPORT FORM (T RACTION ELEVATORS PG. 2…) ITEM TOTAL MATERIAL PRICE % COMP BILLING TOTAL LABOR PRICE % COMP BILLING TOTAL DOOR OPERATOR HARDWARE & PROTECTION SIGNAL FIXTURES WIRING ADJUSTING MISC. REVIEWED BY LERCH BATES APPROVED FOR PAYMENT NAME PURCHASER DATE DATE APPROVED REJECTED SEE ATTACHED REVIEW COMMENTS
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01010 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONT RACT DOCUMENTS .......................................................................... 1 1.02 PRIME PROVIDER’S DUTIES ........................................................................................................... 1 1.03 WORK SEQUENCE ........................................................................................................................... 1 1.04 PROVIDER USE OF PREMISES ...................................................................................................... 2 1.05 CONCURRENT MODERNIZA TION WORK AND BUIL DING OPERATION ..................................... 2
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUMMARY OF WORK JANUARY 7, 2008 01010 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Modernize Elevator #1 and prov ide new Passenger Elevator #2. B. Provide all labor, engineering, tools, transportati on, services, supervision, materials and equipment necessary for and incidental to satisfactory completi on of required work as indicated in Contract Documents. C. Provide all required staging, hoisting and movem ent of new equipment, reused equipment, or removal of existing equipment. D. Applicable conditions of Purchaser’s General, Special, and Supplemental Conditions. E. Prime contracts are defined below and each is rec ognized to be a major part of required work to be performed concurrently in close coordina tion with work of other Providers. 1. This Contract: Elevator Modernization and New Installation. F. Scope of Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Coordination, scheduling and management of work of component suppliers and subcontractors. 2. Modernize or furnish and install equipment as specified utilizing existing and/or modified hoistways and machine rooms or newly constructed hoistways and machine rooms. 3. Specific item of required work which cannot be determined to be included in another contract is thereby determined to be included in prime contract. 1.02 PRIME PROVIDER’S DUTIES A. Prime Provider’s duties include the following: 1. Provide and pay for labor, materials a nd equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery and other facilities and services ne cessary for proper execution and completion of required work. 2. Pay for legally required sales, consumer and state remodel taxes. 3. Secure and pay for required permits, fees and licenses necessary for proper execution and completion of required work, as applicable at time of quotation due date. 4. Give required notices. 5. Comply with codes, ordinances, rules, regul ations, orders and other legal requirements of public authorities which bear on performance of required work. 6. Promptly submit written notice to Consultant of observed variance of Contract Documents from legal requirements. 7. Enforce strict discipline and good order among em ployees. Do not employ persons unskilled in assigned task. 1.03 WORK SEQUENCE Construct work in stages. Description and proposed se quence dates are as listed on Quotation Form Section 00310.
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUMMARY OF WORK JANUARY 7, 2008 01010 - 2 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 1.04 PROVIDER USE OF PREMISES A. Confine operations at site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, Contract Documents, and Purchasers specific instructions. B. Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials or equipment. Staging area will be located as directed by Purchaser. C. Do not load structure with weight that w ill endanger structure. Coor dinate with Purchaser. D. Assume full responsibility for protection and sa fekeeping of tools and products stored on or off premises. E. Move stored products which interfere with operatio ns of building or the operations of other trades. F. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations. 1.05 CONCURRENT MODERNIZATION WORK AND BUILDING OPERATION A. This project is a major elevator modernization in an existing building which is open for public business and will continue to operate throughout all phases of requi red work. It is essential that Provider give special attention and priority to all matters concer ning project safety, protection from dust and loose materials, reduction of noise level, protection from water and air infiltration into building, and maintenance of neat, sightly conditions in and arou nd work areas inside and outside of building. Packaging, scrap materials and demolition debris shall be promptly removed from building and site on a daily basis. B. At all times, Provider shall provide clearly visi ble warning and directions signs, barricades, temporary lighting, overhead protection and hazard-free walking su rfaces throughout public area. At all times, special attention must be given to building entrances , exits and proper safe exiting through work areas as required by law. Provider shall consult Purchaser and other Providers to establish and maintain safe temporary routes including, but not limited to, proper barricades, walk ing surfaces, lighting, fire protection, exiting, warning and directional signs and general protection of persons from all hazards in accordance with OSHA Standards due wholly or partially to its operations. END OF SECTION
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group PROJECT PROCEDURES SECTION 01040 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 1.01 APPLICABLE CODES ....................................................................................................................... 1 1.02 STAGING AREA ................................................................................................................................ 1 1.03 WORK PHASE ................................................................................................................................... 1 1.04 OCCUPANCY AND WORK BY OTHERS ......................................................................................... 1
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group PROJECT PROCEDURES JANUARY 7, 2008 01040 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 SECTION 01040 PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 APPLICABLE CODES A. Compliance with Regulatory Agencies: Comply with most stringent applicable provisions of following Codes, laws, and/or Authorities, including revisions and changes in effect: 1. Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, ASME A17.1 2. Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks, ASME A17.2 3. Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment, ASME A17.5 4. National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 5. Americans with Disabilities Act, ADA 6. Local Fire Authority 7. Requirements of IBC and all other Codes, Or dinances and Laws applicable within the governing jurisdiction 8. Life Safety Code, NFPA 101 9. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standard, UFAS 1.02 STAGING AREA An equipment staging area will be available for use by Provider. Provider shall restrict usage to area designated and shall notify Purchaser/Property Management prior to storing of any large equipment which will impose heavy concentrated loading on floor area. Do not store such equipment until approval is received. 1.03 WORK PHASE See Section 00310, Quotation Form. 1.04 OCCUPANCY AND WORK BY OTHERS A. Provider expressly affirms Purc haser’s rights to let other contract s and employ other Providers in connection with required work. Provider will a fford other Providers and their workmen reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of material s and equipment, for execution of their work and will properly connect and coordinate his work with thei rs. Provider will also incorporate comparable provisions in all its subcontracts. B. Provider declares that other Providers employ ed by Purchaser on basis of separate contracts may proceed at such times as necessary to install items of work required by Purchaser. C. Provider declares that it will cooperate with other Providers employ ed by Purchaser and, in addition to other coordination and expediting efforts, will coordi nate their work by written notices regarding necessity of such work to be done on or before certain dates. D. Provider declares that it is responsible for re view, stamped and signed approval of all shop drawings for required work.
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group PROJECT PROCEDURES JANUARY 7, 2008 01040 - 2 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 E. Provider hereby declares that content of fo regoing paragraphs, and influence they may have on project: 1. Shall not cause a change in stipulated Contract Sum 2. Shall not cause a change in Construction Time Schedule END OF SECTION
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUBMITTALS SECTION 01300 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 1.01 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................................................... 1 1.02 FINAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .................................................................................................... 1
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group SUBMITTALS JANUARY 7, 2008 01300 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Within 60 calendar days after award of contract and before beginning equipment fabrication, submit shop drawings and required material samples for review. Allow 30 days for response to initial submittal. 1. Design Information: Indicate equipment lists , reactions, and design information on layouts. 2. Power Confirmation Information: Design for existing conditions. 3. Fixtures: Cuts, samples, or shop drawings. 4. Finish Material: Submit 3" x 12" samples of act ual finished material for review of color, pattern, and texture. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Provider. Include, if requested, signal fixtures, lights, graphics, Braille plates, and detail of mounting provisions. 5. Design Information: Provide calculations verifying the following: a. Adequacy of existing electrical provisions. b. Adequacy of retained equipment relative to Code requirements if car weight increased by more than 5%. c. Machine room heat emissions in B.T.U. d. Adequacy of existing retai ned elevator machine beams. e. Adequacy of existing car platform structure for intended loading. B. Submittal review shall not be construed as an indicati on that submittal is correc t or suitable, or that the work represented by submittal complies with the Contract Documents. Compliance with Contract Documents, Code requirements, dimensions, fit, and interface with other work is Provider’s responsibility. C. Acknowledge and/or respond to review comment s within 14 calendar days of return. Promptly incorporate required changes due to inaccurate dat a or incomplete definition so that delivery and installation schedules are not affected. Identify and cloud drawing revisions, including Provider elective revisions on each re-submittal. Provider’s revisi on response time is not justification for equipment delivery or installation delay. 1.02 FINAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS See Section 01700, Project Closeout. END OF SECTION
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group MATERIAL AND HANDLING SECTION 01600 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 1.01 SITE CONDITIO N INSPECTI ON ....................................................................................................... 1 1.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAG E, AND HAND LING ..................................................................... 1 1.03 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... 1 1.04 MANUFACTURER’S NAMEPLATES ................................................................................................ 2 1.05 COLORS OF FACTORY-FI NISHED EQUIPMENT ........................................................................... 2 1.06 MATERIALS AND FINISHES ............................................................................................................. 2
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group MATERIAL AND HANDLING JANUARY 7, 2008 01600 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND HANDLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SITE CONDITION INSPECTION A. Prior to beginning installation of equipment, exami ne hoistway and machine room areas. Verify that no irregularities exist which affect execution of work specified. B. Do not proceed with installation until work in place conforms to project requirements. 1.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver material in Provider’s original, unopened protective packaging. B. Store material in original protective packaging. Prevent soiling, physical damage, or moisture damage. C. Protect equipment and exposed finishes from dam age and stains during transportation, erection, and construction. D. Allocate available site storage areas and coordinate their use with Purchaser and other Providers. E. Provide suitable temporary weather-tight storage fa cilities as may be required for materials that will be stored in the open. 1.03 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install all equipment in accordance with Provi der’s instructions, referenced Codes, specification and approved submittals. B. Install machine room equipment with clearances in accordance with referenced Codes and specification. C. Install all equipment so it may be eas ily removed for maintenance and repair. D. Install all equipment for ease of maintenance. E. Install all equipment to afford maximum acce ssibility, safety, and cont inuity of operation. F. Remove oil, grease, scale, and other foreign ma tter from the following equipment and apply one coat of field-applied machinery enamel. 1. All exposed equipment and metal work installe d as part of this work which does not have architectural finish. 2. Machine room equipment, hoistway equipment including guide rails, guide rail brackets, and pit equipment. 3. Neatly touch up damaged factory-painted surfaces with original paint color. Protect machine-finish surfaces against corrosion.
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group MATERIAL AND HANDLING JANUARY 7, 2008 01600 - 2 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 1.04 MANUFACTURER’S NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturer’s name plates and other identifying ma rkings shall not be affixed on surfaces exposed to public view. This requirement does not apply to Unde rwriter’s Laboratories and code required labels. B. Each major component of mechanical and electric al equipment shall have identification plate with the Manufacturer’s name, address, model number rati ng and any other information required by Governing Codes. 1.05 COLORS OF FACTOR Y-FINISHED EQUIPMENT A. All colors will be selected from the Manufacturer’s standard range unless custom colors are specified herein. B. Submit samples of all standard colors available and/or specified custom colors for review and approval. See Section 01300, Submittals C. Submit samples of all specified architectural me tals specified for review and approval. See Section 01300, Submittals. 1.06 MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Steel: 1. Sheet Steel (Furniture Steel for Exposed Work ): Stretcher-leveled, cold-rolled, commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366, matte finish. 2. Sheet Steel (for Unexposed Work): Hot-rolled, commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A568/A568M-03. 3. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36. B. Bronze: Stretcher-leveled, re -squared sheets composed of 60% coppe r and 40% zinc similar to Muntz Metal, Alloy Group 2, with standard temper an d hardness required for fabrication, strength, and durability. Clean and treat bronze surfaces before mechanical finish. After completion of the final mechanical finish on the fabricated work, use a chemical cleaner to produce finish (Federal Standard and NAAMM nomenclature) matching Architect’s sample: 1. Satin: Directional polish finish. M31-C12-06X, fine-satin, clear-coated (US10) with clear-organic coating recommended by Fabricator. Provide graini ng direction as shown or, if not shown, in longest dimension. C. Paint: Clean exposed metal parts and assemblies of oil, grease, scale, and other foreign matter and factory paint one shop coat of standard rust-resistant primer. After erec tion, provide one finish coat of industrial enamel paint. Galvanized metal need not be painted. D. Prime Finish: Clean all metal surfaces receiving a baked enamel paint finish of oil, grease, and scale. Apply one coat of rust-resistant primer followed by a filler coat over unev en surfaces. Sand smooth and apply final coat of primer. E. Baked Enamel Finish: Prime finish per above. Unless specified “prime finish” only, apply and bake three (3) additional coats of enamel in the selected solid color. END OF SECTION
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group FINAL CONTRACT COMPLIANCE REVIEW SECTION 01700 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 1.01 FINAL CLEA NING .............................................................................................................................. 1 1.02 CONSULTANT’S FINAL OBSERVATION AND REVIEW REQU IREMENTS ................................... 1 1.03 PURCHASER’S IN FORMATION ....................................................................................................... 2
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group FINAL CONTRACT COMPLIANCE REVIEW JANUARY 7, 2008 01700 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 SECTION 01700 FINAL CONTRACT COMPLIANCE REVIEW PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 FINAL CLEANING A. See Section 00800, Supplemental Conditions, for cont ractual requirements governing site cleaning. As a minimum: 1. Elevator hoistways and all equipment therei n shall be cleaned and left free of rust, filings, welding slag, rubbish, loose plaster, mortar drippi ngs, extraneous construction materials, dirt and dust. Include walls, building beams, s ill ledges, and hoistway divider beams. 2. Care shall be taken by workpersons not to mark, soil, or otherwise deface existing or new surfaces. Clean and restore such surfaces to their original condition. 3. Clean down surfaces and areas which require final painting and finishing work. Cleaning includes removal of rubbish, broom cleaning of floors, removal of any loose plaster or mortar, dust and other extraneous materials from finish surfaces, and surfaces that will remain visible after the work is complete. 1.02 CONSULTANT’S FI NAL OBSERVATION AND REVIEW REQUIREMENTS A. Review procedure shall apply for individual elevat ors, portions of groups of elevators and completed groups of elevators accepted on an interim basis or elevators and groups of elevators completed, accepted, placed in operation. B. Provider shall perform review and evaluation of all aspects of its work prior to requesting Consultant’s final review. Work shall be considered ready for C onsultant’s final contract compliance review when all Provider’s tests are complete and all elements of wo rk or a designated portion thereof are in place and elevator or group of elevators are deemed ready for service as intended. C. Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for Consultant’s review. Notify Consultant five (5) working days in advance when ready for final re view of elevator or group of elevators. D. Consultant’s written list of observed deficiencies of materials, equipment and operating systems will be submitted to Provider for corrective action. Co nsultant’s review shall include as a minimum: 1. Workmanship and equipment compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Contract speed, capacity, floor-to-floor, and do or performance comply with Contract Documents. 3. Performance of following is satisfactory: a. Starting, accelerating, running b. Decelerating, stopping accuracy c. Door operation and closing force d. Equipment noise levels e. Signal fixture utility f. Overall ride quality g. Performance of door control devices h. Operations of emergency two-way communication device i. Operations of firefighters' service j. Operations of emergency brake device 4. Test Results: a. In all test conditions, obtain specified contract speed, performance times, stopping accuracy without re-leveling, and ride quality to satisfaction of Purchaser and Consultant. Tests shall be conducted under both no load and full load condition.
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group FINAL CONTRACT COMPLIANCE REVIEW JANUARY 7, 2008 01700 - 2 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 b. Temperature rise in motor windings limited to 50° Celsius above ambient. A full-capacity, one (1) hour running test, stopping at each floor for ten (10) seconds in up and down directions, may be required. E. Performance Guarantee: Should Consultant’s review identify defects, poor workmanship, variance or noncompliance with requirements of specified Code s and/or ordinances, or variance or noncompliance with the requirements of Contract Documents, Prov ider shall complete corrective work in an expedient manner to satisfaction of Purchaser and Consultant at no cost as follows: 1. Replace equipment that does not meet Co de or Contract Document requirements. 2. Perform work and furnish labor, materials and e quipment necessary to meet specified operation and performance. 3. Perform retesting required by Governi ng Code Authority, Purchaser and Consultant. F. A follow-up final contract compliance review sh all be performed by Consultant after notification by Provider that all deficiencies have been corrected. Provide Consultant with copies of the initial deficiency report marked to indicate items which Pr ovider considers complete. If additional reviews are required due to Provider’s gross non-compliance with initial and follow-up deficienc y reports, consultant shall bill Provider at normal billing rates plus ex penses, and Provider acknowledges it will pay for additional compliance reviews. 1.03 PURCHASER’S INFORMATION A. Provide three sets of neatly bound written in formation necessary for proper maintenance and adjustment of equipment within 30 days following final acceptance. Final retention will be withheld until data is received by Purchaser and reviewed by Consultant. Include the following as minimums: 1. Straight-line wiring diagrams of “as-installed” elevator circuits, with index of location and function of components. Provide one set reproducible master. Mount one set wiring diagrams on panels, racked, or similarly protected, in elevator machine room. Provide remaining set rolled and in a protective drawing tube. Maintain all drawing sets with addition of all subsequent changes. These diagrams are Purchaser’s property. 2. Lubrication instructions, includi ng recommended grade of lubricants. 3. Parts catalogs for all replaceable parts including ordering forms and instructions. 4. Four sets of keys for all switches and control features properly tagged and marked. 5. Neatly bound instructions ex plaining all operating features including all apparatus in the car and lobby control panels. 6. Neatly bound maintenance and adjustment inst ructions explaining areas to be addressed, methods and procedures to be used, and specified tolerances to be maintained for all equipment. 7. Diagnostic equipment complete with access codes, adjusters manuals and set-up manuals for adjustment, diagnosis and troubleshooting of elevator system and performance of routine safety tests. B. Preventive Maintenance Contrac t: Furnish properly executed contra ct for continuing, preventive maintenance. C. Acceptance of such records by Purchaser/Consult ant shall not be a waiver of any Provider deviation from Contract Documents or shop drawings or in any way relieve Provider from his responsibility to perform work in accordance with Contract Documents. END OF SECTION
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group MAINTENANCE SECTION 01800 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 1.01 INTERIM MAIN TENANCE ................................................................................................................. 1 1.02 WARRANTY MA INTENA NCE ........................................................................................................... 1
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group MAINTENANCE JANUARY 7, 2008 01800 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 SECTION 01800 MAINTENANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 INTERIM MAINTENANCE A. Furnish preventive maintenance service on elevat ors described herein for a period from notice to proceed, verbal or written, until each unit is remo ved from building service for modernization. In addition, furnish interim preventive maintenance on completed units until the modernization of each group of elevators is complete and one-year wa rranty maintenance, defined in Item 1.02 below, is commenced. Cost of interim maintenance shall not be included as part of modernization quotation. Indicate costs on a per-unit basis for interim ma intenance as requested on quotation form, Section 00310. Costs for interim maintenance shall be paid by Purchaser separately and monthly based upon the number of units in service. B. Use competent personnel, acceptable to Purc haser, employed and supervised by the Provider. 1.02 WARRANTY MAINTENANCE A. Provide preventive maintenance and 24-hour emer gency callback service for one year commencing on date of final acceptance by Purchaser. Systemat ically examine, adjust, clean, and lubricate all equipment. Repair or replace defective parts usi ng parts produced by the Provider of installed equipment. Maintain elevator machine room, hoistway, and pit in clean condition. B. Use competent personnel, acceptable to the Purchaser, supervised and employed by Provider. C. The warranty maintenance period specified in Ite m 1.02, A. above shall be extended one (1) month for each three (3) month period in which equipment re lated failures average more than .25 per unit per month. D. Purchaser retains the option to delete cost of warranty maintenance from new equipment contract and remit twelve (12) equal installments directly to Provider during period in which maintenance is being performed. END OF SECTION
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group RELATED WORK SECTION 01900 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................ 1 1.01 RELATED WORK PROVIDED BY OTHER TRADES ........................................................ 1
LERCH BATES INC. TRACTION MODERNIZATION Elevator Consulting Group RELATED WORK JANUARY 7, 2008 01900 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 SECTION 01900 RELATED WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK PROVIDED BY OTHER TRADES A. Hoistway and Pit: 1. Cutting and patching walls and floors. 2. Structural support at pit floor for buffer impact loads, guide rail loads. 3. Waterproof pit. Indirect waste drai n or sump with flush grate and pump. 4. Protect open hoistways and entrances during construction per OSHA Regulations. B. Machine Room and Machinery Spaces: 1. Enclosure with access. Provide ship s ladder or stair with guard railing. 2. Self-closing and locking access door. 3. Ventilation and heating. Maintain minimum tem perature of 55° F, maximum 90° F. Maintain maximum 80% relative humidity, non-condensing. 4. Paint walls and ceiling. 5. Class “ABC” fire extinguisher in each elevator machine room. 6. Seal fireproofing to prevent flaking. 7. Fire sprinklers where required. C. Electrical Service, Conductors and Devices: 1. Lighting and GFCI convenience outlets in pit, machine room, and overhead machinery spaces. Provide one additional non-GFCI convenience outlet in pit for sump pump. 2. Three-phase mainline copper power feeder to terminals of each elevator controller in the machine room with protected, lock able “open,” disconnecting means. 3. Single-phase copper power feeder to each elevat or controller for car lighting and exhaust blower with individual protected, lockable “open,” di sconnecting means located in machine room. 4. Emergency telephone line to designated elevat or control panel in elevator machine room. 5. Fire alarm initiating devices in each elevator l obby, for each group of elevators or single elevator and each machine room to initiate firefighters’ re turn feature. Device at top of hoistway if sprinklered. Provide alarm initiating signal wi ring from hoistway or machine room connection point to elevator controller terminals. Device in machine room and at top of hoistway to provide signal for general alarm and discrete signal for Phase II firefighters’ operation. 6. Temporary power and illumination to install, test, and adjust elevator equipment. 7. Means to automatically disconnect power to affected elevator drive unit and controller prior to activation of machine room fire sprinkler system, and/or hoistway fire sprinkler system. Manual shut-off means shall be located outside bounds of machine room. 8. When sprinklers are provided in the hoistway all electrical equipment, located less than 4'-0" above the pit floor shall be identified for use in wet locations. Exception, seismic protection devices. 9. Single-phase power feeders to machine room r ope brake air compressor feeder circuits with single-phase protected, lockable “open” disconnecting means. END OF SECTION
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS SECTION 14210 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL....................................................................................................................................................... 1 1.01 WORK INCLUDED............................................................................................................................. 1 1.02 RELATED WORK PROVIDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS ........................................................... 1 1.03 DEFINITIONS..................................................................................................................................... 2 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................... 2 1.05 DOCUMENT VERIFICATION ............................................................................................................ 3 1.06 SUBMITTALS..................................................................................................................................... 3 1.07 PERMIT, TEST AND INSPECTION................................................................................................... 3 1.08 MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................................. 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................... 4 2.01 SUMMARY ......................................................................................................................................... 4 2.02 MATERIALS ....................................................................................................................................... 7 2.03 CAR PERFORMANCE....................................................................................................................... 7 2.04 OPERATION ...................................................................................................................................... 8 2.05 MACHINE ROOM EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................ 9 2.06 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................................. 11 2.07 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES ................................................................................................................. 12 2.08 CAR EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................. 13 2.09 CAR ENCLOSURE ............................................................................................................................ 15 2.10 HALL CONTROL STATIONS............................................................................................................. 16 2.11 SIGNALS............................................................................................................................................ 16 PART 3 EXECUTION................................................................................................................................................... 16 3.01 SITE CONDITION INSPECTION ....................................................................................................... 16 3.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ..................................................................... 17 3.03 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................................. 17 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .............................................................................................................. 17 3.05 ADJUSTMENTS................................................................................................................................. 17 3.06 CLEANUP .......................................................................................................................................... 18 3.07 ACCEPTANCE REVIEW AND TESTS .............................................................................................. 18 3.08 PURCHASER’S INFORMATION ....................................................................................................... 19
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. SECTION 14210 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. 1 traction elevator as follows: 1. 1 Geared Passenger Elevator, Car 2. B. All engineering, equipment, labor, and permits required to satisfactorily complete elevator installation required by Contract Documents. C. Applicable conditions of General, Special, and Supplemental Conditions, and Division 1. D. Preventive maintenance as described herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK PROVIDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Hoistway and Pit: 1. Clear, plumb, substantially flush hoistway wi th variations not to exceed 1" at any point. 2. Bevel cants not less than 75° from the horizontal on any rear or side wall ledges and beams that project or recess 4" or more into the hoistway. Not required on hoistway divider beams. 3. Supports at each floor for car and counterweight guide rail fastening. Intermediate car guide rail support when floor heights exceed 14'-0". Building supports not to deflect in excess of 1/8" under normal conditions. 4. Installation of guide rail bracket supports in concrete. Inserts or embeds, if used, will be furnished under this Section. 5. Wall blockouts and fire rated closure for contro l and signal fixture boxes which penetrate walls. 6. Cutting and patching walls and floors. 7. Structural slab, concrete wall pockets and/or st ructural steel beams for support of hoist machine, rope sheaves, and dead-end hitch beams. Support deflection shall not exceed 1/1666 of span under static load. 8. Erect front hoistway wall after elevator entrances are installed. 9. Grout floor up to hoistway sills and around hoistway entrances. 10. Pit access ladder for each elevator. 11. Structural support at pit floor for buffer impact loads, guide rail loads. 12. Waterproof pit. Indirect waste drain or sump with flush grate and pump. 13. Protect open hoistways and entrances during construction per OSHA Regulations. 14. Protect car enclosure, hoistway entrance assemblies, and special metal finishes from damage. 15. Hoistway venting. 16. Seal fireproofing to prevent flaking. B. Machine Room and Machinery Spaces: 1. Enclosure with access. Provide ship s ladder or stair with guard railing. 2. Self-closing and locking access door. 3. Ventilation and heating. Maintain minimum temp erature of 55° F, maximum 90° F. Maintain maximum 80% relative humidity, non-condensing. 4. Paint walls and ceiling. 5. Class “ABC” fire extinguisher in each elevator machine room. 6. Seal fireproofing to prevent flaking. 7. Fire sprinklers where required.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 2 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. C. Ele c trical Service, Conductors and Devices: 1. Lighting and GFCI convenience outlets in pi t,machine room, and overhead machinery spaces. Provide one additional non-GFCI convenience outletin pitfor sump pump. 2. Three-phase mainline copper power feeder to terminals of each elevator controller in the machine room with protected, lockable“open,” disconnecting means. 3. Single-phase copper power feeder to each elevat or controller for car lighting and exhaust blower with individual protected, lockable “open,” di sconnecting means located in machine room. 4. Emergency telephone lineto designated elevat or control panel in elevator machine room. 5. Fire alarm ini t iating devices in each elevator lobby, for each group of elevators or single elevator and each machine room to initiate firefighters’return feature.Device at top of hoistway if sprinklered. Provide alarm initiating signal wiring from hois t way or machine room connection point to elevator con t roller terminals.Devicein machine room and at top of hoistway to provide signal for general alarm and discretesignal for PhaseIIfirefighters’ operation. 6. Temporary power and illumination to install, test, and adjust elevator equipment. 7. Means to automatically disconnect power toa ffectedelevator drive unit and controller prior to activation of machine room fire sprinkler s y stem, and/or hoistwa y fire sprinkler system.Manual shut-off means shall be located outsidebounds of machine room. 8. When sprinklers are provided in the hoistwayall electrical equipment, located less than 4'-0" above the pit floor shall beidentified foruse inwet locations.Exception, seismic protection devices. 9. Single-phase power feeders to machineroom rope brake air compressor feeder circuitswith single-phase protected, lock able “open” disconnectingmeans. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Terms used are defined in the latest edition of the Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, ASME A17.1. B. Reference to a device or a part of the equipment ap plies to the number of devices or parts required to complete the installation. C. Provisions of this specification are applic able to all elevators unless identified otherwise. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Approved Providers: Alternat e Providers must receive approval of Architect, Purchaser and/or Consultant at least 14 calendar days prior to bid date. 1. Geared Elevator(s): KONE, Otis, Schindler, ThyssenKrupp. 2. Car Enclosure: Eklund's Inc., Gunderlin, Ltd ., Hauenstein & Burmeister , KONE, Otis, Schindler, ThyssenKrupp, Tyler. 3. Hoistway Entrance: Hauenstein & Burmeist er, KONE, Otis, Schindler , ThyssenKrupp, Tyler. B. Compliance with Regulatory Agencies: Comply with most stringent applicable provisions of following Codes, laws, and/or Authorities, including revisions and changes in effect: 1. Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, ASME A17.1 2. Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks, ASME A17.2 3. Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment, ASME A17.5 4. National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 5. Americans with Disabilities Act, ADA 6. Local Fire Authority 7. Requirements of IBC and all other Codes, Or dinances and Laws applicable within the governing jurisdiction 8. Life Safety Code, NFPA 101 9. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standard, UFAS
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 3 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. C. Warranty: 1. Material and workmanship of installation shall comply in every respect with Contract Documents. Correct defective material or workmanship which develops within one year from date of final acceptance of all work to satisfaction of Arch itect, Purchaser and Consultant at no additional cost, unless due to ordinary wear and tear, or improper use or care by Purchaser. Perform maintenance in accordance with terms and condi tions indicated in the Preventive Maintenance Agreement. 2. Defective is defined to include, but not limit ed to; operation or control system failures, car performance below required minimum, excessive wear, unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need for excessive maintenance, abnormal noise or vibration, and similar unsatisfactory conditions. 3. Make modifications, requirements, adjustments and improvements to meet performance requirements in Parts 2 and 3. 1.05 DOCUMENT VERIFICATION In order to discover and resolve conflicts or lack of definition which might creat e problems, Provider must review Contract Documents for compatibility with its prod uct prior to submittal of quotation. Purchaser will not pay for change to structural, mechanical, electrical, or other systems required to accommodate Provider’s equipment. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Within 60 calendar days after award of contract and before beginning equipment fabrication, submit shop drawings and required materials for review as outlined in Division I. Allow 30 calendar days for response to initial submittal. 1. Scaled or Fully Dimensioned Layout: Plan of pit, hoistway and machine room indicating equipment arrangement, elevation section of hoi stway, details of car enclosures, hoistway entrances, and car/hall signal fixtures. 2. Design Information: Indicate equipment lists , reactions, and design information on layouts. 3. Power Confirmation Information: Include moto r horsepower, code letter, starting current, full-load running current, and demand factor. 4. Fixtures: Cuts, samples, or shop drawings. 5. Finish Material: Submit 3" x 12" samples of actual finished material for Architect review of color, pattern, and texture. Compliance with other requir ements is the exclusive responsibility of the Provider. Include, if requested, signal fixtures, lights, graphics, Braille plates, and details of mounting provisions. B. Acknowledge and/or respond to review comments within 14 calendar days of return. Promptly incorporate required changes due to inaccurate dat a or incomplete definition so that delivery and installation schedules are not affected. Provider’s revision response time is not justification for equipment delivery or installation delay. 1.07 PERMIT, TEST AND INSPECTION A. Obtain and pay for permit, license, and inspec tion fee necessary to complete installation. B. Perform test required by Governing Authority in accordance with procedure described in ASME A17.2 Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks in the presence of Authorized Representative. C. Supply personnel and equipment for test and final review by Consultant, as required in Part 3.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 4 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Interim: 1. When one or more elevators are near completi on and ready for service, the General Contractor may accept elevators for interim use and place in service prior to substantial completion of project. 2. During this period General Contractor ma y pay a mutually agreed upon monthly amount per elevator for preventive maintenance. Indicate amount per unit per month with quotation. 3. Temporary acceptance form must be acceptable to General Contractor and signed prior to use. 4. General Contractor must provide or pay for temporary hoistway and car enclosures; protect installed equipment and finishes; pay for and return elevators to elevator sub-contractor for all cleaning, repairs, and replacement of material s necessary to restore elevator to “as-new” condition prior to final acceptance. B. Warranty Maintenance: 1. Provide preventive maintenance and 24-hou r emergency callback service for one year commencing on date of final acceptance by Purcha ser. Systematically examine, adjust, clean, and lubricate all equipment. Repair or replace defective parts using parts produced by the Provider of installed equipment. Maintain elevator machine room, hoistway, and pit in clean condition. 2. Use competent personnel, acceptable to the Purchaser, supervised and employed by Provider. 3. The warranty maintenance period specified in Item 1 above shall be extended one (1) month for each three (3) month period in which equipment related failures average more than .25 per unit per month. 4. Purchaser retains the option to delete cost of warranty maintenance from new equipment contract and remit twelve (12) equal installment s directly to Provider during period in which maintenance is being performed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUMMARY A. 1 Passenger Elevator NUMBER: CAR 2 CAPACITY: 4000 # CLASS LOADING: PASSENGER CLASS A CONTRACT SPEED: 350 FPM ROPING: 1:1 MACHINE: GEARED MACHINE LOCATION: OVERHEAD OPERATIONAL CONTROL: DUP LEX SELECTIVE COLLECTIVE MICROPROCESSOR BASED MOTOR CONTROL: AC, VARIABLE VOLTAGE, VARIABLE FREQUENCY, MICROPROCESSOR BASED WITH DIGITAL CLOSED-LOOP FEEDBACK
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 5 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. POWER CHARACTERISTICS: 480 VOLTS, 3 PHASE, 60 HERTZ STOPS: 7 FRONT OPENINGS: 7 FRONT FLOORS SERVED: 1, 2, L, 4, 5, 6, 7 FRONT TRAVEL: 59’-0” ± PLATFORM SIZE: 6’-0” WIDE X 8’-4” DEEP MINIMUM CLEAR INSIDE CAR: 5’-8” WIDE X 7’-5” DEEP ENTRANCE SIZE: 4’-0” WIDE X 7’-0” HIGH ENTRANCE TYPE: TWO SPEED, SIDE OPENING DOOR OPERATION: HIGH SPEED, HEAVY-DUTY, DOOR OPERATOR, MINIMUM OPENING SPEED 2-1/2 F.P.S. DOOR PROTECTION: INFRARED, FULL SC REEN DEVICE, WITH DIFFERENTIAL TIMING, NUDGING AND INTERRUPTED BEAM TIME SAFETY: FLEXIBLE GUIDE CLAMP - TYPE B, CAR GUIDE RAILS: PLANED STEEL TEES BUFFERS: OIL COMPENSATION: PROVIDER’S STANDARD APPLICATION CAR ENCLOSURE: STEEL SHELL AS SPECIFIED PLUS $10,000 ALLOWANCE AND 600# WEIGHT ALLOWANCE FOR INTERIOR FINISHES CAR INTERIOR FINISHES PROVIDED UNDER THIS SECTION 8’-0” CLEAR HEIGHT UNDER CANOPY PAD BUTTONS AND VINYL COVERED PADS BATTERY POWERED EMERGENCY CAR LIGHTING. PROVIDE SEPARATE CONSTANT PRESSURE TEST BUTTON IN CAR SERVICE COMPARTMENT. ILLUMINATE PORTION OF NORMAL CAR LIGHTING SIGNAL FIXTURES: LED ILLUMINATION. PROVIDER’S STANDARD HALL AND CAR PUSHBUTTON STATIONS: DUAL HALL PUSHBUTTON RISERS SINGLE CAR OPERATING PANEL CAR POSITION INDICATORS: SINGLE D IGITAL WITH CAR DIRECTION ARROWS
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 6 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. IN CAR LANTERNS: ALL CAR ENTRANCE COLUMNS WITH VOLUME ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC CHIME OR TONE. SOUND TWICE FOR DOWN DIRECTION HALL CAR POSITION INDICATOR: DIGITAL WITH CAR DIRECTION ARROWS AT LOBBY LEVEL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SELF-DIALING, VANDAL RESISTANT, PUSH TO CALL, TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH RECALL, TRACKING AND VOICELESS COMMUNICATION FIXTURE SUBMITTAL: SUBMIT BROCHURE DEPICTING PROVIDER’S PROPOSED DESIGNS WITH BID ADDITIONAL FEATURES – CAR 2: CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT ROLLER GUIDES CAR TOP INSPECTION STATION FIREFIGHTERS’ SERVICE, PHASE I AND II, INCLUDING ALTERNATE FLOOR RETURN ACCESSIBILITY SIGNAGE STATIONARY CAR RETURN PANEL(S) ARRANGED FOR SURFACE APPLIED CAR OPERATING PANEL(S) HOISTWAY ACCESS SWITCHES, TOP AND BOTTOM FLOORS HOISTWAY DOOR UNLOCKING DEVICE, ALL FLOORS PLATFORM ISOLATION LOAD-WEIGHING DEVICE ANTI-NUISANCE FEATURE INDEPENDENT SERVICE FEATURE MACHINE, POWER CONVERSION UNIT, AND CONTROLLER SOUND ISOLATION TAMPER RESISTANT FASTENERS FOR ALL FASTENINGS EXPOSED TO THE PUBLIC ONE YEAR WARRANTY MAINTENANCE WITH 24-HOUR CALL-BACK SERVICE SIGNAGE ENGRAVING FILLED WITH BLACK PAINT OR APPROVED ETCHING PROCESS NO VISIBLE COMPANY NAME OR LOGO
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 7 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. WIRING DIAGRAMS, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, AND PARTS ORDERING INFORMATION SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MEANS AND INSTRUCTIONS 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel: 1. Sheet Steel (Furniture Steel for Exposed Wo rk): Stretcher-leveled, cold-rolled, commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366, matte finish. 2. Sheet Steel (for Unexposed Work): Hot-rolled , commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A568/A568M-03. 3. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36. B. Bronze: Stretcher-leveled, re-squared sheets comp osed of 60% copper and 40% zinc similar to Muntz Metal, Alloy Group 2, with standard temper and hardness required for fabrication, strength, and durability. Clean and treat bronze surfaces before me chanical finish. After completion of the final mechanical finish on the fabricated work, use a chemical cleaner to produce finish (Federal Standard and NAAMM nomenclature) matching Architect’s sample: 1. Satin: Directional polish finish. M31-C12-06X, fine-satin, clear-coated (US10) with clear-organic coating recommended by Fabricator. Provide graini ng direction as shown or, if not shown, in longest dimension. 2. Acid-Etched Pattern: Provide an M21-C12-C5X-06X bright-polished (US9) background selectively acid-etched, matte-textured, custom pa ttern as shown. Acid selection and dilution (if required) recommended by Fabricator. After final finishing, coat bronz e with clear-organic lacquer coating recommended by Fabricator. C. Aluminum: Extrusions per ASTM B221; sheet and plate per ASTM B209. D. Paint: Clean exposed metal parts and assemblies of oil, grease, scale, and other foreign matter and factory paint one shop coat of standard rust-resistant primer. After erection, provide one finish coat of industrial enamel paint. Galvanized metal need not be painted. E. Prime Finish: Clean all metal surfaces receiving a baked enamel paint finish of oil, grease, and scale. Apply one coat of rust-resistant primer followed by a filler coat over uneven surfaces. Sand smooth and apply final coat of primer. F. Baked Enamel Finish: Prime finish per above. Unless specified “prime finish” only, apply and bake three (3) additional coats of enamel in the selected solid color. 2.03 CAR PERFORMANCE A. Car Speed: ± 3% of contract speed under any loading condition. B. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold 125% of rated load. C. Car Stopping Zone: ±1/4" under any loading condition. D. Door Opening Time: Seconds from start of opening to fully open: 1. Car 2: 2.5 seconds.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 8 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. E. Door Closing Time: Seconds from start of closing to fully closed: 1. Car 2: 4.4 seconds. F. Car Floor-to-Floor Performance Time: Seconds fr om start of doors closing until doors are 3/4 open (1/2 open for side opening doors) and car level and stopped at next successive floor under any loading condition or travel direction (9’-6” typical floor height): 1. Car 2: 11.0 seconds. G. Car Ride Quality: 1. Horizontal acceleration within car during all riding and door operating conditions. Not more than 20 mg (geared) peak to peak (adjacent peaks) in the 1 - 10 Hz range. 2. Acceleration and Deceleration: Smooth constant and not more than 3 feet/second² with an initial ramp between 0.5 and 0.75 second. 3. Sustained Jerk: Not more than 8 feet/second³. H. Airborne Noise: Measured noise level of elevat or equipment during operation shall not exceed 50 dBA in elevator lobbies and 60 dBA inside car under any condition including door operation and car ventilation exhaust blower on its highest speed. 2.04 OPERATION A. Duplex Selective Collective Mi croprocessor Based (Modernized Car 1 and New Car 2): Operate cars without attendants from pushbuttons in cars and lo cated at each floor. When cars are available, park one car at main floor (“home” car). Park other car where last used (“free” car). Respond to car calls and hall calls above main floor using the “free” car. Once a car has started, respond to registered calls in the direction of travel and in the order the floors are reached. Do not reverse car direction until all car calls have been answered, or until all hall calls ahead of the car and corresponding to the direction of car travel have been answered. Slow cars and stop automatically at floors corresponding to registered calls in the order in which they are approached in either direction of travel. As slowdo wn is initiated for a hall call, automatically cancel hall call. Cancel car calls in the same manner. Hold car at arrival floor an adjustable time interval to allow passenger transfer. Answer calls corresponding to direction in which car is traveling unless call in the opposite direction is the highest (or lowest) call registered. When the “free” car is clearing calls, start “home” car to respond to: 1. A call registered on “home” car pushbuttons. 2. An up hall call registered below “free” car. 3. An up or a down call registered above “free” car while “free” car is traveling down. 4. A hall call when “free” car is delayed in its normal operation for a predetermined period. When both cars are clearing calls, stop only one car in response to any registered hall call. Return the first car to clear its calls to main floor. Should last service required bring both cars to main floor, the first arriving car becomes the “free” car. Illuminate appropriate pushbutton to indicate call re gistration. Extinguish light when call is answered. B. Other Items: 1. Load Weighing: Provide means for weighing ca r passenger load. Control system to provide dispatching at main floor in advance of normal in tervals when car fills to capacity. Provide hall
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 9 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. call by-pass when the car is filled to preset perc entage of rated capacity and traveling in down direction. Field adjustment range: 10% to 100%. 2. Anti-Nuisance Feature: If car loading relative to weight in car is not commensurate with number of registered car calls, cancel car calls. Systems employing either load weighing or door protective device for activation of this feature are acceptable. 3. Independent Service: Provide controls for ope ration of each car from its pushbuttons only. Close doors by constant pressure on desired de stination floor button or door close button. Open doors automatically upon arrival at selected floor. C. Firefighters’ Service: Provide equipment and ope ration in accordance with Code requirements. D. Automatic Car Stopping Zone: Stop car within 1/4" above or below the landing sill. Maintain stopping zone regardless of load in car, direction of travel, distance between landings, hoist rope slippage or stretch. E. Remote Monitoring and Diagnostics: Equip each controller with standard ports, interface boards, and drivers to accept maintenance, data logging, fault finding diagnostic, and monitoring computers, keyboards, modems, and programming tools. The syst em shall be capable of driving remote color CRT monitor(s) that continually scan and di splay the status of each car and call. F. Motion Control: Microprocessor based AC, variable-voltage, variable frequency with digitally encoded closed-loop velocity feedback suitable for operati on specified and capable of providing smooth, comfortable car acceleration, retardation, and dy namic braking. Limit the difference in car speed between full load and no load to not more than ±3% of the contract speed. G. Door Operation: Automatically open doors when car arrives at main floor. At expiration of normal dwell time, close doors. H. Standby Lighting and Alarm: Car mounted battery un it with solid-state charger to operate alarm bell and car emergency lighting. Battery to be rechargeabl e with minimum 5-year life expectancy. Include required transformer. Provide constant pressure te st button in service compartment of car operating panel. Provide lighting integral with portion of normal car lighting system. 2.05 MACHINE ROOM EQUIPMENT A. Arrange equipment in spaces shown on drawings. B. Geared Traction Hoist Machine: 1. Single worm geared or helical geared traction type with AC induction or P.M.S.M. ACV 3 F motor, brake, gear, drive shaft, defle ctor sheave, and gear case moun ted in proper alignment on an isolated bedplate. Provide bedplate blocking to elevate secondary or deflector sheave above machine room floor. 2. Provide hoist machine mounted direct driv e, digital, closed-loop velocity encoder. 3. Provide hoist machine drip pans to collect lubricant seepage. 4. Provide machine bedplate mounted deflector sheave A-frame or supporting steel beams and fastenings to mount deflector sheaves to build ing structure. Provide minimum 16 gauge easily removable sound insulated sheet metal closures in hoistway wall opening around machine. C. Solid State Power Conversion and Regulation Unit: Provide solid-state, alternating current, variable voltage, variable frequency (ACV 3 F), I.G.B.T. converter/inverter drives. 1. Design unit to limit current, suppress noise, and prevent transient voltage feedback into building power supply. Provide internal heat sink cooling fans for the power drive portion of the converter panels. Conform to IEEE standards 519-1 992 for line harmonics and switching noise.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 10LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. 2. Isolate unit to minimize noise and vibration tr ansmission. Provide isolation transformers, filter networks, and choke inductors. 3. Suppress solid-state converte r noises, radio frequency interference, and eliminate regenerative transients induced into the mainline feeders or the building standby power generator. 4. Supplemental direct-current power for the operation of hoist machine brake, door operator, dispatch processor, signal fixtures, et c., from separate static power supply. 5. ACV 3 F Drives for gearless elevators shall be rege nerative and utilize IGBT converter/inverter and dynamic braking during overhauling condition. D. Encoder: Direct drive, solid-state, digital ty pe. Update car position at each floor and automatically restore after power loss. E. Controller: UL/CSA labeled. 1. Compartment: Securely mount all assemblies, power supplies, chassis switches, relays, etc., on a substantial, self-supporting steel frame. Comp letely enclose equipment with covers. Provide means to prevent overheating. 2. Relay Design: Magnet operated with contacts of design and material to insure maximum conductivity, long life and reliable operation without overheating or excessive wear. Provide wiping action and means to prevent sticking due to fusion. Contacts carrying high inductive currents shall be provided with arc deflectors or suppressors. 3. Microprocessor-Related Hardware: a. Provide built-in noise suppression devices which provide a high level of noise immunity on all solid-state hardware and devices. b. Provide power supplies with noise suppression devices. c. Isolate inputs from external devices (suc h as pushbuttons) with opto-isolation modules. d. Design control circuits with one leg of power supply grounded. e. Safety circuits shall not be affected by a ccidental grounding of any part of the system. f. System shall automatically re start when power is restored. g. System memory shall be retained in th e event of power failure or disturbance. h. Equipment shall be provided with Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI) shielding within FCC guidelines. 4. Wiring: CSA labeled copper for factory wiring. Neatly route all wiring interconnections and securely attach wiring connections to studs or terminals. 5. Permanently mark components (relays, fuses, PC boards, etc.) with symbols shown on wiring diagrams. 6. Provide controller or machine mounted aux iliary, lockable “open,” disconnect if mainline disconnect is not in sight of controller and/or machine. F. Sleeves and Guards: Provide 2" steel angle guards around cable or duct slots through floor slabs or grating. Provide rope and smoke guards for s heaves, cables, and cable slots in machine room. G. Machine and Equipment Support Beams: 1. Provide structural steel beams required for dire ct support of and attachment to building structure of hoist machine, deflector sheaves, overhead sheaves, governor, and hoist rope dead-end hitch assemblies. 2. Provide bearing plates, anchors, shelf angles, blocking, embedment, etc., for support and fastening of machine beams or equipment to the building structure. 3. Isolate machine and overhead sheave beams to prevent noise and vibration transmission to building structure. H. Governor: Centrifugal-type, car driven, machine room mounted with pull-through jaws and bi-directional shutdown switches. Provide required bracketing and supports for attachment to building structure.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 11LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. I. Emergency Brake: Provide means to prev ent ascending car over-speed and unintended car movement per Code. J. Noise/Vibration Isolation: All elevator equipment including their supports and fastenings to building, shall be mechanically and electrically isolated from the building structure and main line power feeders to minimize objectionable noise and vibration trans mission to car, building structure, or adjacent occupied areas of building. K. Sound Isolation: 1. Noise level relating to elevator equipment operation in machine room shall not exceed 80 dBA. 2. All dBA readings shall be taken three (3) feet off the floor and three (3) feet from equipment using the "A" weighted scale. 2.06 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT A. Guide Rails: Planed steel T-sections for car and counterweight of suitable size and weight for the application, including brackets for attachment to building structure. Provide rail backing and intermediate counterweight tie brackets to meet Code requirements. No additional structural points of rail attachment, other than those shown on the Contract Documents, will be provided. B. Buffers, Car and Counterweight: Oil type with blo cking and support channels. Provide switch on buffer to limit car speed if buffer is compressed. C. Sheaves: Machined grooves and sealed bearin gs. Provide mounting means to machine beams, machine bedplate, car and counterweight stru ctural members, or building structure. D. Counterweight: Steel frame with metal filler weights. E. Counterweight Guide Shoes: Spring dampened roller guide shoes. F. Counterweight Guard: Metal guard in pit. G. Governor Rope and Encoder Tape Tensioning Sheave s: Mount sheaves and support frame on pit floor or guide rail. Provide frame with guides or pivo t point to enable free vertical movement and proper tension of rope and tape. H. Hoist and Governor Ropes: 1. 8 x 19 or 8 x 25 Seale construction, tracti on steel type. Fasten with staggered length, adjustable, spring isolated wedge type shackles. 2. Governor rope to suit Provider’s specification. I. Compensation: Provider’s standard application. Pit mounted guide assembly shall provide quiet, effective restraint without excessive wear of comp onents. Inhibit rubbing or chafing against hoistway or equipment within hoistway or pit. Application must meet performance/noise level requirement of specification. J. Terminal Stopping: Provide normal and final devices. K. Electrical Wiring and Wiring Connections: 1. Conductors and Connections: Copper throughout with indivi dual wires coded and connections on identified studs or terminal blocks. Use no splic es or similar connections in wiring except at terminal blocks, control compartments, or junction boxes. Provide 10% spare conductors throughout. Run spare wires from car connection poin ts to individual elevator controllers in the
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 12LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. machine room. Provide four pairs of spare shielded communication wires in addition to those required to connect specified items. Tag spares in machine room. 2. Conduit: Painted or galvanized steel conduit, EMT or duct. Conduit size, 1/2". Flexible heavy-duty service cord may be used between fixed car wiring and car door switches for door protective devices. 3. Traveling Cables: Flame and moisture-resistant outer cover. Prevent traveling cable from rubbing or chafing against hoistway or equipment within hoistway. 4. Auxiliary Wiring: Connect fire alarm initiating devices and emergency two-way communication system in each car controller in machine room. L. Entrance Equipment: 1. Door Hangers: Two-point hanger roller with neoprene roller surface and suspension with eccentric upthrust roller adjustment. 2. Door Tracks: Bar or formed, cold-drawn removable steel tracks with smooth roller contact surface. 3. Door Interlocks: Operable without reti ring cam. Paint interlock box flat black. 4. Door Closers: Spring, spirator or jamb/str ut mounted counterweight type. Design and adjust to insure smooth, quiet mechanical close of doors. 5. Hoistway Door Unlocking Device: Provide unloc king device with escutcheon in door panel at all floors, with finish to match adjacent surface. 6. Hoistway Access Switches: Mount in wall at top and bottom floors. Provide switch with faceplate. M. Floor Numbers: Stencil paint 4" high floor designatio ns in contrasting color on inside face of hoistway doors or hoistway fascia in location visible from within car. 2.07 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Complete entrances bearing fire labels from a nationally recognized testing laboratory approved within the governing jurisdiction. B. Frames: 14 gauge hollow metal at all floors. Bolted and lapped head to jamb assembly at all floors. Provide Arabic floor designation/Braille plates, cent ered at 60" above finished floor, on both side jambs of all entrances. Provide plates at main egress landing with “Star” designation. For designated emergency car, provide “Star of Life” designation pl ates at height of 78" – 84" above finished floor on both side jambs at all floors. Braille indications s hall be below Arabic floor designation. Provide cast floor designation/Braille plates as manufac tured by SCS, Vision Mark or Entrada. C. Door Panels: 16 gauge steel, sandwich constr uction without binder angles. Provide leading edges of center-opening doors with rubber as tragals. Provide a minimum of two (2) gibs per panel, one at leading and one at trailing edge with gibs in the s ill groove entire length of door travel. Construct door panels with interlocking, stiffening ribs. D. Sight Guards: 14 gauge, same material and finish as hoistway entrance door panels. Construct without sharp edges. E. Sills: Extruded aluminum. F. Sill Supports: Structural or formed steel desi gned to support door sill based upon car loading classification. Mount to eliminate need for grout under the sill. G. Fascia, Toe Guards and Hanger Covers: 14 gauge fu rniture steel with Provider’s standard finish.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 13LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. H. Struts and Headers: Provide for vertical support of entrances and related material. Provide door open bumpers on entrances equipped with vertical struts. I. Finish of Frames and Doors: Car Floor Frames Door Panels 2 All #4 Bronze Satin Finish #4 Bronze Satin Finish 2.08 CAR EQUIPMENT A. Frame: Welded or bolted, rolled or formed steel channel construction to meet load classification specified. B. Safety Device: Type “B,” flexible guide clamp. C. Platform: Isolated type, constructed of steel, or steel and wood which is fireproofed on underside. Design and construct to accommodate load classifica tion requirements. Provide Class “A” construction for passenger elevators. D. Platform Apron: Minimum 14 gauge steel, reinforced and braced to car platform with Provider’s standard finish. E. Guide Shoes: Roller type with three or more spring dampened, sound-deadening rollers per shoe. F. Finish Floor Covering: Provided under other sections. G. Sills: One piece extrusion with extruded extension betwee n car entrance columns to face of car front return. Extruded extension to match finish of sill. 1. Car 2: Aluminum H. Doors: Provide as specified for hoistway entrance doors. I. Door Hangers: Two-point hanger roller with neoprene roller surface and suspension with eccentric upthrust roller adjustment. J. Door Track: Bar or formed, cold-drawn removabl e steel track with smooth roller contact surface. K. Door Header: Construct of minimum 12 gauge steel, shape to provide stiffening flanges. L. Door Electrical Contact: Prohibit car operation unless car door is closed. M. Door Clutch: Heavy-duty clutch, linkage arms, dr ive blocks and pickup rollers or cams to provide positive, smooth, quiet door operation. Design clutch so car doors can be closed, while hoistway doors remain open. N. Restricted Opening Device: Restrict opening of car door(s) outside unlocking zone. O. Door Operator: High speed, heavy-duty door operator capable of opening doors at no less than 2-1/2 f.p.s. Accomplish reversal in no more than 2-1/2" of door movement. Provide solid-state door control with closed loop circuitry to constantly monitor and automatically adjust door operation based upon velocity, position, and motor current. Maintain consistent, smooth and quiet door operation at all floors, regardless of door weight or varying air pressure.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 14LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. Acceptable closed-loop door operators: 1. KONE AMD 2.0 2. Otis HPLIM 3. Schindler QKS 15 Heavy Duty 4. ThyssenKrupp HD91 StarTrac 5. G.A.L. MOVFR P. Door Control Device: 1. Infrared Reopening Device: Black, fully encl osed device with full screen infrared matrix or multiple beams extending vertically along leading edge of each door panel to minimum height of 7'-0" above finished floor. Device shall prevent doors from closing and reverse doors at normal opening speed if beams are obstructed while d oors are closing, except during nudging operation. In event of device failure, provide for automatic shutdown of car at floor level with doors open. a. Acceptable Infrared Reopening Device: 1) Cegard/MAX-154 by CEDES 2) Gatekeeper by Adams 3) Lambda II by Otis 4) Magic Edge by Tri-Tronics 5) Microlite by ThyssenKrupp 6) Microscan E by T.L. Jones 7) Pana40 Plus by Janus 2. Nudging Operation: After beams of door contro l device are obstructed for a predetermined time interval (minimum 20.0 - 25.0 seconds), warning signal shall sound and doors shall attempt to close with a maximum of 2.5 foot pounds kineti c energy. Activation of the door open button shall override nudging operation and reopen doors. 3. Interrupted Beam Time: When beams are interrupted during initial door opening, hold door open a minimum of 3.0 seconds. When beams are inte rrupted after the initial 3.0 second hold open time, reduce time doors remain open to an adjustable time of approximately 1.0 - 1.5 seconds after beams are reestablished. 4. Differential Door Time: Provide separately adjus table timers to vary time that doors remain open after stopping in response to calls. a. Car Call: Hold open time adjustable between 3.0 and 5.0 seconds. b. Hall Call: Hold open time adjustable between 5.0 and 8.0 seconds. Use hall call time when car responds to coincidental calls. Q. Car Operating Panel: 1. One car operating panel with faceplate, consis ting of a metal box containing operating fixtures, mounted behind the car stationary front return panel. Faceplate shall be hinged and constructed of Bronze satin finish. 2. Suitably identify floor buttons, alarm button, door open button, door close button and emergency push-to-call button with SCS, Visionmark or Entrada cast tactile symbols surface mounted. Configure plates per local bu ilding code accessibility stand ards including Braille. Locate operating controls no higher than 48" above t he car floor; no lower than 35" for emergency push-to-call button and alarm button. 3. Provide minimum 3/4" diameter raised or flus h floor pushbuttons which illuminate to indicate call registration. 4. Provide alarm button to ring bell locate d on car. Illuminate button when actuated. 5. Provide keyed stop switch at bottom of car ope rating panel in locked car service compartment. 6. Provide “door open” button to stop and reopen doors or hold doors in open position. 7. Provide “door close” button to activate door cl ose cycle. Cycle shall not begin until normal door dwell time for a car or hall call has expired, except firefighters’ operation. 8. Provide firefighters’ Phase II key switch with eng raved instructions filled red. Include light jewel, buzzer, and call cancel button.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 15LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. 9. Provide lockable service compartment with rece ssed flush door. Door material and finish shall match car return panel or car operating panel faceplate. 10. Include the following controls in lockable serv ice cabinet with function and operating positions identified by permanent signage or engraved legend: a. Inspection switch. b. Light switch. c. Three-position exhaust blower switch. d. Independent service switch. e. Constant pressure test button for battery pack emergency lighting. f. 120-volt, AC, GFCI protected electrical convenience outlet. g. Stop switch. h. Switch to select either floor voice annunciation, floor passing tone, or chime. 11. Provide black paint filled (except as noted), engraved or approved etched signage as follows with approved size and font: a. Phase II firefighters’ operating instructions on main operating panel above corresponding keyswitch filled red. b. Car number on main car operating panel. c. “No Smoking” on main car operating panel. d. Car capacity in pounds on main car operating panel service compartment door. R. Car Top Control Station: Mount to provide safe access and utilization while standing in an upright position on car top. S. Work Light and Duplex Plug Receptacle: GFCI pr otected outlet at top and bottom of car. Include on/off switch and lamp guard. T. Communication System: 1. “Push to Call,” two-way communication instrument in car with automatic dialing, tracking and recall features with shielded wiring to car controller in machine room. Provide dialer with automatic rollover capability with minimum two num bers. Provide consolidator to allow multiple phones connected to one (1) line. a. “Push to Call” button or adjacent light jewel shall illuminate and flash when call is acknowledged. Button shall match car operating panel pushbutton design. Provide uppercase "PUSH TO CALL," "HELP ON THE WAY" engraved signage adjacent to button. b. Provide “Push to Call” button tactile sym bol, engraved signage, and Braille adjacent to button mounted integral with car front return panel. 2. Provide two-way communication between car and machine room if required. 2.09 CAR ENCLOSURE A. Car Enclosure Passenger Elevator: Provide comp lete as specified herein. Provide the following features. 1. Shell: Reinforced 14 gauge furniture steel formed panels with baked enamel interior finish as selected. Apply sound-deadening mastic to exterior. 2. Canopy: Reinforced 12 gauge furniture steel formed panels with lockable, hinged emergency exit. Interior finish white reflective baked enamel. 3. Front Return Panels: Reinforced 14 gauge bronze satin finish with cutouts for car operating panel(s) and other equipment. 4. Entrance Columns: Reinforced 14 gauge bronze satin finish. 5. Transom: Reinforced 14 gauge bronze satin finish full width of enclosure. 6. Car Door Panels: Reinforced minimum16 gauge bronze satin finish. Same construction as hoistway door panels. 7. Base: Baked enamel with concealed ventilation cutouts.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 16LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. 8. Interior Wall Finish: Include allowance of $10,000 and 600 lbs. for interior car finishes. 9. Ventilation: Two-speed OE exhaust blower mounted to car canopy on isolated rubber grommets. Exhaust blower shall meet requirements of Item 2.03, H. 10. Lighting: Provide direct incandescent fixt ures with wiring and hookup. Coordinate with emergency lighting requirements. Provide emergency lighting integral with portion of normal car lighting system. Include required transformer. 11. Suspended Ceiling: Special design included in allowance in Item 8 above. 12. Handrails: Minimum 1-1/4" diameter tubular grab bar. Special design included in allowance in Item 8 above. 13. Pads and Buttons: Three-piece removable pads. Two pads covering side walls and adjacent front returns and one covering rear wall. Provi de cutouts to access main car operating panel. 2.10 HALL CONTROL STATIONS A. Pushbuttons: Provide two risers with flush mount ed faceplates. Include pushbuttons for each direction of travel which illuminate to indicate call regist ration. Include approved engraved message and pictorial representation prohibiting use of elevator during fire or other emergency situation as part of faceplate. Pushbutton design shall match car operating panel pushbuttons. 2.11 SIGNALS A. Car Direction Lantern: Provide fl ush-mounted car lantern in all car entrance columns. Illuminate up or down LED lights and sound electronic tone once for up and twice for down direction travel as doors open. Sound tone once for up direction and twice for down direction. Sound level shall be adjustable from 0 - 80 dBA measured at 5'-0" in front of hall c ontrol station and 3'-0" off floor. Provide adjustable car door dwell time to comply with ADA requirements relative to hall call notification time. Car direction lenses shall be arrow shaped with faceplates. Lenses shall be minimum 2-1/2" in their smallest dimension. B. Car Position Indicator: Alpha-numeric digital indicator containing floor designations and direction arrows a minimum of 1/2" high to indicate floor serv ed and direction of car travel. Locate fixture in car front return panel. When a car leaves or passes a floor, illuminate indication representing position of car in hoistway. Illuminate proper directi on arrow to indicate direction of travel. C. Hall Position Indicator: Alpha-numeric digital indicator containing floor designations and direction arrows a minimum of 1/2" high to indicate floor serv ed and direction of car travel. Mount integral with hall lanterns at Lobby Level. D. Faceplate Material and Finish: Bronze satin finish, all fixtures. E. Floor Passing Tone: Provide an audible tone of no less than 20 decibels and frequency of no higher than 1500 Hz, to sound as the car passes or stops at a floor served. F. Voice Synthesizer: Provide electronic device wi th easily reprogrammable message and female voice to announce car direction, floor, emer gency exiting instructions, etc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CONDITION INSPECTION A. Prior to beginning installation of equipment, exami ne hoistway and machine room areas. Verify that no irregularities exist which affect execution of work specified.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 17LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. B. Do not proceed with installation until work in place conforms to project requirements. 3.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver material in Provider’s or iginal, unopened protective packaging. B. Store material in original protective packaging. Prevent soiling, physical damage, or moisture damage. C. Protect equipment and exposed finishes from dam age and stains during transportation, erection, and construction. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment in accordance with Provider’s instructions, referenced Codes, specification and approved submittals. B. Install machine room equipment with clearances in accordance with referenced Codes and specification. C. Install all equipment so it may be easily removed for maintenance and repair. D. Install all equipment for ease of maintenance. E. Install all equipment to afford maximum acce ssibility, safety, and continuity of operation. F. Remove oil, grease, scale, and other foreign ma tter from the following equipment and apply one coat of field-applied machinery enamel. 1. All exposed equipment and metal work installed as part of this work which does not have architectural finish. 2. Machine room equipment, hoistway equipment including guide rails, guide rail brackets, and pit equipment. 3. Neatly touch up damaged fact ory-painted surfaces with original paint color. Protect machine-finish surfaces against corrosion. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Work at jobsite will be checked during course of installation. Full cooperation with reviewing personnel is mandatory. Accomplish corrective work required prior to performing further installation. B. Have Code Authority acceptance inspecti on performed and complete corrective work. 3.05 ADJUSTMENTS A. Install rails plumb and align vertically with tolerance of 1/16" in 100'-0". Secure joints without gaps and file any irregularities to a smooth surface. B. Static balance car to equalize pr essure of guide shoes on guide rails. C. Lubricate all equipment in accordan ce with Provider’s instructions. D. Adjust motors, power conversion units, brakes, co ntrollers, leveling switches, limit switches, stopping switches, door operators, interlocks, and safety devices to achieve required performance levels.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 18LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. 3.06 CLEANUP A. Keep work areas orderly and free from debris during progress of project. Remove packaging materials on a daily basis. B. Remove all loose materials and filings resulting from work. C. Clean machine room equipment and floor. D. Clean hoistways, car, car enclosure, entrances, operating and signal fixtures. 3.07 ACCEPTANCE REVIEW AND TESTS A. Review procedure shall apply for individual elevat ors, portions of groups of elevators and completed groups of elevators accepted on an interim basis or elevators and groups of elevators completed, accepted, and placed into operation. B. Provider shall perform review and evaluation of all aspects of its work prior to requesting Consultant's final review. Work shall be considered ready for Consultant's final contract compliance review when all Provider's tests are complete and all elements of wo rk or a designated portion thereof are in place and elevator or groups of elevators are deemed ready for service as intended. C. Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for Consultant’s review. Notify Consultant a minimum of five (5) working days in advance when ready for final review of elevator or group. D. Consultant’s written list of observed deficiencies of materials, equipment and operating systems will be submitted to Provider for corrective action. Co nsultant’s review shall include as a minimum: 1. Workmanship and equipment compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Contract speed, capacity, floor-to-floor, and do or performance comply with Contract Documents. 3. Performance of following is satisfactory: a. Starting, accelerating, running b. Decelerating, stopping accuracy c. Door operation and closing force d. Equipment noise levels e. Signal fixture utility f. Overall ride quality g. Performance of door control devices h. Operations of emergency two-way communication device i. Operations of firefighters' service j. Operations of emergency brake device 4. Test Results: a. In all test conditions, obtain specified contract speed, performance times, stopping accuracy without re-leveling, and ride quality to satisfaction of Purchaser and Consultant. Tests shall be conducted under both no load and full load condition. b. Temperature rise in motor windings limited to 50° Celsius above ambient. A full-capacity, one (1) hour running test, stopping at each floor for ten (10) seconds in up and down directions, may be required. E. Performance Guarantee: Should Consultant’s review identify defects, poor workmanship, variance or noncompliance with requirements of specified Code s and/or ordinances, or variance or noncompliance with the requirements of Contract Documents, Prov ider shall complete corrective work in an expedient manner to satisfaction of Purchaser and Consultant at no cost as follows: 1. Replace equipment that does not meet Code or Contract Document requirements.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTIONELEVATORS JANUARY 7, 2008 14210 - 19LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01. 2. Perform work and furnish labor, materials, and eq uipment necessary to meet specified operation and performance. 3. Perform retesting required by Governin g Code Authority, Purchaser and Consultant. F. A follow-up final contract compliance review sh all be performed by Consultant after notification by Provider that all deficiencies have been corrected. Provide Consultant with copies of the initial deficiency report marked to indicate items which Pr ovider considers complete. If additional reviews are required due to Provider’s gross non-compliance with initial and follow-up deficiency reports, consultant shall bill Provider at normal billing rates plus ex penses, and Provider acknowledges it will pay for additional compliance reviews. 3.08 PURCHASER’S INFORMATION A. Provide three sets of neatly bound written in formation necessary for proper maintenance and adjustment of equipment within 30 days following final acceptance. Final retention will be withheld until data is received by Purchaser and reviewed by Consultant. Include the following as minimums: 1. Straight-line wiring diagrams of “as-installed” elevator circuits, with index of location and function of components. Provide one set reproducible master. Mount one set wiring diagrams on panels, racked, or similarly protected, in elevator machine room. Provide remaining set rolled and in a protective drawing tube. Maintain all drawi ng sets with addition of all subsequent changes. These diagrams are Purchaser’s property. 2. Lubrication instructions, including recommended grade of lubricants. 3. Parts catalogs for all replaceable parts including ordering forms and instructions. 4. Four sets of keys for all switches and control features properly tagged and marked. 5. Diagnostic equipment complete with access codes, adjusters manuals and set-up manuals for adjustment, diagnosis and troubleshooting of elevat or system, and performance of routine safety tests. 3.09 ELEVATOR FINISH SCHEDULE A. Elevator Type: Ecospace 4000# ma chine roomless, 150 fpm, 9’-4” x 6’-11” min. hoistway dimensions, 4’-0” door width, 7 stops, accepts gurney, elevator cab finishes: 1. Ceiling: LF-88, bronze satin finish, round LED lighting. 2. Handrails: 3” flat in bronze satin finish 3. Walls: Wilsonart 7054-60 Wild Cherry or Wilsonart 7039-60 Windsor Mahogany (submit samples for review with shops) 4. Floor: install carpet to match elevator lobby 5. Door: elevator door brushed bronze satin finish, aluminum sill 6. Front return: full width wrap around return bronze satin finish steel front 7. Cab height: standard 8. Call buttons: call buttons to be in existing location for existing elevator and new elevator combined, bronze satin finish. 9. Controls: KSS 500 package with control panel, ha ll station and hall lanterns. Replace existing hall station and hall lanterns in existing elevat or lobby and coordinate controls with existing elevator. Bronze satin finish 10. Coordination: Call buttons and signalization to be functionally coordinated with the existing elevator, bronze satin finish. END OF SECTION
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION SECTION 14220 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL....................................................................................................................................................... 1 1.01 WORK INCLUDED............................................................................................................................. 1 1.02 RELATED WORK PROVIDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS ........................................................... 1 1.03 DEFINITIONS..................................................................................................................................... 1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................... 1 1.05 DOCUMENT AND SITE VERIFICATION .......................................................................................... 2 1.06 SUBMITTALS..................................................................................................................................... 2 1.07 PERMIT, TEST AND INSPECTION................................................................................................... 2 1.08 MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................................. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................... 3 2.01 SUMMARY ......................................................................................................................................... 3 2.02 MATERIALS ....................................................................................................................................... 5 2.03 CAR PERFORMANCE....................................................................................................................... 5 2.04 OPERATION ...................................................................................................................................... 6 2.05 MACHINE ROOM EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................ 7 2.06 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................................. 9 2.07 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES ................................................................................................................. 10 2.08 CAR EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................. 10 2.09 CAR ENCLOSURE ............................................................................................................................ 12 2.10 HALL CONTROL STATIONS............................................................................................................. 13 2.11 SIGNALS............................................................................................................................................ 13 PART 3 EXECUTION................................................................................................................................................... 13 3.01 SITE CONDITION INSPECTION ....................................................................................................... 13 3.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ..................................................................... 13 3.03 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................................. 14 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .............................................................................................................. 14 3.05 ADJUSTMENTS................................................................................................................................. 14 3.06 CLEANUP .......................................................................................................................................... 14 3.07 ACCEPTANCE REVIEW AND TESTS .............................................................................................. 15 3.08 PURCHASER’S INFORMATION ....................................................................................................... 15
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 1 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 SECTION 14220 ELECTRIC TRACTION EL EVATOR MODERNIZATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. 1 traction elevator as follows: 1. 1 Geared Passenger Elevator, Car 1 B. All engineering, equipment, labor, and permits requi red to satisfactorily complete elevator modernization required by Contract Documents. C. Applicable conditions of General, Special, and S upplemental Conditions, Division 1, and all sections listed in Contract Docume nts "Table of Contents." D. Preventive maintenance as described in Section 01800 herein. E. Cartage and Hoisting: All required staging, hoistin g and movement to, on and from the site including new equipment, reused equipment, or dismantling and removal of existing equipment. F. Unless specifically identified as “Reuse,” “R etain,” or “Refurbish,” provide new equipment. G. Protective barrier(s) between car(s) in normal operation and adjacent car(s) in the modernization process. Full depth and height of hoistway. H. Hoistway, pit and machine room barricades as required. 1.02 RELATED WORK PROVIDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS See Section 01900, Related Work Provided Under Other Sections. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Terms used are defined in the latest edition of the Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, ASME A17.1. B. Reference to a device or a part of the equipment ap plies to the number of devices or parts required to complete the installation. C. Provisions of this specification are applic able to all elevators unless identified otherwise. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualified Providers: Alternate Providers must receive approval of Architect, Purchaser and/or Consultant at least 14 days prior to bid date. B. Approved Providers: Alternat e Providers must receive approval of Architect, Purchaser and/or Consultant at least 14 calendar days prior to bid date. 1. Geared Elevator(s): KONE, Otis, Schindler, ThyssenKrupp. C. Compliance with Regulatory Agencies: See Section 01040, Project Procedures.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 2 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 D. Warranty: 1. Material and workmanship of installation shall comply in every respect with Contract Documents. Correct defective material or workmanship which develops within one year from date of final acceptance of all work to satisfaction of Arch itect, Purchaser and Consultant at no additional cost, unless due to ordinary wear and tear, or improper use or care by Purchaser. Perform maintenance in accordance with terms and condi tions indicated in the Preventive Maintenance Agreement. 2. Defective is defined to include, but not limit ed to; operation or control system failures, car performance below required minimum, excessive wear, unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need for excessive maintenance, abnormal noise or vibration, and similar unsatisfactory conditions. 3. Retained Equipment: All retained components, parts, and materials shall be cleaned, checked, modified, repaired or replaced, so each co mponent and its parts are in like new operating condition. Retained equipment must be compat ible for integration with new systems. All retained equipment shall be covered under the wa rranty provisions, of Article 1.04, D, 1 & 2 above. No prorations of equipment or parts sha ll be allowed on preventive maintenance contract between the Provider and Purchaser. 4. Make modifications, requirements, adjustments and improvements to meet performance requirements of Sections 01700 and 14220. 1.05 DOCUMENT AND SITE VERIFICATION In order to discover and resolve conflicts or lack of definition which might creat e problems, Provider must review Contract Documents and site conditions for compatib ility with its product prior to submittal of quotation. Review existing structure, electrical and mechanical provisions for com patibility with Prov ider's pr oducts. Purchaser will not pay for change to structural, mech anical, electrical, or other systems required to accommodate Provider’s equipment. 1.06 SUBMITTALS See Section 01300, Submittals, and Section 01700, Final Contract Compliance Review, Article 1.03. 1.07 PERMIT, TEST AND INSPECTION A. Obtain and pay for permit, license, and inspec tion fee necessary to complete installation. B. Perform test required by Governing Authority in accordance with procedure described in ASME A17.2 Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks in the presence of Authorized Representative. C. Supply personnel and equipment for test and final re view by Consultant, as required in Section 01700. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Interim: See Section 01800, Maintenance, Article 1.01, A. B. Warranty Maintenance: See Section 01 800, Maintenance, Article 1.02, A. C. Preventive Maintenance: See Secti on 01800, Maintenance, Article 1.03, A.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 3 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUMMARY A. 1 Passenger Elevator B. Unless specifically identified as “r etain existing,” provide new equipment. EXISTING EQUIPMENT DISPOSITION NUMBER: CAR 1 CAR 1 RETAIN EXISTING CAPACITY: 2000 # 2000 # CLASS LOADING: PASSENGER CLASS A RETAIN EXISTING CONTRACT SPEED: 125 F.P.M. 350 F.P.M. ROPING: 1:1 RETAIN EXISTING MACHINE: GEARED PROVIDE NEW MACHINE LOCATION: OVERHEAD RETAIN EXISTING OPERATIONAL CONTROL: SELECTIVE COLLECTIVE MICROPROCESSOR BASED SYSTEM DUPLEX SELECTIVE COLLECTIVE MICROPROCESSOR BASED SYSTEM MOTOR CONTROL: AC, MICROPROCESSOR BASED WITH DIGITAL CLOSED-LOOP FEEDBACK AC, VARIABLE VOLTAGE, VARIABLE FREQUENCY MICROPROCESSOR BASED WITH DIGITAL CLOSED-LOOP FEEDBACK POWER CHARACTERISTICS: FIELD VERIFY RETAIN EXISTING STOPS: 7 FRONT RETAIN EXISTING OPENINGS: 7 FRONT RETAIN EXISTING FLOORS SERVED: 1, 2, L, 4, 5, AND 6 FRONT RETAIN EXISTING TRAVEL: 59’-0” ±. FIELD VERIFY RETAIN EXISTING PLATFORM SIZE: FIELD VERIFY RETAIN EXISTING MINIMUM CLEAR INSIDE CAR: FIELD VERIFY RETAIN EXISTING ENTRANCE SIZE: 3’-0” WIDE X 7’-0 ” HIGH 3’-0” WIDE X 7’-0” HIGH. RETAIN EXISTING ENTRANCE TYPE: SINGLE SPEED, SIDE OPENING SINGLE SPEED, SIDE OPENING DOOR OPERATION: MEDIUM SPEED, HEAVY-DUTY DOOR OPERATOR, MINIMUM OPENING SPEED 1-1/2 F.P.S. HIGH SPEED, HEAVY-DUTY, DOOR OPERATOR, MINIMUM OPENING SPEED 2-1/2 F.P.S.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 4 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 EXISTING EQUIPMENT DISPOSITION DOOR PROTECTION: INFRARED, FULL SCREEN D EVICE INFRARED, FULL SCREEN DEVICE, WITH DIFFERENTIAL TIMING, NUDGING, AND INTERRUPTED BEAM TIME SAFETY: FLEXIBLE GUIDE CLAMP – TYPE B, CAR FLEXIBLE GUIDE CLAMP-TYPE B, CAR. RETAIN EXISTING GUIDE RAILS: PLANED STEEL TEES RETAIN EXISTING BUFFERS: SPRING OIL CAR ENCLOSURE: RETAIN EXISTING BATTERY POWERED EMERGENCY CAR LIGHTING. PROVIDE SEPARATE CONSTANT PRESSURE TEST BUTTON IN CAR SERVICE COMPARTMENT. ILLUMINATE PORTION OF NORMAL CAR LIGHTING SIGNAL FIXTURES: LED ILLUMINATION. PROVIDER’S STANDARD HALL AND CAR PUSHBUTTON STATIONS: DUAL HALL PUSHBUTTON RISERS SINGLE CAR OPERATING PANEL CAR POSITION INDICATORS: SINGLE DIGITAL WITH CAR DIRECTION ARROWS IN CAR LANTERNS: ALL CAR ENTRANCE COLUMNS WITH VOLUME ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC CHIME OR TONE. SOUND TWICE FOR DOWN DIRECTION HALL CAR POSITION INDICATOR: DIGITAL WITH CAR DIRECTION ARROWS AT LOBBY LEVEL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SELF-DIALING, VANDAL RESISTANT, PUSH TO CALL, TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH RECALL, TRACKING AND VOICELESS COMMUNICATION FIXTURE SUBMITTAL: SUBMIT BROCHURE DEPICTING PROVIDER’S PROPOSED DESIGNS WITH BID ADDITIONAL FEATURES – CAR 2: CAR TOP INSPECTION STATION FIREFIGHTERS’ SERVICE, PHASE I AND II, INCLUDING ALTERNATE FLOOR RETURN ACCESSIBILITY SIGNAGE STATIONARY CAR RETURN PANEL ARRANGED FOR SURFACE APPLIED CAR OPERATING PANEL
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 5 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 EXISTING EQUIPMENT DISPOSITION HOISTWAY ACCESS SWITCHES, TOP AND BOTTOM FLOORS HOISTWAY DOOR UNLOCKING DEVICE, ALL FLOORS PLATFORM ISOLATION LOAD-WEIGHING DEVICE ANTI-NUISANCE FEATURE INDEPENDENT SERVICE FEATURE MACHINE, POWER CONVERSION UNIT, AND CONTROLLER SOUND ISOLATION TAMPER RESISTANT FASTENERS FOR ALL FASTENINGS EXPOSED TO THE PUBLIC ONE YEAR WARRANTY MAINTENANCE WITH 24-HOUR CALL-BACK SERVICE SIGNAGE ENGRAVING FILLED WITH BLACK PAINT OR APPROVED ETCHING PROCESS NO VISIBLE COMPANY NAME OR LOGO WIRING DIAGRAMS, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, AND PARTS ORDERING INFORMATION SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MEANS AND INSTRUCTIONS 2.02 MATERIALS A. See Section 01600, Materials. 2.03 CAR PERFORMANCE A. Car Speed: ± 3% of contract speed under any loading condition. B. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold 125% of rated load. C. Car Stopping Zone: ±1/4" under any loading condition. D. Door Opening Time: Seconds from start of opening to fully open: 1. Car 2: 2.1 seconds. E. Door Closing Time: Seconds from start of closing to fully closed: 1. Car 2: 3.4 seconds.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 6 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 F. Car Floor-to-Floor Performance Time: Seconds fr om start of doors closing until doors are 3/4 open (1/2 open for side opening doors) and car level and stopped at next successive floor under any loading condition or travel direction (9’-6” typical floor height): 1. Car 2: 10.1 seconds. G. Car Ride Quality: 1. Horizontal acceleration within car during all riding and door operating conditions. Not more than 20 mg (geared) peak to peak (adjacent peaks) in the 1 - 10 Hz range. 2. Acceleration and Deceleration: Smooth constant and not more than 3 feet/second² with an initial ramp between 0.5 and 0.75 second. 3. Sustained Jerk: Not more than 8 feet/second³. H. Airborne Noise: Measured noise level of elevat or equipment during operation shall not exceed 50 dBA in elevator lobbies and 60 dBA inside car under any condition including door operation and car ventilation exhaust blower on its highest speed. 2.04 OPERATION A. Duplex Selective Collective Mi croprocessor Based (Modernized Car 1 and New Car 2): Operate cars without attendants from pushbuttons in cars and lo cated at each floor. When cars are available, park one car at main floor (“home” car). Park other car where last used (“free” car). Respond to car calls and hall calls above main floor using the “free” car. Once a car has started, respond to registered calls in the direction of travel and in the order the floors are reached. Do not reverse car direction until all car calls have been answered, or until all hall calls ahead of the car and corresponding to the direction of car travel have been answered. Slow cars and stop automatically at floors corresponding to registered calls in the order in which they are approached in either direction of travel. As slowdo wn is initiated for a hall call, automatically cancel hall call. Cancel car calls in the same manner. Hold car at arrival floor an adjustable time interval to allow passenger transfer. Answer calls corresponding to direction in which car is traveling unless call in the opposite direction is the highest (or lowest) call registered. When the “free” car is clearing calls, start “home” car to respond to: 1. A call registered on “home” car pushbuttons. 2. An up hall call registered below “free” car. 3. An up or a down call registered above “free” car while “free” car is traveling down. 4. A hall call when “free” car is delayed in its normal operation for a predetermined period. When both cars are clearing calls, stop only one car in response to any registered hall call. Return the first car to clear its calls to main fl oor. Should last service required bring both cars to main floor, the first arriving car becomes the “free” car. Illuminate appropriate pushbutton to indicate ca ll registration. Extinguish light when call is answered. B. Other Items: 1. Load Weighing: Provide means for weighing ca r passenger load. Control system to provide dispatching at main floor in advance of normal in tervals when car fills to capacity. Provide hall call by-pass when the car is filled to preset perc entage of rated capacity and traveling in down direction. Field adjustment range: 10% to 100%.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 7 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 2. Anti-Nuisance Feature: If car loading relative to weight in car is not commensurate with number of registered car calls, cancel car calls. Systems employing either load weighing or door protective device for activation of this feature are acceptable. 3. Independent Service: Provide controls for ope ration of each car from its pushbuttons only. Close doors by constant pressure on desired de stination floor button or door close button. Open doors automatically upon arrival at selected floor. C. Firefighters’ Service: Provide equipment and ope ration in accordance with Code requirements. D. Automatic Car Stopping Zone: Stop car within 1/4" above or below the landing sill. Maintain stopping zone regardless of load in car, direction of travel, distance between landings, hoist rope slippage or stretch. E. Remote Monitoring and Diagnostics: Equip each co ntroller, with standard ports, interface boards, and drivers to accept maintenance, data logging, fault finding diagnostic, and monitoring computers, keyboards, modems, and programming tools. The syst em shall be capable of driving remote color CRT monitor(s) that continually scan and di splay the status of each car and call. F. Motion Control: Microprocessor based AC, variable-voltage, variable frequency with digitally encoded closed-loop velocity feedback suitable for operati on specified and capable of providing smooth, comfortable car acceleration, retardation, and dy namic braking. Limit the difference in car speed between full load and no load to not more than ±3% of the contract speed. G. Door Operation: Automatically open doors when car arrives at main floor. At expiration of normal dwell time, close doors. H. Standby Lighting and Alarm: Car mounted battery un it with solid-state charger to operate alarm bell and car emergency lighting. Battery to be rechargeabl e with minimum 5-year life expectancy. Include required transformer. Provide constant pressure te st button in service compartment of car operating panel. Provide lighting integral with portion of normal car lighting system. 2.05 MACHINE ROOM EQUIPMENT A. Arrange equipment in existing machine room spaces and/or as shown on drawings. B. Geared Traction Hoist Machine: 1. Single worm geared or helical geared traction type with AC induction or P.M.S.M. ACV 3 F motor, brake, gear, drive shaft, defle ctor sheave, and gear case moun ted in proper alignment on an isolated bedplate. Provide bedplate blocking to elevate deflector sheave above machine room floor. 2. Provide hoist machine mounted direct driv e, digital, closed-loop velocity encoder. 3. Provide hoist machine drip pans to collect lubricant seepage. C. Solid State Power Conversion and Regulation Unit: 1. Provide solid state, alternating curren t, variable voltage, variable frequency (ACV 3 F), I.G.B.T. converter/inverter drives. 2. Design unit to limit current, suppress noise, and prevent transient voltage feedback into building power supply. Provide internal heat sink cooling fans for the power drive portion of the converter panels. Conform to IEEE standards 519-1 992 for line harmonics and switching noise. 3. Isolate unit to minimize noise and vibration tr ansmission. Provide isolation transformers, filter networks, and choke inductors. 4. Suppress solid-state converte r noises, radio frequency interference, and eliminate regenerative transients induced into the mainline feeders or the building standby power generator. 5. Supplemental direct-current power for the operation of hoist machine brake, door operator, dispatch processor, signal fixtures, et c., from separate static power supply.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 8 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 6. ACV 3 F Drives for gearless elevators shall be rege nerative and utilize IGBT converter/inverter and dynamic braking during overhauling condition. D. Encoder: Direct drive, solid-state, digital ty pe. Update car position at each floor and automatically restore after power loss. E. Controller: UL/CSA labeled. 1. Compartment: Securely mount all assemblies, power supplies, chassis switches, relays, etc., on a substantial, self-supporting steel frame. Comp letely enclose equipment with covers. Provide means to prevent overheating. 2. Relay Design: Magnet operated with contacts of design and material to insure maximum conductivity, long life and reliable operation without overheating or excessive wear. Provide wiping action and means to prevent sticking due to fusion. Contacts carrying high inductive currents shall be provided with arc deflectors or suppressors. 3. Microprocessor-Related Hardware: a. Provide built-in noise suppression devices which provide a high level of noise immunity on all solid-state hardware and devices. b. Provide power supplies with noise suppression devices. c. Isolate inputs from external devices (suc h as pushbuttons) with opto-isolation modules. d. Design control circuits with one leg of power supply grounded. e. Safety circuits shall not be affected by a ccidental grounding of any part of the system. f. System shall automatically re start when power is restored. g. System memory shall be retained in th e event of power failure or disturbance. h. Equipment shall be provided with Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI) shielding within FCC guidelines. 4. Wiring: CSA labeled copper for factory wiring. Neatly route all wiring interconnections and securely attach wiring connections to studs or terminals. 5. Permanently mark components (relays, fuses, PC boards, etc.) with symbols shown on wiring diagrams. 6. Provide controller or machine mounted aux iliary, lockable “open,” disconnect if mainline disconnect is not in sight of controller and/or machine. F. Sleeves and Guards: Provide 2" steel angle guards around cable or duct slots through floor slabs or grating. Provide rope and smoke guards for s heaves, cables, and cable slots in machine room. G. Machine and Equipment Support Beams: Retain ex isting in place. Provide all required supplemental supports and attachments. H. Governor: Centrifugal-type, car driven machine ro om mounted with pull-through jaws and bi-directional shutdown switches. Provide required bracketing and supports for attachment to building structure. I. Emergency Brake: 1. Provide means to prevent ascending car ov er-speed and unintended car movement per Code. 2. Acceptable emergency brake devices: a. BODE Rope Brake b. Hollister-Whitney Rope Gripper 3. Mount the auxiliary brake on suitable structur al steel supports. Provide a drawing showing the supports, stamped by Professional Engineer ve rifying the adequacy of the support provided. 4. Provide control circuits to enable the device to function as required by Code. J. Noise/Vibration Isolation: All elevator equipment including their supports and fastenings to building, shall be mechanically and electrically isolated from the building structure and main line power feeders to minimize objectionable noise and vibration trans mission to car, building structure, or adjacent occupied areas of building.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 9 LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 K. Sound Isolation: 1. Noise level relating to elevator equipment operation in machine room shall not exceed 80 dBA. 2. All dBA readings shall be taken three (3) feet off the floor and three (3) feet from equipment using the "A" weighted scale. 2.06 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT A. Guide Rails: Retain main and counterweight guide rails in place. 1. Clean rails and brackets. Remove rust. 2. Check all rail and bracket fastenings and tighten. 3. Realign rails as required to provide smooth car ride. 4. Provide supplemental rail brackets and/or backing as required by Code or to enhance car ride quality. B. Buffers, Car and Counterweight: Oil type with blocking and support channels. C. Sheaves: Machined grooves and sealed bearin gs. Provide mounting means to machine beams, machine bedplate, car and counterweight stru ctural members, or building structure. D. Counterweight: Retain existing. Replace worn rollers. E. Counterweight Guard: Metal guard in pit. F. Governor Rope and Encoder Tape Tensioning Sheave s: Mount sheaves and support frame on pit floor or guide rail. Provide frame with guides or pivo t point to enable free vertical movement and proper tension of rope and tape. G. Hoist and Governor Ropes: 1. 8 x 19 or 8 x 25 Seale construction, tracti on steel type. Fasten with staggered length, adjustable, spring isolated wedge type shackles. 2. Governor rope to suit Provider’s specification. H. Terminal Stopping: Provide normal and final dev ices. Provide emergency terminal speed limiting devices. I. Electrical Wiring and Wiring Connections: 1. Conductors and Connections: Copper throughout with indivi dual wires coded and connections on identified studs or terminal blocks. Use no splic es or similar connections in wiring except at terminal blocks, control compartments, or junction boxes. Provide 10% spare conductors throughout. Run spare wires from car connection poin ts to individual elevator controllers in the machine room. Provide four pairs of spare shielded communication wires in addition to those required to connect specified items. Tag spares in machine room. 2. Conduit: Painted or galvanized steel conduit, EMT or duct. Conduit size, 1/2". Flexible heavy-duty service cord may be used between fixed car wiring and car door switches for door protective devices. 3. Traveling Cables: Flame and moisture-resistant outer cover. Prevent traveling cable from rubbing or chafing against hoistway or equipment within hoistway. 4. Auxiliary Wiring: Connect fire alarm init iating devices emergency two-way communication system in each car controller in machine room. J. Entrance Equipment: Retain existing. Refurbis h/replace and adjust assemblies to ensure smooth and quiet mechanical open and close of doors. 1. Door Hangers and Rollers: Replace as required. 2. Door Track: Refurbish and/or replace as required.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 10LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 3. Door Interlocks: Refurbish and/or replace as required. 4. Door Closers: Refurbish and/or replace as required K. Hoistway Door Unlocking Device: Provide unlocking device with escutcheon in door panel at all floors, with finish to match adjacent surface. L. Hoistway Access Swit ches: Retain existing. M. Hoistway Access Switches: Mount in wall at t op and bottom floors. Provide switch with faceplate. N. Floor Numbers: Stencil paint 4" high floor designatio ns in contrasting color on inside face of hoistway doors or hoistway fascia in location visible from within car. 2.07 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Frames: Retain existing. B. Door Panels: Retain existing. Provide new door gibs with fire tabs at all floors. Minimum two gibs per panel, one at leading edge, and one at trailing edge of each panel C. Sight Guards: Retain existing. Replace damaged sight guards. D. Sills: Retain existing. Clean and po lish. Check and tighten all fastenings. E. Sill Supports: Retain existing. Check and tighten all fastenings. F. Fascia, Toe Guards and Hanger Covers: Retain existing. Provide as required where damaged or missing. Check and tighten all fastenings. G. Struts and Headers: Retain existi ng. Check and tighten all fastenings. 2.08 CAR EQUIPMENT A. Frame: Retain Existing. C heck and tighten all fastenings. B. Safety Device: Retain existing. Check and tighten all fastenings. C. Platform: Retain existing. Reinforce if required. Check and tighten all fastenings. D. Platform Apron: Retain existing. Check and tighten all fastenings. Replace damaged or missing sections. E. Guide Shoes: Retain existing. Check and tighten all fastenings. Replace worn rollers. F. Sills: Retain existing. Clean and po lish. Check and tighten all fastenings. G. Doors: Retain existing. Retrofit dual gibs, on e at trailing edge and one at leading edge of each panel. H. Door Hangers: Two-point hanger roller with neoprene roller surface and suspension with eccentric upthrust roller adjustment. I. Door Track: Bar or formed, cold-drawn removabl e steel track with smooth roller contact surface. J. Door Header: Construct of minimum 12 gauge steel, shape to provide stiffening flanges.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 11LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 K. Door Electrical Contact: Prohibit car operation unless car door is closed. L. Door Clutch: Heavy-duty clutch, linkage arms, dr ive blocks and pickup rollers or cams to provide positive, smooth, quiet door operation. Design clutch so car doors can be closed, while hoistway doors remain open. M. Restricted Opening Device: Restrict opening of car door(s) outside unlocking zone. N. Door Operator: High speed, heavy-duty door operator capable of opening doors at no less than 2-1/2 f.p.s. Accomplish reversal in no more than 2-1/2" of door movement. Provide solid-state door control with closed loop circuitry to constantly monitor and automatically adjust door operation based upon velocity, position, and motor current. Maintain consistent, smooth and quiet door operation at all floors, regardless of door weight or varying air pressure. Acceptable closed-loop door operators: 1. KONE Renova 2.0 2. Otis HPLIM 3. Schindler QKS 15 Heavy Duty 4. ThyssenKrupp HD91 StarTrac 5. G.A.L. MOVFR O. Door Control Device: 1. Infrared Reopening Device: Black, fully encl osed device with full screen infrared matrix or multiple beams extending vertically along leading edge of each door panel to minimum height of 7'-0" above finished floor. Device shall prevent doors from closing and reverse doors at normal opening speed if beams are obstructed while doors are closing, except during nudging operation. In event of device failure, provide for automatic shutdown of car at floor level with doors open a. Acceptable Infrared Reopening Device: 1) Cegard/MAX-154 by CEDES 2) Gatekeeper by Adams 3) Lambda II by Otis 4) Magic Edge by Tri-Tronics 5) Microlite by ThyssenKrupp 6) Microscan E by T.L. Jones 7) Pana40 Plus by Janus 2. Nudging Operation: After beams of door contro l device are obstructed for a predetermined time interval (minimum 20.0 - 25.0 seconds), warning signal shall sound and doors shall attempt to close with a maximum of 2.5 foot pounds kineti c energy. Activation of the door open button shall override nudging operation and reopen doors. 3. Interrupted Beam Time: When beams are interrupted during initial door opening, hold door open a minimum of 3.0 seconds. When beams are inte rrupted after the initial 3.0 second hold open time, reduce time doors remain open to an adjustable time of approximately 1.0 - 1.5 seconds after beams are reestablished. 4. Differential Door Time: Provide separately adjus table timers to vary time that doors remain open after stopping in response to calls. a. Car Call: Hold open time adjustable between 3.0 and 5.0 seconds. b. Hall Call: Hold open time adjustable between 5.0 and 8.0 seconds. Use hall call time when car responds to coincidental calls. P. Car Operating Panel: 1. One car operating panel with faceplate, consis ting of a metal box containing operating fixtures, mounted behind the car stationary front return panel. Faceplate shall be hinged and constructed of bronze, satin finish.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 12LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 2. Suitably identify floor buttons, alarm button, door open button, door close button and emergency push-to-call button with SCS, Visionmark or Entrada cast tactile symbols surface mounted. Configure plates per local bu ilding code accessibility stand ards including Braille. Locate operating controls no higher than 48" above t he car floor; no lower than 35" for emergency push-to-call button and alarm button. 3. Provide minimum 3/4" diameter raised or flus h floor pushbuttons which illuminate to indicate call registration. 4. Provide alarm button to ring bell locate d on car. Illuminate button when actuated. 5. Provide keyed stop switch at bottom of car ope rating panel in locked car service compartment. 6. Provide “door open” button to stop and reopen doors or hold doors in open position. 7. Provide “door close” button to activate door cl ose cycle. Cycle shall not begin until normal door dwell time for a car or hall call has expired, except firefighters’ operation. 8. Provide firefighters’ Phase II key switch with eng raved instructions filled red. Include light jewel, buzzer, and call cancel button. 9. Provide lockable service compartment with rece ssed flush door. Door material and finish shall match car return panel or car operating panel faceplate. 10. Include the following controls in lockable serv ice cabinet with function and operating positions identified by permanent signage or engraved legend: a. Inspection switch. b. Light switch. c. Three-position exhaust blower switch. d. Independent service switch. e. Constant pressure test button for battery pack emergency lighting. f. 120-volt, AC, GFCI protected electrical convenience outlet. g. Switch to select either floor voice annunciation, floor passing tone, or chime. 11. Provide black paint filled (except as noted), engraved or approved etched signage as follows with approved size and font: a. Phase II firefighters’ operating instructions on main operating panel above corresponding keyswitch filled red. b. Car number on main car operating panel. c. “No Smoking” on main car operating panel. d. Car capacity in pounds on service compartment door. Q. Car Top Control Station: Mount to provide safe access and utilization while standing in an upright position on car top. R. Work Light and Duplex Plug Receptacle: GFCI protec ted outlet at top of car. Include on/off switch and lamp guard. S. Communication System: 1. “Push to Call,” two-way communication instrument in car with automatic dialing, tracking and recall features with shielded wiring to car controller in machine room. Provide dialer with automatic rollover capability with minimum two num bers. Provide consolidator to allow multiple phones connected to one (1) line. a. “Push to Call” button or adjacent light jewel shall illuminate and flash when call is acknowledged. Button shall match car operating panel pushbutton design. Provide uppercase "PUSH TO CALL," "HELP ON THE WAY" engraved signage adjacent to button. b. Provide “Push to Call” button tactile sym bol, engraved signage, and Braille adjacent to button mounted integral with car front return panel. 2.09 CAR ENCLOSURE A. Car Enclosure Passenger/Service Elevator: Retain existing. Modify as required for application of new signal and pushbutton fixtures. Check and tighten all fasteners.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 13LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 2.10 HALL CONTROL STATIONS A. Pushbuttons: Provide two risers with flush mount ed faceplates. Include pushbuttons for each direction of travel which illuminate to indicate call regist ration. Include approved engraved message and pictorial representation prohibiting use of elevator during fire or other emergency situation as part of faceplate. Pushbutton design shall match car operating panel pushbuttons. Provide enlarged faceplate to cover existing wall blockout and facilitate handicapped access requirements. Include approved engraved message and pictorial representation prohibiting us e of elevator during fire or other emergency situation as part of faceplate. Pr ovide any cutting and patching required. 2.11 SIGNALS A. Car Direction Lantern: Provide fl ush-mounted car lantern in all car entrance columns. Illuminate up or down LED lights and sound electronic tone once for up and twice for down direction travel as doors open. Sound tone once for up direction and twice for down direction. Sound level shall be adjustable from 0 - 80 dBA measured at 5'-0" in front of hall c ontrol station and 3'-0" off floor. Provide adjustable car door dwell time to comply with ADA requirements relative to hall call notification time. Car direction lenses shall be arrow shaped with faceplates. Lenses shall be minimum 2-1/2" in their smallest dimension. B. Car Position Indicator: Alpha-numeric digital indicator containing floor designations and direction arrows a minimum of 1/2" high to indicate floor serv ed and direction of car travel. Locate fixture in car front return panel. When a car leaves or passes a floor, illuminate indication representing position of car in hoistway. Illuminate proper directi on arrow to indicate direction of travel. C. Hall Position Indicator: Alpha-numeric digital indicator containing floor designations and direction arrows a minimum of 1/2" high to indicate floor serv ed and direction of car travel. Mount integral with hall lanterns at Lobby Level. D. Faceplate Material and Finish: Bronze satin finish, all fixtures. E. Floor Passing Tone: Provide an audible tone of no less than 20 decibels and frequency of no higher than 1500 Hz, to sound as the car passes or stops at a floor served. F. Voice Synthesizer: Provide electronic device wi th easily reprogrammable message and female voice to announce car direction, floor, emer gency exiting instructions, etc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CONDITION INSPECTION A. Prior to beginning installation of equipment, exami ne hoistway and machine room areas. Verify that no irregularities exist which affect execution of work specified. B. Do not proceed with installation until work in place conforms to project requirements. 3.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver material in Provider’s or iginal, unopened protective packaging. B. Store material in original protective packaging. Prevent soiling, physical damage, or moisture damage.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 14LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 C. Protect equipment and exposed finishes from dam age and stains during transportation, erection, and construction. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment in accordance with Provider’s instructions, referenced Codes, specification and approved submittals. B. Install machine room equipment with clearances in accordance with referenced Codes and specification. C. Install all equipment so it may be easily removed for maintenance and repair. D. Install all equipment for ease of maintenance. E. Install all equipment to afford maximum acce ssibility, safety, and continuity of operation. F. Remove oil, grease, scale, and other foreign ma tter from the following equipment and apply one coat of field-applied machinery enamel. 1. All exposed equipment and metal work installed as part of this work which does not have architectural finish. 2. Machine room equipment, hoistway equipment including guide rails, guide rail brackets, and pit equipment. 3. Neatly touch up damaged fact ory-painted surfaces with original paint color. Protect machine-finish surfaces against corrosion. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Work at jobsite will be checked during course of installation. Full cooperation with reviewing personnel is mandatory. Accomplish corrective work required prior to performing further installation. B. Have Code Authority acceptance inspecti on performed and complete corrective work. 3.05 ADJUSTMENTS A. Install rails plumb and align vertically with tolerance of 1/16" in 100'-0". Secure joints without gaps and file any irregularities to a smooth surface. B. Static balance car to equalize pr essure of guide shoes on guide rails. C. Lubricate all equipment in accordan ce with Provider’s instructions. D. Adjust motors, power conversion units, brakes, co ntrollers, leveling switches, limit switches, stopping switches, door operators, interlocks, and safety devices to achieve required performance levels. 3.06 CLEANUP A. Keep work areas orderly and free from debris during progress of project. Remove packaging materials on a daily basis. B. Remove all loose materials and filings resulting from work. C. Clean machine room equipment and floor.
LERCH BATES INC. Elevator Consulting Group ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION JANUARY 7, 2008 14220 - 15LION SQUARE LODGE LB PROJECT NO. 1000002185-01 D. Clean hoistways, car, car enclosure, entrances, operating and signal fixtures. 3.07 ACCEPTANCE REVIEW AND TESTS See Section 01700, Article 1.02, Consultant's Final Observation and Review Requirements. 3.08 PURCHASER’S INFORMATION See Section 01700, Article 1.03, Fi nal Contract Compliance Review. 3.09 ELEVATOR FINISH SCHEDULE A. Elevator Type: Existing elevator to be refinished as follows 1. Controls: hall lanterns and car position indicator to match those indicated in Section 14210 Elevator Finish Schedule. END OF SECTION